Omron 3G3MV Owner Manual

PDF

Documento

Anuncio

Cat. No. I527-E1-04

USER’S MANUAL

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV

Multi-function Compact Inverter

Thank you for choosing this SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-series product. Proper use and handling of the product will ensure proper product performance, will lengthen product life, and may prevent possible accidents.

Please read this manual thoroughly and handle and operate the product with care.

1. To ensure safe and proper use of the OMRON Inverters, please read this USER’S

MANUAL (Cat. No. I527-E1) to gain sufficient knowledge of the devices, safety information, and precautions before actual use.

2. The products are illustrated without covers and shieldings for closer look in this

USER’S MANUAL. For actual use of the products, make sure to use the covers and shieldings as specified.

3. This USER’S MANUAL and other related user’s manuals are to be delivered to the actual end users of the products.

4. Please keep this manual close at hand for future reference.

5. If the product has been left unused for a long time, please inquire at our sales representative.

NOTICE

1. This manual describes the functions of the product and relations with other products. You should assume that anything not described in this manual is not possible.

2. Although care has been given in documenting the product, please contact your

OMRON representative if you have any suggestions on improving this manual.

3. The product contains potentially dangerous parts under the cover. Do not attempt to open the cover under any circumstances. Doing so may result in injury or death and may damage the product. Never attempt to repair or disassemble the product.

4. We recommend that you add the following precautions to any instruction manuals you prepare for the system into which the product is being installed.

Precautions on the dangers of high-voltage equipment.

Precautions on touching the terminals of the product even after power has been turned off. (These terminals are live even with the power turned off.)

5. Specifications and functions may be changed without notice in order to improve product performance.

Items to Check Before Unpacking

Check the following items before removing the product from the package:

Has the correct product been delivered (i.e., the correct model number and specifications)?

Has the product been damaged in shipping?

S Are any screws or bolts loose?

USER’S MANUAL

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV

SERIES

Multi-function Compact Inverter

Notice:

OMRON products are manufactured for use according to proper procedures by a qualified operator and only for the purposes described in this manual.

The following conventions are used to indicate and classify precautions in this manual.

Always heed the information provided with them. Failure to heed precautions can result in injury to people or damage to property.

DANGER

Indicates an imminently hazardous situation which, if not avoided, will result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

WARNING

Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, could result in death or serious injury. Additionally, there may be severe property damage.

Caution Indicates a potentially hazardous situation which, if not avoided, may result in minor or moderate injury, or property damage.

OMRON Product References

All OMRON products are capitalized in this manual. The word “Unit” is also capitalized when it refers to an OMRON product, regardless of whether or not it appears in the proper name of the product.

The abbreviation “Ch,” which appears in some displays and on some OMRON products, often means “word” and is abbreviated “Wd” in documentation in this sense.

The abbreviation “PLC” means Programmable Controller.

Visual Aids

The following headings appear in the left column of the manual to help you locate different types of information.

Note Indicates information of particular interest for efficient and convenient operation of the product.



OMRON, 1999

All rights reserved. No part of this publication may be reproduced, stored in a retrieval system, or transmitted, in any form, or by any means, mechanical, electronic, photocopying, recording, or otherwise, without the prior written permission of OMRON.

No patent liability is assumed with respect to the use of the information contained herein. Moreover, because

OMRON is constantly striving to improve its high-quality products, the information contained in this manual is subject to change without notice. Every precaution has been taken in the preparation of this manual. Nevertheless, OMRON assumes no responsibility for errors or omissions. Neither is any liability assumed for damages resulting from the use of the information contained in this publication.

General Precautions

Observe the following precautions when using the SYSDRIVE Inverters and peripheral devices.

This manual may include illustrations of the product with protective covers removed in order to describe the components of the product in detail. Make sure that these protective covers are on the product before use.

Consult your OMRON representative when using the product after a long period of storage.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Operation, maintenance, or inspection must be performed after turning OFF the power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) are OFF, and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not damage, pull on, apply stress to, place heavy objects on, or pinch the cables.

Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the rotating parts of the motor under operation. Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Do not modify the product. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Caution

Do not store, install, or operate the product in the following places. Doing so may result in electrical shock, fire or damage to the product.

Locations subject to direct sunlight.

S Locations subject to temperatures or humidity outside the range specified in the specifications.

Locations subject to condensation as the result of severe changes in temperature.

S Locations subject to corrosive or flammable gases.

Locations subject to exposure to combustibles.

Locations subject to dust (especially iron dust) or salts.

Locations subject to exposure to water, oil, or chemicals.

Locations subject to shock or vibration.

Do not touch the Inverter radiator, regenerative resistor, or Servomotor while the power is being supplied or soon after the power is turned OFF. Doing so may result in a skin burn due to the hot surface.

Caution

Do not conduct a dielectric strength test on any part of the Inverter. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Take appropriate and sufficient countermeasures when installing systems in the following locations. Not doing so may result in equipment damage.

S Locations subject to static electricity or other forms of noise.

Locations subject to strong electromagnetic fields and magnetic fields.

Locations subject to possible exposure to radioactivity.

Locations close to power supplies.

Transportation Precautions

Caution Do not hold by front cover or panel , instead, hold by the radiation fin (heat sink) while transporting the product. Doing so may result in injury.

Caution

Do not pull on the cables. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Use the eye-bolts only for transporting the Inverter. Using them for transporting the machinery may result in injury or malfunction.

Installation Precautions

WARNING

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Caution Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Wiring Precautions

WARNING

Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

WARNING

Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100

Ω

or less for the 200-V AC class, or 10

Ω

or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock.

Caution

Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.

Not doing so may result in fire.

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

The motor may start operation if input terminal S2 is turned ON with the default parameter settings. Wire terminals with NC contacts (e.g., 3-wire sequences) only after setting the multi-function input parameters.

Operation and Adjustment Precautions

WARNING

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or damage to the product.

WARNING

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine immediately after resetting momentary power interruption to avoid an unexpected restart (if operation is set to be continued in the processing selection function after momentary power interruption is reset). Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Be sure confirm that the RUN signal is turned OFF before turning ON the power supply, resetting the alarm, or switching the LOCAL/REMOTE selector. Doing so while the RUN signal is turned ON may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Maintenance and Inspection Precautions

WARNING

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

WARNING

Maintenance or inspection must be performed only after turning OFF the power supply, confirming that the CHARGE indicator (or status indicators) is turned OFF, and after waiting for the time specified on the front cover. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

WARNING

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury.

Caution

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless handling may result in malfunction.

Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to the product, or malfunction.

Warning Labels

Warning labels are pasted on the product as shown in the following illustration. Be sure to follow the instructions given there.

Warning Labels

Warning label

Contents of Warning

Checking Before Unpacking

Checking the Product

On delivery, always check that the delivered product is the SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter that you ordered.

Should you find any problems with the product, immediately contact your nearest local sales representative.

Checking the Nameplate

Inverter model

Input specifications

Output specifications

Checking the Model

3G3MV-A4007

Maximum applicable motor capacity

Voltage class

Installation type

Series name: 3G3MV Series

Maximum Applicable Motor Capacity

001 0.1 (0.1) kW

002 0.25/0.37 (0.2) kW

004 0.55 (0.4) kW

007 1.1 (0.75) kW

015 1.5 (1.5) kW

022 2.2 (2.2) kW

037 3.7 (3.7) kW

055 5.5 (5.5) kW

075 7.5 (7.5) kW

Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used in Japan.

Voltage Class

Three-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)

Single-phase 200-V AC input (200-V class)

Three-phase 400-V AC input (400-V class)

Installation Type

Panel-mounting (IP10 min.) or closed wall-mounting models

Closed wall-mounting models

(NEMA1 type for North America)

Note A-type models with 5.5-KW and 7.5-KW capacity also have NEMA1 enclosure ratings.

Checking for Damage

Check the overall appearance and check for damage or scratches resulting from transportation.

Checking the Accessories

Note that this manual is the only accessory provided with the 3G3MV. Set screws and other necessary parts must be provided by the user.

Read and Understand this Manual

Please read and understand this manual before using the product. Please consult your OMRON representative if you have any questions or comments.

Warranty and Limitations of Liability

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

WARRANTY

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

OMRON’s exclusive warranty is that the products are free from defects in materials and workmanship for

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á a period of one year (or other period if specified) from date of sale by OMRON.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

OMRON MAKES NO WARRANTY OR REPRESENTATION, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, REGARDING

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

NON-INFRINGEMENT, MERCHANTABILITY, OR FITNESS FOR PARTICULAR PURPOSE OF THE

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

PRODUCTS. ANY BUYER OR USER ACKNOWLEDGES THAT THE BUYER OR USER ALONE HAS

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

DETERMINED THAT THE PRODUCTS WILL SUITABLY MEET THE REQUIREMENTS OF THEIR

INTENDED USE. OMRON DISCLAIMS ALL OTHER WARRANTIES, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

LIMITATIONS OF LIABILITY

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

OMRON SHALL NOT BE RESPONSIBLE FOR SPECIAL, INDIRECT, OR CONSEQUENTIAL

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

DAMAGES, LOSS OF PROFITS OR COMMERCIAL LOSS IN ANY WAY CONNECTED WITH THE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á PRODUCTS, WHETHER SUCH CLAIM IS BASED ON CONTRACT, WARRANTY, NEGLIGENCE, OR

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

STRICT LIABILITY.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

In no event shall the responsibility of OMRON for any act exceed the individual price of the product on

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á which liability is asserted.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

IN NO EVENT SHALL OMRON BE RESPONSIBLE FOR WARRANTY, REPAIR, OR OTHER CLAIMS

REGARDING THE PRODUCTS UNLESS OMRON’S ANALYSIS CONFIRMS THAT THE PRODUCTS

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

WERE PROPERLY HANDLED, STORED, INSTALLED, AND MAINTAINED AND NOT SUBJECT TO

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á CONTAMINATION, ABUSE, MISUSE, OR INAPPROPRIATE MODIFICATION OR REPAIR.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Application Considerations

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

SUITABILITY FOR USE

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

OMRON shall not be responsible for conformity with any standards, codes, or regulations that apply to

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ the combination of products in the customer’s application or use of the products.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

At the customer’s request, OMRON will provide applicable third party certification documents identifying

Á ratings and limitations of use that apply to the products. This information by itself is not sufficient for a

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á complete determination of the suitability of the products in combination with the end product, machine,

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á system, or other application or use.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

The following are some examples of applications for which particular attention must be given. This is not

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á intended to be an exhaustive list of all possible uses of the products, nor is it intended to imply that the

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á uses listed may be suitable for the products:

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

• Outdoor use, uses involving potential chemical contamination or electrical interference, or conditions

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á or uses not described in this manual.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á •

Nuclear energy control systems, combustion systems, railroad systems, aviation systems, medical

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á equipment, amusement machines, vehicles, safety equipment, and installations subject to separate

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á industry or government regulations.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

•

Systems, machines, and equipment that could present a risk to life or property.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

Please know and observe all prohibitions of use applicable to the products.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á NEVER USE THE PRODUCTS FOR AN APPLICATION INVOLVING SERIOUS RISK TO LIFE OR

PROPERTY WITHOUT ENSURING THAT THE SYSTEM AS A WHOLE HAS BEEN DESIGNED TO

ADDRESS THE RISKS, AND THAT THE OMRON PRODUCTS ARE PROPERLY RATED AND

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

INSTALLED FOR THE INTENDED USE WITHIN THE OVERALL EQUIPMENT OR SYSTEM.

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ OMRON shall not be responsible for the user’s programming of a programmable product, or any

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á consequence thereof.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Disclaimers

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

CHANGE IN SPECIFICATIONS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

Product specifications and accessories may be changed at any time based on improvements and other

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ reasons.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

It is our practice to change model numbers when published ratings or features are changed, or when significant construction changes are made. However, some specifications of the products may be

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á changed without any notice. When in doubt, special model numbers may be assigned to fix or establish

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á key specifications for your application on your request. Please consult with your OMRON representative

Á ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á at any time to confirm actual specifications of purchased products.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

DIMENSIONS AND WEIGHTS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

Dimensions and weights are nominal and are not to be used for manufacturing purposes, even when tolerances are shown.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

PERFORMANCE DATA

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

Performance data given in this manual is provided as a guide for the user in determining suitability and

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ does not constitute a warranty. It may represent the result of OMRON’s test conditions, and the users

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á must correlate it to actual application requirements. Actual performance is subject to the OMRON

Warranty and Limitations of Liability.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

ERRORS AND OMISSIONS

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

The information in this manual has been carefully checked and is believed to be accurate; however, no

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ responsibility is assumed for clerical, typographical, or proofreading errors, or omissions.

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ Á

ÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁÁ

About this Manual

This manual is divided into the chapters described in the following table. Information is organized by application area to enable you to use the manual more efficiently.

Chapter Contents

Chapter 1 Overview

Chapter 2 Design

Chapter 3 Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Chapter 4 Test Run

Describes features and nomenclature.

Provides dimensions, installation methods, wiring methods, peripheral device design information, and peripheral device selection information.

Describes nomenclature and Digital Operator procedures for operating and monitoring Inverters. Data copying and other functions are described.

Describes the method for controlling a motor through the frequency adjuster on the front of the Inverter. This can be used for trial operation of the system.

Chapter 5 Basic Operation

Chapter 6 Advanced Operation

Chapter 7 Communications

Describes basic Inverter control functions for users not familiar with

Inverters. The functions that must be understood to drive a motor with an Inverter are described.

Describes all of the functions provided by the Inverter. These functions will enable more advanced applications, and includes functions that will improve motor control through the Inverter, such as responsiveness (torque characteristics), increasing speed accuracy,

PID control, overtorque detection, and other functions.

Describes the general-purpose RS-422/RS-485 communications functions provided by the Inverter, including connection methods and sample programming for SYSMAC Programmable Controllers.

Chapter 8 Maintenance Operations Provides maintenance, inspection, and troubleshooting information.

Chapter 9 Specifications

Chapter 10 List of Parameters

Provides Inverter specifications, as well as the specifications and dimensions of peripheral devices.

Lists basic information on Inverter parameters as a reference for users already familiar with Inverter operation. Parameters are listed in order with the page numbers of further information for easy reference.

Chapter 11 Using the Inverter for a

Motor

Describes information on using the Inverter for a motor.

Table of Contents

Chapter 1. Overview . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1-1

1-1 Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-3 New Features . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

1-2

1-5

1-8

Chapter 2. Design . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-1

2-1 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-1 Dimensions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-2 Installation Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2 Wiring . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2

2-6

2-8

2-11

2-2-1 Terminal Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-2-2 Standard Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

2-12

2-20

2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit

2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-21

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-34

2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directives . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2-36

Chapter 3. Preparing for Operation and Monitoring . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-1

3-1 Nomenclature . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-1-2 Outline of Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2

3-4

3-10

3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting Data Written to the EEPROM of the Digital Operator) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

3-11

3-17

3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3-18

Chapter 4. Test Run . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

4-3

4-5

Chapter 5. Basic Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-1

5-1 Initial Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001) . . . .

5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-2

5-3

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

5-3 Operation in V/f Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017)

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-9

5-10

5-11

5-5

5-7

5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11

5-12

5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key Sequences . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-13

5-18

5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-23

Table of Contents

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-25

5-28

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Method

5-10 Multi-function I/O

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-29

5-30

5-10-1 Multi-function Input

5-10-2 Multi-function Output

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-30

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-36

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor Output . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through n067) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

5-38

5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5-39

Chapter 6. Advanced Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-1

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2 Energy-saving Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings

6-3 PID Control

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-6

6-11

6-3-1 PID Control Applications

6-3-2 PID Control Operation

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-11

6-12

6-2

6-3

6-5

6-3-3 Types of PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-12

6-14

6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and Detection Value

6-3-6 PID Control Settings

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-15

6-16

6-3-7 PID Adjustments

6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-19

6-21

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-23

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-26

6-6 Stall Prevention Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-27

6-31

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-35

6-37

6-10 Other Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-39

6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038)

6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-39

6-40

6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation (n081)

6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-40

6-41

6-42

6-10-7 Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-10-8 Frequency Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-43

6-44

6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100)

6-10-10 Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

6-45

6-47

6-10-11 Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-47

6-10-12 Fault Log (n178) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6-48

Table of Contents

Chapter 7. Communications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-1

7-1 Inverter Settings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions

7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004)

7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056)

7-2 Message Communications Basic Format

7-3 DSR Message and Response

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-6

7-8

7-11

7-11 7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

7-4 Enter Command . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-5 Setting the Communications Data

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-13

7-16

7-18

7-19

7-2

7-5

7-6

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

7-6-1 I/O Function

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-21

7-6-2 Monitor Functions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-7 Communications Error Codes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-22

7-27

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-29

7-30

7-9-1 Available Programmable Controllers and Peripheral Devices . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-30

7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function

7-9-4 Creating a Project File

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-9-5 Ladder Program . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

7-33

7-34

7-38

7-47

7-9-6 Communications Response Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-51

Chapter 8. Maintenance Operations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8-1

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Errors)

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Errors)

8-2 Troubleshooting

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2

8-10

8-14

8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-14

8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-16

8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High Speed in Vector Control is Low

8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low

. .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-17

8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are Applied

8-2-8 Motor Burns

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-17

8-18

8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when Inverter is Started

8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when Inverter is Started

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-18

8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control Fails . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-19

8-2-13 Inverter Vibration in Energy-saving Control . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned OFF . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-20

8-2-15 Detects OV (Over voltage) and Stalls when Motor Starts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency Reference . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-20

8-21

8-2-17 Inverter Does Not Run Because EF

(Simultaneous Inputs of Forward and Reverse Commands) is Detected,

Or Motor Rotates Momentarily When Control Device Power is Turned OFF

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

. . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

8-21

8-22

Table of Contents

Chapter 9. Specifications . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-1

9-1 Inverter Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

9-2-1 List of Options

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-2 DeviceNet Communications Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-3 Fan Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-4 Scaling Meter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-10

9-11

9-2-5 Braking Resistor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-6 Braking Resistor Unit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-12

9-14

9-2

9-7

9-9

9-2-7 DC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-8 DIN Track Mounting Bracket . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-15

9-16

9-2-9 Digital Operators . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-17

9-2-10 AC Reactor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-20

9-2-11 EMC-compatible Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-2-12 Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .

9-22

9-30

9-2-13 Output Noise Filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 9-32

Chapter 10. List of Parameters . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10-1

Chapter 11. Using the Inverter for a Motor . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11-1

Revision History . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . R-1

Overview

1-1 Functions

1-2 Nomenclature

1-3 New Features

Chapter 1

Overview

1-1 Functions

Chapter 1

The multi-function compact SYSDRIVE 3G3MV-Series Inverter is the first compact

Inverter to feature open-loop vector control.

The 3G3MV Inverter meets EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.

Furthermore, the 3G3MV-Series Inverter incorporates a variety of convenient control, network, and I/O functions that are versatile and easy-to-use.

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV Inverter Models

•

The following 200-V-class (three- and single-phase 200-V AC types) and 400-V-class (three-phase

400-V AC type) 3G3MV models are available.

Rated voltage Enclosure rating Model

( f IP20)

Closed wall-mounting

NEMA1 and IP20)

Single-phase 200 V AC g

( f IP20)

Closed wall-mounting

NEMA1 and IP20)

Maximum applied motor capacity

0.1 (0.1) kW

0.25 (0.2) kW

0.55 (0.4) kW

1.1 (0.75) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

3.7 (3.7) kW

5.5 (5.5) kW

7.5 (7.5) kW

0.1 (0.1) kW

0.25 (0.2) kW

0.55 (0.4) kW

1.1 (0.75) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

3.7 (3.7) kW

0.37 (0.2) kW

0.55 (0.4) kW

1.1 (0.75) kW

1.5 (1.5) kW

2.2 (2.2) kW

3.7 (3.7) kW

5.5 (5.5) kW

7.5 (7.5) kW

3G3MV-A2001

3G3MV-A2002

3G3MV-A2004

3G3MV-A2007

3G3MV-A2015

3G3MV-A2022

3G3MV-A2037

3G3MV-A2055

3G3MV-A2075

3G3MV-AB001

3G3MV-AB002

3G3MV-AB004

3G3MV-AB007

3G3MV-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB037

3G3MV-A4002

3G3MV-A4004

3G3MV-A4007

3G3MV-A4015

3G3MV-A4022

3G3MV-A4037

3G3MV-A4055

3G3MV-A4075

Note The figures in parentheses indicate capacities for motors used in Japan.

1-2

Overview Chapter 1

Powerful Torque Ideal for a Variety of Applications

The 3G3MV is OMRON’s first compact Inverter incorporating an open-loop vector control function, which ensures a torque output that is 150% of the rated motor torque at an output frequency of 1 Hz.

Ensures a more powerful revolution at low frequencies than any conventional inverter. Furthermore, the

3G3MV Inverter suppresses the revolution fluctuation caused by the load.

Incorporates a fully automatic torque boost function that drives the motor powerfully in V/f control.

Incorporates a high-speed current limit function, thus suppressing overcurrent caused by high torque and ensuring smooth operation of the motor.

Convenient Easy-to-use Functions

•

The FREQUENCY adjuster of the Digital Operator allows easy operation. The default setting is for operation according to the FREQUENCY adjuster setting.

•

The Digital Operator has a parameter copy function ensuring easy parameter control.

•

Ease of maintenance is ensured. The cooling fan is easily replaceable. The life of the cooling fan can be prolonged by turning ON the cooling fan only when the Inverter is in operation.

•

Incorporates a control transistor. Therefore, the Inverter will provide powerful control by just connecting a braking resistor.

•

Incorporates an inrush current preventive circuit that prevents contact weld at the input power supply block.

International Standards (EC Directives and UL/cUL Standards)

The 3G3MV Inverter meets the EC Directives and UL/cUL standard requirements for worldwide use.

EC Directives

Classification

EMC directive

Low-voltage directive

UL/cUL

Applicable standard

EN61800-3

EN50178

UL508C

Compatible with DeviceNet and RS-422/485

•

Supports RS-422 and RS-485 communications conforming to the MODBUS Communications Protocol, thus making it possible to easily construct networks with the use of the Protocol Macro or ASCII

Unit mounted on an OMRON SYSMAC PLC. The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation.

•

Connects to the 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit. A remote I/O function for Device-

Net communications Unit is available to the 3G3MV Inverter, which ensures ease of communications just like standard I/O communications.

Furthermore, DeviceNet communications conform to the DeviceNet communications protocol for open networks, thus allowing construction of multi-vendor networks in which other companies’ devices can coexist.

Note 1.

MODBUS communications and DeviceNet communications cannot be performed simultaneously. It is necessary to select the type of communications required.

Note 2.

Only DeviceNet Communications Units manufactured after January 1st, 2000 can be connected to 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters. Earlier products are not compatible with these Inverters.

1-3

Overview

Handles a Variety of I/O Signals

Handles a variety of I/O signals over a wide application range as described below.

•

Analog voltage input: 0 to 10 V

•

Analog current input: 4 to 20 or 0 to 20 mA

•

Pulse train input: 0.1 to 33.0 kHz set with parameter

•

Multi-function analog output or pulse train output is selectable as monitor output

Chapter 1

Suppression of Harmonics

Connects to DC reactors, thus suppressing harmonics more effectively than conventional AC reactors.

Further improvement in the suppression of harmonics is possible with the combined use of the DC and

AC reactors.

1-4

Overview

1-2 Nomenclature

Panel

Chapter 1

Digital Operator

Front panel mounting screw

RUN indicator

ALARM display

Terminal cover

Front cover

Four mounting holes

Bottom cover

Note None of the following 200-V models have a terminal cover or mounting holes. Instead, the front cover is used as a terminal cover and two U-shaped cutouts are provided in place of the mounting holes.

3G3MV-A2001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-A2002 (0.2 kW), 3G3MV-A2004 (0.4 kW), and 3G3MV-A2007

(0.75 kW)

3G3MV-AB001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-AB002 (0.2 kW), and 3G3MV-AB004 (0.4 kW)

1-5

Overview

Digital Operator

Data display

Simplified-LED indicators

Operation keys

Chapter 1

FREQUENCY adjuster

1-6

Appearance Name

Data display

Function

Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference, output frequency, and parameter set values.

FREQUENCY adjuster Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz and the maximum frequency.

FREF indicator

FOUT indicator

IOUT indicator

MNTR indicator

F/R indicator

LO/RE indicator

PRGM indicator

Mode Key

Increment Key

The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this indicator is lit.

The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The values set in U01 through U18 are monitored while this indicator is lit.

The direction of rotation can be selected while this indicator is lit when operating the Inverter with the RUN

Key.

The operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator or according to the set parameters is selectable while this indicator is lit.

Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored while the Inverter is in operation. Any RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or monitored while this indicator is lit.

Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can be only monitored and only some parameters can be changed. Any RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item indicators in sequence.

Parameter being set will be canceled if this key is pressed before entering the setting.

Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Overview Chapter 1

Appearance Name

Decrement Key

Enter Key

RUN Key

STOP/RESET Key

Function

Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and internal data values after they are set or changed.

Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation with the Digital Operator.

Stops the Inverter unless parameter n007 is set to disable the STOP Key. Functions as a Reset Key when an Inverter error occurs. (See note.)

Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.

Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.

1-7

Overview

1-3 New Features

Chapter 1

New features have been added to 3G3MV-Series models with 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW capacities (i.e., the 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/ A4055/A4075). These features are outlined below and explained in detail in Chapter 6 .

New Features for 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/A4055/A4075 Only

Enclosure Rating: Closed Wall-mounting Conforming to IP20/NEMA1

The 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters have closed wall-mounting specifications that conform to

IP20/NEMA1, so they can operate in an ambient temperature range of –10 to 40

Note To operate this Inverter within an ambient temperature range of –10 to 50

C, remove the top and bottom covers to convert it to a panel-mounting model (IP00).

Default Settings Changed for V/f Patterns (Parameters: n011 to n017)

For 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters, two of the default settings have been changed. The default settings for the middle output frequency voltage (VC) (n015) and the minimum output frequency voltage (VMIN

(n017) have both been changed to 10 V for 200-V-class models and to 20 V for 400-V-class models.

Inverter Overheating Warning Input

(Parameters: n050 to n056; Fault Display: oH3)

An Inverter overheating warning input has been added as a new function that can be set for multi-function inputs 1 to 7 (n050 to n056). When this warning is input, an oH3 fault (nonfatal error) will be displayed. This input can be used for functions such as thermal contact connections for peripheral overheating detection.

Frequency Reference Loss Detection (Parameter: n064)

When the frequency is referenced using analog frequency reference inputs (0 to 10 V/4 to 20 mA/0 to 20 mA), this function detects sudden changes in analog inputs as errors (disconnection, short circuit, breakdown, etc.) and outputs the frequency reference loss output that is set in multi-function outputs 1 to 3 (n057 to n059). After the change is detected, operation continues at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the change.

Accumulated Operating Time (Monitor: U-13; Parameters: n087, n088)

This function calculates and stores in memory the Inverter’s accumulated power-ON time or RUN time.

Use it for checking and determining the maintenance schedule.

Speed Search Adjustment (Parameters: n101, n102)

A function has been added for adjusting the speed search. (The speed search is a function for detecting and smoothly controlling the speed of a free running motor.) The speed search operating time and search level can be adjusted.

Input Open-phase Detection

(Parameters: n166, n167; Fault Display: PF)

This function detects the Inverter’s input power supply open phase. Open phases are detected through main circuit voltage fluctuations, so this function can also be used for detecting abnormal voltage fluctuations in the input power supply voltage.

1-8

Overview Chapter 1

Output Open-phase Detection

(Parameters: n168, n169; Fault Display: LF)

This function detects open phases between the Inverter output and the motor.

Ground Fault Detection (Fault Display: GF)

This function detects ground faults between the Inverter output and the motor.

Load Short-circuit Detection (Fault Display: SC)

Prior to an Inverter output, this function detects whether the output is short-circuited. If short-circuiting occurs during an output, it detects an overcurrent (oC).

New Features for All 3G3MV Models

Communications Error Monitor (Monitor: U-15)

This function displays communications errors that occur during serial communications

(RS-422/RS-485). The errors that are displayed have the same content as the general serial communications error at register number 003D Hex.

Pulse Train Frequency Reference Input Filter Constant

(Parameter: n076)

This function sets the primary lag digital filter for pulse train frequency reference inputs.

Multi-function Analog Inputs (Parameters: n077 to n079)

A function has been added to enable setting the Digital Operator’s multi-function analog voltage (current) inputs. It can set auxiliary analog inputs such as auxiliary frequency references and frequency reference bias or gain.

Note If multi-function analog inputs are set for use with PID control, no other multi-function analog input functions can be set or they will overlap.

New Features for 3G3MV Series (Software Version 0028 (3.7 kW or

Less) or Higher)

Operation Continuation Timer Added to the Momentary Power Interruption

Compensation Parameter (n081)

Parameter n081 can be set so that operation will not restart after a power interruption until the RUN signal is ON for the time specified for the parameter (5 to 100 x 0.1 s). If the parameter is set to 2 (Inverter restarts when power is restored), operation will recover for all Inverters at the same time, meaning the power supply capacity must be sufficient for the maximum current. By setting timers to between 0.5 and

10.0 s, differences can be created in the Inverter recovery time to prevent tripping the power supply breaker, which could happen if all Inverters recovered at the same time.

Enter Command (Saving Parameters to EEPROM) Operation Selection (n170) To

Enable the Enter Command at Any Time

Previously, operation had to be stopped to use the Enter command to saved changes made to parameters during operation using DeviceNet or RS-422/485 communications. This sometimes caused saving parameters to be forgotten when a system could not be stopped immediately after changing parameters, causing the need to reset the parameters again when they were lost at the next power interruption or system shutdown. The new parameter n170 can be set to 1 to enable using the Enter command to write parameters to EEPROM even during operation.

1-9

Design

2-1 Installation

2-2 Wiring

Chapter 2

Design

2-1 Installation

Chapter 2

2-1-1 Dimensions

3G3MV-A2001 to 3G3MV-A2007 (0.1 to 0.75 kW) 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB001 to 3G3MV-AB004 (0.1 to 0.4 kW) Single-phase 200-V AC Input

Model 3G3MV-

A2001

A2002

A2004

A2007

Single-phase 200 V AC AB001

AB002

AB004

108

128

131

Dimensions (mm) t

Approx. 0.6

Approx. 0.9

Approx. 1.1

Approx. 0.6

Approx. 0.7

Approx. 1.0

2-2

Design Chapter 2

3G3MV-A2015 to 3G3MV-A2022 (1.5 to 2.2 kW) 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB007 to 3G3MV-AB015 (0.75 to 1.5 kW) Single-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-A4002 to 3G3MV-A4022 (0.2 to 2.2 kW) 3-phase 400-V AC Input

Four, 5 dia.

Model 3G3MV-

A2015

A2022

AB007

AB015

A4002

A4004

A4007

A4015

A4022

156

110

140

156

131

140

Dimensions (mm)

Approx. 1.4

Approx. 1.5

Approx. 1.0

Approx. 1.1

Approx. 1.5

2-3

Design

3G3MV-A2037 (3.7 kW) 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB022 (2.2 kW) Single-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-A4037 (3.7 kW) 3-phase 400-V AC Input

Chapter 2

Four, 5 dia.

3-phase 200 V AC

Single-phase 200 V AC

3-phase 400 V AC

Model 3G3MV-

A2037

AB022

A4037

143

163

143

Dimensions (mm)

Approx. 2.1

Approx. 2.2

Approx. 2.1

3G3MV-AB037 (3.7 kW) Single-phase 200-V AC Input

Four, 5 dia.

Single-phase 200 V AC

Model 3G3MV-

AB037

Dimensions (mm)

180 Approx. 2.9

2-4

Design

3G3MV-A2055 to -A2075 (5.5 to 7.5 kW) 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-A4055 to -A4075 (5.5 kW to 7.5 kW) 3-phase 400-V AC Input

Two, 6 dia.

Chapter 2

3-phase 200 V AC

3-phase 400 V AC

Model 3G3MV-

A2055

A2075

A4055

A4075

170

Dimensions (mm)

Approx. 4.6

Approx. 4.8

2-5

Design

2-1-2 Installation Conditions

Chapter 2

Installation Precautions

WARNING

Provide an appropriate stopping device on the machine side to secure safety. (A holding brake is not a stopping device for securing safety.) Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide an external emergency stopping device that allows an instantaneous stop of operation and power interruption. Not doing so may result in injury.

Caution

Be sure to install the product in the correct direction and provide specified clearances between the Inverter and control panel or with other devices. Not doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not allow foreign objects to enter inside the product. Doing so may result in fire or malfunction.

Do not apply any strong impact. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

Installation Direction and Dimensions

•

Install the Inverter under the following conditions.

Ambient operating temperature:

Panel-mounting models (conforming to IP20): –10 to 50

C (0.1- to 3.7-kW Inverters)

Closed wall-mounting models (conforming to NEMA1 and IP20):

–10 to 40

C (5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverters)

Humidity: 95% max. (with no condensation)

Note 1.

By removing the top and bottom covers from a 5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverter, it can be used as a panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00) within an ambient temperature range of –10 to

50 ° C.

Note 2.

All C-type Inverters (closed wall-mounting models: NEMA1-type for North America) are closed wall-mounting models, and can be used within an ambient temperature range of –10 to

40 ° C. If the top and bottom covers are removed, the C-type Inverters can be used as panelmounting models (conforming to IP00) within an ambient temperature range of –10 to 50

•

Install the Inverter in a clean location free from oil mist and dust. Alternatively, install it in a totally enclosed panel that is completely protected from floating dust.

•

When installing or operating the Inverter, always take special care so that metal powder, oil, water, or other foreign matter does not get into the Inverter.

•

Do not install the Inverter on inflammable material such as wood.

•

If a 5.5- to 7.5-kW Inverter or a C-type Inverter is to be installed inside of a control panel, it must have the top and bottom covers removed and be used as a panel-mounting model (conforming to IP00).

2-6

Design Chapter 2

Direction

•

Install the Inverter on a vertical surface so that the characters on the nameplate are oriented upward.

Dimensions

•

When installing the Inverter, always provide the following clearances to allow normal heat dissipation from the Inverter.

W = 30 mm min. (0.1 to 4.0 kW)

50 mm min. (5.5 to 7.5 kW)

100 mm min.

Air

Inverter Inverter Inverter Side

100 mm min.

Air

Ambient Temperature Control

• To enhance operation reliability, the Inverter should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature changes.

•

If the Inverter is installed in an enclosed environment such as a box, use a cooling fan or air conditioner to maintain the internal air temperature below 50

The life of the built-in electrolytic capacitors of the Inverter is prolonged by maintaining the internal air temperature as low as possible.

•

The surface temperature of the Inverter may rise approximately 30

C higher than the ambient temperature. Be sure to keep away equipment and wires from the Inverter as far as possible if the equipment and wires are easily influenced by heat.

Protecting Inverter from Foreign Matter during Installation

• Place a cover over the Inverter during installation to shield it from metal power produced by drilling.

Upon completion of installation, always remove the cover from the Inverter. Otherwise, ventilation will be affected, causing the Inverter to overheat.

2-7

Design Chapter 2

2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers

To mount the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and the Digital Operator. To wire the Inverter, it is necessary to remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a 200-V model), and bottom cover from the Inverter.

Follow the instructions below to remove the covers from the Inverter.

To mount the covers, take the opposite steps.

Removing the Front Cover

•

Loosen the front cover mounting screws with a screwdriver.

•

Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the bottom of the cover in the arrow 2 direction to remove the front cover as shown in the following illustration.

Removing the Digital Operator

• After removing the front cover, lift up the upper and lower right-hand sides (positions A) of the Digital

Operator in the direction of arrow 1 as shown in the following illustration.

2-8

Design Chapter 2

Removing the Terminal Cover

0.2- to 3.7-kW Inverters

•

After the front cover is removed, press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the arrow 1 directions and lift the terminal cover in the arrow 2 direction as shown in the following illustration.

5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters

•

Loosen the terminal cover screws in the direction of arrows 1.

•

Press the left and right sides of the terminal cover in the direction of arrows 2 and lift it in the direction of arrow 3 as shown in the following illustration.

Note None of the following 200-V models have a terminal cover. Instead, the front cover is used as a terminal cover.

3G3MV-A2001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-A2002 (0.2 kW), 3G3MV-A2004 (0.4 kW), 3G3MV-A2007 (0.75

kW), 3G3MV-AB001 (0.1 kW), 3G3MV-AB002 (0.2 kW), and 3G3MV-AB004 (0.4 kW)

2-9

Design Chapter 2

Removing the Bottom Cover

0.2- to 3.7-kW Inverters

•

After removing the front cover and terminal cover, press the bottom cover in the arrow 1 direction based on position A as a fulcrum.

5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters

•

After removing the terminal cover, loosen the fastening screws.

2-10

Design

2-2 Wiring

Chapter 2

WARNING

Wiring must be performed only after confirming that the power supply has been turned OFF. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Wiring must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or fire.

WARNING

Be sure to confirm operation only after wiring the emergency stop circuit. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Always connect the ground terminals to a ground of 100 Ω or less for the 200-V AC class, or 10

Ω

or less for the 400-V AC class. Not connecting to a proper ground may result in electrical shock.

Caution

Install external breakers and take other safety measures against short-circuiting in external wiring. Not doing so may result in fire.

Confirm that the rated input voltage of the Inverter is the same as the AC power supply voltage. An incorrect power supply may result in fire, injury, or malfunction.

Connect the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit as specified in the manual.

Not doing so may result in fire.

Caution

Be sure to wire correctly and securely. Not doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Be sure to firmly tighten the screws on the terminal block. Not doing so may result in fire, injury, or damage to the product.

Do not connect an AC power to the U, V, or W output. Doing so may result in damage to the product or malfunction.

2-11

Design

2-2-1 Terminal Block

Chapter 2

To wire the terminal block of the Inverter, remove the front cover, terminal cover (unless the Inverter is a low-capacity 200-V model), and bottom cover from the Inverter.

There is a label under the front cover indicating the arrangement of main circuit terminals. Be sure to remove the label after wiring the terminals. The output terminal of the motor has a label as well. Remove the label before wiring the motor terminal.

Arrangement of Control Circuit Terminals

Control circuit terminals

Arrangement of Main Circuit Terminals

3G3MV-A2001 through 3G3MV-A2007 (0.1 through 0.75 kW):

3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB001 through 3G3MV-AB004 (0.1 through 0.4 kW):

Single-phase 200-V AC Input

Power supply input Motor output

Braking Resistor

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

2-12

Design

3G3MV-A2015 to 3G3MV-A2022 (1.5 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB007 to 3G3MV-AB015 (0.75 to 1.5 kW):

Single-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-A4002 to 3G3MV-A4022 (0.2 to 2.2 kW): 3-phase 400-V AC Input

Chapter 2

Power supply input

Braking

Resistor

Motor output

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

3G3MV-A2037 to -A2075 (3.7 to 7.5 kW): 3-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-AB022 to 3G3MV-AB037 (2.2 to 3.7 kW):

Single-phase 200-V AC Input

3G3MV-A4037 to -A4075 (3.7 to 7.5 kW): 3-phase 400-V AC Input

Power supply input

Note For single-phase input, connect R/L1 and S/L2.

Braking

Resistor

Motor output

2-13

Design Chapter 2

Main Circuit Terminals

Symbol

R/L1

S/L2

T/L3

U/T1

V/T2

W/T3

+2 t i l

Name

Motor output terminals i l

Connection terminals +1 and +2: terminals

Description

3G3MV-A2 j : 3-phase 200 to 230 V AC

3G3MV-AB j (

3G3MV-A4 j

: 3-phase 380 to 460 V AC

)

3-phase power supply output for driving motors. (See note 2.)

3G3MV A2 j 3 h 200 t 230 V AC

3G3MV-AB j

: 3-phase 200 to 240 V AC

3G3MV-A4 j : 3-phase 380 to 460 V AC

R i U i (C d l d i b ki )

Connect the DC reactor for suppressing harmonics to terminals +1 and +2.

When driving the Inverter with DC power, input the DC power to terminals +1 and –.

–

DC power supply input terminals

Ground terminal Be sure to ground the terminal under the following conditions.

3G3MV-A2 j : Ground at a resistance of 100 Ω or less.

3G3MV-AB j

: Ground at a resistance of 100

Ω

or less.

3G3MV-A4 j : Ground at a resistance of 10 Ω or less. To conform to EC Directives, connect to the neutral point of the power supply.

Note Be sure to connect the ground terminal directly to the motor frame ground.

Note 1.

Connect single-phase input to both the R/L1 terminal and the S/L2 terminal.

Note 2.

The maximum voltage at the output side corresponds to the power supply voltage for Inverter input.

2-14

Design Chapter 2

Control Circuit Terminals

Symbol Name Specification

Input S1 Multi-function input 1 (Forward/Stop)

S2 Multi-function input 2

(Reverse/Stop)

S3 Multi-function input 3

(External fault: Normally open)

S4 Multi-function input 4 (Fault reset)

S5 Multi-function input 5 (Multi-step speed reference 1)

Photocoupler

S6 Multi-function input 6 (Multi-step speed reference 2)

S7 Multi-function input 7 (Inching frequency command)

SC Sequence input common

FS Frequency reference power supply output

20 mA at 12 V DC

FR Frequency reference input p Ω) )

FC Frequency reference common

RP Pulse train input Response frequency: 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED)

CN2 1

Multi-function analog voltage input

Multi-function analog current input

Multi-function analog input common

H: 3.5 to 13.2 V

L: 0.8 V max.

(Input impedance: 2.24 k Ω)

Voltage input (between terminals 1 and 3): 0 to 10 V DC

( p p 0

Ω

)

Current input (between terminals 2 and 3): 4 to 20 mA

(Input impedance: 250

Ω

) )

2-15

Design Chapter 2

Symbol

OutMA

Name

Multi-function contact output (Normally open: Fault)

MB Multi-function contact output (Normally closed:

Fault)

MC Multi-function contact output common

P1 Multi-function photocoupler output 1 ( During operation)

P2 Multi-function photocoupler output 2 ( Frequency matching)

PC Multi-function photocoupler output common

AM Multi-function analog output

Relay output

1 A max. at 250 V AC

Specification

Open collector output 50 mA max. at 48 V DC

•

Analog output: 2 mA max. at 0 to 10 V DC

• Pulse train output (max. output voltage: 12 V DC)

(See note 4.)

When Used as Voltage Output

Output voltage (insulation type)

+5 V

+10 V

Load impedance

1.5 k

Ω

min.

10 k

Ω

min.

Load impedance

AC Multi-function analog output common

When External Power Supply is Used

External power supply

12 V DC

Load impedance

External power supply (V)

12 V DC (

5%)

Input current (mA) from external power supply

16 mA max.

Input current

16 mA max.

External power supply ground

Note Do not use a 5-V DC or 24-V DC external power supply. Doing so can cause internal circuit damage or malfunctioning.

ComR+ Receiver side mu-

R–

S+ Sender side

S–

Note 1.

Parameter settings can be used to select various functions for multi-function inputs 1 to 7, multi-function contact outputs, and multi-function photocoupler outputs. The functions in parentheses are the default settings.

Note 2.

NPN is the default setting for these terminals. Wire them by providing a common ground. No external power supply is required.

Note 3.

To provide an external power supply and wire the terminals through a common positive line, set SW1 to PNP and use a 24 V DC

10% power supply.

2-16

Design Chapter 2

Note 4.

When multi-function analog outputs are used for pulse train outputs, they can be directly connected to the pulse train inputs at other 3G3MV-series Inverters for simple synchronization or other applications.

Selecting Input Method

•

Switches SW1 and SW2, both of which are located above the control circuit terminals, are used for input method selection.

Remove the front cover and optional cover to use these switches.

Selector

Control circuit terminal block

Selecting Sequence Input Method

•

By using SW1, NPN or PNP input can be selected as shown below.

SW1

(Default setting)

S1 to 7

24 V DC

( ± 10%)

S1 to 7

SW1

2-17

Design Chapter 2

Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance

•

Termination resistance can be selected by setting pin 1 of the SW2 to ON. The default setting for the pin is OFF.

Selects RS-422/485 termination resistance

Selects frequency reference input method

RS-422

RS-485

Communications method Pin 1 setting

Set to ON

Set to ON only if the Unit is the end Slave.

Pin 1

120Ω termination resistance (1/2 W)

Selecting Frequency Reference Input Method

•

By using pin 2 of SW2, voltage input or current input can be selected as the input method for frequency reference. The default setting is for voltage input.

Parameter settings are required together with the selection of the frequency reference input method.

Frequency reference input method

Voltage input (default setting)

Current input

V (OFF)

I (ON)

Pin 2 setting Frequency reference selection

(parameter n004)

Set value 2

Set value 3 or 4

Note Do not set pin 2 to ON for current input while voltage is being input, otherwise the resistor in the input circuit may burn out.

Frequency Reference Input by Pulse Train Input

• The RP terminal can input or output a PLC or external pulse generator signal directly to the Inverter if an analog signal is unable to provide an accurate reference.

•

This allows speed ratio and tracking operation between inverters.

Pulse train

Input

Pulse train

Output

Input

2-18

Design

Frequency Reference Input by PLC Pulse Train

Chapter 2 to to

ON when 3.5 V or higher

OFF when 0.8 V or lower

Note Use twisted pair shielded wire no longer than 5 m for pulse train input lines in order to suppress noise.

2-19

Design

2-2-2 Standard Connections

DC reactor

(optional)

Noise Filter

Braking Resistor

(optional)

Chapter 2

3-phase 200/400 V AC

Single-phase 200 V AC (See note.)

Multi-function input 1

Multi-function input 2

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Multi-function input 6

Multi-function input 7

Sequence input common

External frequency adjuster (2 k Ω ,

1/4 W min.)

Pulse generator

Frequency reference power supply 20 mA at +12 V

Frequency reference input

Frequency reference common

Pulse train input

Multi-function contact output

Common

Multi-function photocoupler output 1

Multi-function photocoupler output 2

Multi-function photocoupler output common

Multi-function analog output/Pulse monitor output

RS-422 communications

(RS-485 selection)

Multi-function analog voltage input

Multi-function analog current input

Analog input common

Connector

Digital Operator

Multi-function analog output common

Note Connector on CN2 wiring side:

Contact: SZH-002T-P0.5

Housing: ZHR-3

(Products of J.S.T. MFG. Co., Ltd.)

Note Connect single-phase 200 V AC to terminals R/L1 and S/L2 of the 3G3MV-AB j

2-20

Design Chapter 2

Example of 3-wire Sequence Connections

Stop switch

(NC)

RUN switch

(NO)

RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch and Stop switch closed)

Direction switch

Stop input (Stops with the Stop switch opened)

Forward/Reverse rotation command input. (Forward with the

Direction switch opened. Reverse with the Direction switch closed)

Sequence input common

Note Set parameter 052 to forward/reverse rotation command 0 for 3-wire sequence input.

2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit

Wire Size, Terminal Screw, Screw Tightening Torque, and Molded-case

Circuit Breaker Capacities

•

For the main circuit and ground, always use 600-V polyvinyl chloride (PVC) cables.

•

If any cable is long and may cause voltage drops, increase the wire size according to the cable length.

3-phase 200-V AC Model

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A2001 R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Terminal screw

M3.5

Screw tightening torque

S m)

Wire size

(mm 2 )

0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2 2

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity

(A)

A2002 0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2 2 5

A2004

A2007

A2015

A2022

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M3.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M3.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M3.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2 2

0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2 2

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

3.5

2-21

Design Chapter 2

Model

3G3MV-

A2037

Terminal symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Terminal screw

Screw tightening torque

S m)

1.2 to 1.5

Wire size

(mm 2 )

2 to 5.5

Recommended wire size

(mm 2 )

5.5

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity

(A)

A2055 2.5

5.5 to 8 8 50

A2075

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M5 2.5

5.5 to 8 8 60

Single-phase 200-V AC Model

Model

3G3MV-

AB001

AB002

AB004

Terminal symbol

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M3.5

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

M3.5

Terminal screw

M3.5

Terminal torque

(N S m)

Wire size

(mm 2 )

0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2 2

Recommended wire size

(mm

)

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity

(A)

0.8 to 1.0

0.75 to 2

AB007 1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

3.5

AB015

AB022

AB037

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, –, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, –, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, B1, B2, –, +1, +2,

U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

5.5

3.5

5.5

3.0

5.5 to 8

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 8

5.5

2-22

Design

3-phase 400-V AC Model

Model

3G3MV-

Terminal symbol

A4002

A4004

Chapter 2

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

Terminal screw

Screw tightening torque

(N S m)

1.2 to 1.5

Wire size

(mm

)

2 to 5.5

Recommended wire size

(mm 2 )

Moldedcase circuit breaker capacity

(A)

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

2 5

A4007 1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

2 5

A4015

A4022

A4037

A4055

A4075

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

R/L1, S/L2, T/L3, B1, B2, –,

+1, +2, U/T1, V/T2, W/T3

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

1.2 to 1.5

2 to 5.5

1.2 to 1.5

1.8

2 to 5.5

3.5

3.5 to 5.5

5.5

2.5

5.5 to 8 5.5

2-23

Design

Wiring on the Input Side of the Main Circuit

Chapter 2

Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker

Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable to the Inverter.

•

Install one wiring circuit breaker per Inverter.

•

Choose an MCCB with the capacity indicated in the previous tables ( Wire Size, Terminal Screw, Tightening Torque, and Molded-case Circuit Breaker Capacities ).

•

For the MCCB’s time characteristics, be sure to consider the Inverter’s overload protection (one minute at 150% of the rated output current).

• If the MCCB is to be used in common among multiple Inverters, or other devices, set up a sequence such that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in the following diagram.

Inverter

3-phase/

Single-phase

200 V AC

3-phase 400 V AC

Power supply

(See note.)

Fault output (NC)

Note Use a 400/200 V transformer for a 400-V model.

Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter

Inverter outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated.

In general, a leakage current of approximately 100 mA will occur for each Inverter (when the power cable is 1 m) and approximately 5 mA for each additional meter of power cable.

Therefore, at the power supply input area, use a special-purpose breaker for Inverters, which detects only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous to humans and excludes high-frequency leakage current.

•

For the special-purpose breaker for Inverters, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 10 mA per Inverter.

•

When using a general leakage breaker, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 200 mA or more per Inverter and with an operating time of 0.1 s or more.

2-24

Design Chapter 2

Installing a Magnetic Contactor

If the power supply of the main circuit is to be shut off because of the sequence, a magnetic contactor can be used instead of a molded-case circuit breaker.

When a magnetic contactor is installed on the primary side of the main circuit to stop a load forcibly, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the load coasts to a stop.

• A load can be started and stopped by opening and closing the magnetic contactor on the primary side.

Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contactor, however, may cause the Inverter to break down. To maintain the service life of the Inverter’s internal relays and electrolytic capacitors, it is recommended that this operation be performed no more than once every 30 minutes.

•

When the Inverter is operated with the Digital Operator, automatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption.

•

When using the Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to arrange a sequence in which the thermal relay of the

Unit turns the magnetic contactor OFF.

Connecting Input Power Supply to the Terminal Block

Input power supply can be connected to any terminal on the terminal block because the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant to the phase sequence (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3).

Installing an AC Reactor

If the Inverter is connected to a large-capacity power transformer (660 kW or more) or the phase advance capacitor is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit to break down.

To prevent this, install an optional AC reactor on the input side of the Inverter.

This also improves the power factor on the power supply side.

Installing a Surge Absorber

Always use a surge absorber or diode for the inductive loads near the Inverter. These inductive loads include magnetic contactors, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoid, and magnetic brakes.

2-25

Design Chapter 2

Installing a Noise Filter on the Power Supply Side

The Inverter’s outputs utilize high-speed switching, so noise may be transmitted from the Inverter to the power line and adversely affect other devices in the vicinity. It is recommended that a Noise Filter be installed at the Power Supply to minimize this noise transmission. Conversely, noise can also be reduced from the power line to the Inverter.

Wiring Example 1

Input Noise Filters

Simple Input Noise Filter: 3G3EV-PLNFD j

Input Noise Filter: 3G3IV-PFN j

EMC-conforming Input Noise Filter: 3G3MV-PRS j

Power supply

3G3MV

Noise

Filter SYSDRIVE

SYSMAC or other control device

Note Use a noise filter designed for Inverters. A general-purpose noise filter will be less effective and may not reduce noise.

Wiring on the Output Side of the Main Circuit

Connecting the Terminal Block to the Load

Connect output terminals U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3 to motor lead wires U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3.

Check that the motor rotates forward with the forward command. Switch over any two of the output terminals to each other and reconnect if the motor rotates in reverse with the forward command.

Never Connect a Power Supply to Output Terminals

Never connect a power supply to output terminals U/T1, V/T2, or W/T3.

If voltage is applied to the output terminals, the internal circuit of the Inverter will be damaged.

Never Short or Ground Output Terminals

If the output terminals are touched with bare hands or the output wires come into contact with the

Inverter casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous.

Also, be careful not to short the output wires.

Do not Use a Phase Advancing Capacitor or Noise Filter

Never connect a phase advance capacitor or LC/RC Noise Filter to the output circuit.

Doing so will result in damage to the Inverter or cause other parts to burn.

Do not Use an Electromagnetic Switch of Magnetic Contactor

Do not connect an electromagnetic switch of magnetic contactor to the output circuit.

If a load is connected to the Inverter during running, an inrush current will actuate the overcurrent protective circuit in the Inverter.

2-26

Design Chapter 2

Installing a Thermal Relay

The Inverter has an electronic thermal protection function to protect the motor from overheating. If, however, more than one motor is operated with one inverter or a multi-polar motor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Inverter and the motor and set n037 to 2 (no thermal protection).

In this case, program the sequence so that the magnetic contactor on the input side of the main circuit is turned OFF by the contact of the thermal relay.

Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side

Connect a Noise Filter to the output side of the Inverter to reduce radio noise and induction noise.

Power supply

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

3G3IV-PLF

Noise

Filter

Signal line

Induction noise

Controller

Radio noise

AM radio

Induction Noise:

Radio Noise:

Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller to malfunction.

Electromagnetic waves from the Inverter and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver to make noise.

Countermeasures against Induction Noise

As described previously, a Noise Filter can be used to prevent induction noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe to prevent induction noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm away from the signal line considerably reduces induction noise.

Metal pipe

Power supply

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

30 cm min.

Signal line

Controller

2-27

Design Chapter 2

Countermeasures against Radio Interference

Radio noise is generated from the Inverter as well as the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install Noise Filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Inverter in a totally enclosed steel box.

The cable between the Inverter and the motor should be as short as possible.

Steel box

Metal pipe

Power supply

Noise

Filter

3G3MV

SYSDRIVE

Noise

Filter

Cable Length between Inverter and Motor

As the cable length between the Inverter and the motor is increased, the floating capacity between the

Inverter outputs and the ground is increased proportionally. The increase in floating capacity at the Inverter outputs causes the high-frequency leakage current to increase, and this may adversely affect peripheral devices and the current detector in the Inverter’s output section. To prevent this from occurring, use a cable of no more than 100 meters between the Inverter and the motor. If the cable must be longer than 100 meters, take measures to reduce the floating capacity by not wiring in metallic ducts, by using a separate cable for each phase, and so on.

Also adjust the carrier frequency (set in n80) according to the cable length between the Inverter and the motor, as shown in the table below.

Cable length

Carrier frequency

50 m or less

10 kHz max.

100 m or less

5 kHz max.

More than 100 m

2.5 kHz max.

Single-phase Motors Cannot Be Used

The Inverter is not suited for the variable speed control of single-phase motors.

Single-phase motors are either capacitor start motors or split-phase start motors. (The method for determining rotation direction at startup is different.) If a capacitor start motor is used, the capacitor may be damaged by a sudden electric discharge caused by Inverter output. If a split-phase start motor is used, the starting coil may burn because the centrifugal switch does not operate.

2-28

Design Chapter 2

Ground Wiring

•

Always use the ground terminal of the 200-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 100

Ω

or less. Similarly, always use the ground terminal of the 400-V Inverter with a ground resistance of 10

Ω

or less.

•

Do not share the ground wire with other devices such as welding machines or power tools.

•

Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire.

Leakage current flows through the Inverter. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is too long, the potential on the ground terminal of the Inverter will become unstable.

•

When using more than one Inverter, be careful not to loop the ground wire.

Countermeasures against Harmonics

With the continuing development of electronics, the generation of harmonics from industrial machines has been causing problems recently.

Refer to the following information for the definition of harmonics (i.e., harmonic currents with voltages) and countermeasures against the generation of harmonics from the

Inverter.

Harmonics

Definition

Harmonics consist of electric power produced from AC power and alternating at frequencies that are integral multiples of the frequency of the AC power.

2-29

Design

The following frequencies are harmonics of a 60- or 50-Hz commercial power supply.

Second harmonic: 120 (100) Hz

Third harmonic: 180 (150) Hz

Second harmonic (120 Hz)

Basic frequency (60 Hz)

Chapter 2

Third harmonic (180 Hz)

Problems Caused by Harmonics Generation

The waveform of the commercial power supply will be distorted if the commercial power supply contains excessive harmonics. Machines with such a commercial power supply will malfunction or generate excessive heat.

Basic frequency (60 Hz) Third harmonic (180 Hz)

Distorted current wave form

Causes of Harmonics Generation

•

Usually, electric machines have built-in circuitry that converts commercial AC power supply into DC power.

Such AC power, however, contains harmonics due to the difference in current flow between DC and

AC.

Obtaining DC from AC Using Rectifiers and Capacitors

DC voltage is obtained by converting AC voltage into a pulsating one-side voltage with rectifiers and smoothing the pulsating one-side voltage with capacitors. Such AC current, however, contains harmonics.

2-30

Design Chapter 2

Inverter

The Inverter as well as normal electric machines has an input current containing harmonics because the Inverter converts AC into DC. The output current of the Inverter is comparatively high. Therefore, the ratio of harmonics in the output current of the Inverter is higher than that of any other electric machine.

Voltage

Time

Rectified

Voltage

Time

Smoothed

Voltage

Time

Current

A current flows into the capacitors. The current is different from the voltage in waveform.

Time

2-31

Design Chapter 2

Countermeasures with Reactors against Harmonics Generation

DC/AC Reactors

The DC reactor and AC reactor suppress harmonics and currents that change suddenly and greatly.

The DC reactor suppresses harmonics better than the AC reactor. The DC reactor used with the AC reactor suppresses harmonics more effectively.

The input power factor of the Inverter is improved by suppressing the harmonics of the input current of the Inverter.

Connection

Connect the DC reactor to the internal DC power supply of the Inverter after shutting OFF the power supply to the Inverter and making sure that the charge indicator of the Inverter turns OFF.

Do not touch the internal circuitry of the Inverter in operation, otherwise an electric shock or burn injury may occur.

Wiring Method

[With DC Reactor]

DC reactor

(optional)

Power supply

3-phase 200 V AC, single-phase 200 V AC, or 3-phase 400 V AC

SYSDRIVE

3G3MV

[With DC and AC Reactors]

DC reactor

(optional)

Power supply

3-phase 200 V AC, single-phase 200 V AC, or

3-phase 400 V AC

AC reactor

(optional)

SYSDRIVE

3G3MV

2-32

Design Chapter 2

Reactor Effects

Harmonics are effectively suppressed when the DC reactor is used with the AC reactor as shown in the following table.

Harmonics method

No reactor

AC reactor

DC reactor

DC and AC reactors

5th harmonic

7th harmonic

14.5

9.1

Harmonic generation rate (%)

11th harmonic

13th harmonic

17th harmonic

19th harmonic

8.5

7.4

8.4

7.2

7.7

3.4

4.1

4.3

3.2

4.7

3.2

3.1

1.9

3.2

2.4

23rd harmonic

2.6

1.7

3.0

1.6

25th harmonic

1.8

1.3

2.2

1.4

Connecting the Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit

When running a load with a large inertia or a vertical axis, regeneration energy will return to the Inverter.

If OV (overvoltage) is generated during deceleration, this indicates that the regeneration energy is exceeding the capacity of the Inverter. In this case, use a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit.

• Connect the Braking Resistor as shown in the following diagram.

Note 1.

When using a Braking Resistor, install a thermal relay to monitor the temperature of the resistor.

Note 2.

When using a Braking Resistor or a Braking Resistor Unit, be sure to include a sequence whereby the power supply for the Inverter will be turned OFF in the case of abnormal overheating. Not doing so may result in burning.

Braking Resistor: Use the output of the thermal relay used to monitor the temperature of the thermometer.

Braking Resistor Unit: Use the error contact output of the Braking Resistor Unit.

•

When using a Braking Resistor, and Braking Resistor Unit be sure to set n092 (deceleration stall prevention selection) to “1” (without deceleration stall prevention).

Inverter

Power supply

3-phase, 400 V AC (single-phase

200 V AC/3-phase 200 V AC)

Braking

Resistor/Braking

Resistor Unit

Contact points for thermal trip of Braking Resistor

Unit or external thermal relay

2-33

Design Chapter 2

Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 200-V-class Inverters

Inverter

3G3MV-

Braking Resistor

(3% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

PERF150WJ401 (400 Ω ) ---

Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

A2001/AB001

A2002/AB002

A2004/AB004

A2007/AB007

A2015/AB015

A2022/AB022

A2037/AB037

A2055

A2075

PERF150WJ201 (200

Ω

)

PERF150WJ101 (100 Ω )

PERF150WJ700 (70

Ω

)

PERF150WJ620 (62 Ω )

---

PLKEB20P7 (200

Ω

, , 70 W) )

PLKEB21P5 (100 Ω , 260 W)

PLKEB22P2 (70

Ω

, 260 W)

PLKEB23P7 (40 Ω , 390 W)

PLKEB25P5 (30 Ω , 520 W)

PLKEB27P5 (30 Ω , 780 W)

Minimum connection resistance

300 Ω

200

Ω

120

Ω

32 Ω

9.6 Ω

Note 1.

Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value. Doing so may damage the Inverter.

Note 2.

The usage rate is shown as a percentage of the braking time in one cycle. If one cycle is 10 seconds, for example, one second of braking is possible using a Braking Resistor Unit (10% usage rate ED). If the usage rate is to be exceeded, a detailed regeneration energy calculation will be required.

Braking Resistors and Braking Resistor Units for 400-V-class Inverters

Inverter

3G3MV-

A4002

Braking Resistor

(3% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

PERF150WJ751 (750 Ω )

Braking Resistor Unit

(10% usage rate ED)

3G3IV-

PLKEB40P7 (750 Ω , , 70 W) )

Minimum connection resistance

750 Ω

A4004

A4007

A4015

A4022

A4037

A4055

A4075

PERF150WJ401 (400 Ω )

PERF150WJ301 (300 Ω )

PERF150WJ401 (400 Ω ) × 2

---

PLKEB41P5 (400 Ω , 260 W)

PLKEB42P2 (250 Ω , 260 W)

PLKEB43P7 (150 Ω , 390 W)

PLKEB45P5 (100 Ω , 520 W)

PLKEB47P5 (75 Ω , 780 W)

510

Ω

240 Ω

200 Ω

100 Ω

32 Ω

Note 1.

Do not use resistances less than than the minimum connection resistance value. Doing so may damage the Inverter.

Note 2.

The usage rate shows the braking time as a percentage of one cycle. If a cycle is 10 seconds, for example, one second of braking is possible using a Braking Resistor Unit (10% usage rate

ED). If the usage rate is to be exceeded, a detailed regeneration energy calculation will be required.

2-2-4 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals

A control signal line must be 50 m maximum and separated from power lines.

The frequency reference must be input into the Inverter through shielded, twisted-pair wires.

Wiring Control I/O Terminals

Wire each control I/O terminal under the following conditions.

2-34

Design Chapter 2

Wires and Tightening Torque

Multi-function Contact Output (MA, MB, and MC)

Terminal screw size

Tightening torque

0.5 to 0.6

Wire

Single wire

Wire size mm

(AWG)

2 Recommended wire size mm 2

(AWG)

0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16) 0.75 (18)

Stranded wire 0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16)

Cable

Cable with sheath

Sequential Input (S1 through S7 and SC), Multi-function Photocoupler Output (P1,

P2, PC), RS-422/485 Communications (R+, R–, S+, S–) and Multi-function Analog

Output (AM or AC), and Pulse Train Input (RP)

Terminal screw size

Tightening torque

Wire

0.22 to 0.25

Single wire

Wire size mm

(AWG)

2 Recommended wire size mm 2

(AWG)

0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16) 0.75 (18)

Cable

Cable with

Stranded wire 0.5 to 0.75 (20 to 18) sheath

Frequency Reference Input (FR, FS, and FC)

Terminal screw size

Tightening torque

N S m

Wire

0.22 to 0.25

Single wire

Wire size mm

(AWG)

0.5 to 1.25 (20 to 16)

Stranded wire 0.5 to 0.75 (20 to 18)

Recommended wire size mm

(AWG)

0.75 (18)

Cable

Special cable with shield for measurement use

Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals

The use of solderless terminals for the control circuit terminals is recommended because solderless terminals are easy to connect securely.

Note When using the following solderless terminal, make sure that the wire size is 0.5 mm

1.0 dia.

Model: Phoenix Contact’s A1 0.5-8 WH

2.6 dia.

(Size: mm)

Wiring Method

1. Loosen the terminal screws with a thin-slotted screwdriver.

2. Insert the wires from underneath the terminal block

3. Tighten the terminal screws firmly to a torque of 0.5 N

S m.

2-35

Design Chapter 2

Note 1.

Always separate the control signal line from the main circuit cables and other power cables.

Note 2.

Do not solder the wires to the control circuit terminals. The wires may not contact well with the control circuit terminals if the wires are soldered.

Note 3.

The end of each wire connected to the control circuit terminals must be stripped for approximately 5.5 mm.

Note 4.

Connect the shield to the ground terminal of the Inverter. Do not ground the shield on control side.

Note 5.

Cover the shield with tape so that the shield will not come into contact with other signal wires or machines.

Thin-slotted screwdriver

Control circuit terminal block

Strip the end for 5.5 mm if no solderless terminal is used.

Wires

Solderless terminal or wire without soldering

Note Applying a torque of greater than 0.5 N

S m may damage the terminal block. If the tightening torque is insufficient, however, wires may be disconnected.

2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directives

The following description provides the wiring method of the Inverter to meet EC Directive requirements. If the following requirements are not satisfied, the whole equipment incorporating the Inverter will need further confirmation.

Standard Connection

Main Circuit Terminals

Line breakers

Noise Filter

Clamp core

Braking Resistor

(optional)

Clamp core

3-phase 200 V AC, single-phase

200 V AC, or 3-phase 400 V AC

2-36

Design

Control Circuit Terminals

Multi-function input 1

Multi-function input 2

Multi-function input 3

Multi-function input 4

Multi-function input 5

Multi-function input 6

Multi-function input 7

Sequence input common

External frequency adjuster (2 k Ω ,

1/4 W min.)

Frequency reference power supply 20 mA at +12 V

Frequency reference input

Frequency reference common

Pulse generator

Pulse train input

RS-422 communications

(RS-485 selection)

Note I/O signals can be connected to a single shielded cable.

Chapter 2

Multi-function contact output

Common

Multi-function photocoupler output 1

Multi-function photocoupler output 2

Multi-function photocoupler output common

Multi-function analog output/Pulse monitor output

Multi-function analog output common

2-37

Design Chapter 2

Conforming to EC Directives

Wiring the Power Supply

Make sure that the Inverter and Noise Filter are grounded together.

•

Always connect the power input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) and power supply via a dedicated

Noise Filter.

•

Reduce the length of the ground wire as much as possible.

•

Locate the Noise Filter as close as possible to the Inverter. Make sure that the cable length between the Noise Filter and the Inverter does not exceed 40 cm.

•

The following Noise Filters are available.

3-phase 200-V AC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A2001/A2002/A2004/A2007

A2015/A2022

A2037

A2055/A2075

3-phase 200-V AC Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PRS2010V

PRS2020V

PRS2030V

Single-phase 200-V AC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

AB001/AB002/AB004

AB007/AB015

AB022

AB037

Single-phase 200-V Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PRS1010V

PRS1020V

PRS1030V

PRS1040V

3-phase 400-V AC Noise Filter

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A4002/A4004

A4007/A4015/A4022

A4037

A4055/A4075

3-phase 400-V AC Noise Filter (Rasmi Electronics Ltd.)

Model 3G3MVRated current (A)

PRS3005V

PRS3010V

PRS3020V

PRS3030V

Connecting a Motor to the Inverter

•

When connecting a motor to the Inverter, be sure to use a cable with a braided shield.

• Reduce the length of the cable as short as possible and ground the shield on the Inverter side as well as the motor side. Make sure that the cable length between the Inverter and the motor does not exceed

20 cm. Furthermore, it is recommended that a clamp core (Clamp Filter) be connected close to the output terminals of the Inverter.

Clamp Filter

Product Model

ZCAT3035-1330 TDK

Manufacturer

2-38

Design

Wiring a Control Cable

• Be sure to connect a cable with a braided shield to the control circuit terminals.

•

Ground the shield on the Inverter side only.

Chapter 2

Grounding the Shield

In order to ground the shield securely, it is recommended that a cable clamp be directly connected to the ground plate as shown below.

Other noise countermeasures

•

Use cable with a braided shield for inverter power supply lines, keep the cable as short as possible, and connect the cable through an EMC-conforming input noise filter. Be sure to connect the shield to ground at both ends.

•

Keep ground wires as short as possible. With a 400-V-class model, be sure to ground to a neutral point on the power supply. This is also the time to ground the metal control panel (including doors).

•

Use cable with a braided shield between the Inverter and motor as well. Keep the cable as short as possible (20 m max.), and be sure to connect the shield to ground at both ends.

Mount a clamp filter near the Inverter output terminal for more effective noise suppression.

•

Ground the shield with a conductive cable clamp directly to the ground plate.

•

Wire the motor frame directly to ground, and connect the ground wire from the motor directly to an EMC-conforming input noise filter.

•

Improve shielding by using conductive packing in the doors of the control panel.

Inverter wiring diagram Shield grounding method

Three-phase noise filter

Ground surface

Cable clamp

(conductive)

Ground plate

Braided shield

MV-series

Inverter

Shielded cable

Ground surface

2-39

Design Chapter 2

•

Wireless devices and other equipment that generates electromagnetic waves should never be installed in the same control panel with the Inverter.

•

The DC power supply used for communications should have reinforced or double insulation.

•

An Inverter control terminal has only basic insulation. More insulation is required if the terminal is wired to parts people are likely to touch.

Conforming to LVD

•

Always connect the Inverter and power supply via a molded case circuit breaker

(MCCB) suitable to the Inverter for protecting the Inverter from damage that may result from short-circuiting.

•

Use one MCCB per Inverter.

•

Select a suitable MCCB from the following table.

• With a 400-V-class Inverter, be sure to ground to a neutral point of the power supply.

200-V Models

A2001

A2002

A2004

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A2007

A2015

A2022

A2037

A2055

A2075

AB001

AB002

AB004

AB007

AB015

AB022

AB037

Rated current (A)

MCCB

Type

400-V Models

A4002

A4004

A4007

A4015

Inverter

Model 3G3MV-

A4022

A4037

A4055

A4075

Rated current (A)

MCCB

Type

2-40

Design Chapter 2

Note To satisfy LVD requirements, the Inverter must be protected with a line breaker in case a short-circuiting accident occurs. When using a single line breaker to be shared with other Inverters or devices, make sure that the Inverters and devices will be fully protected if there is a one-point short-circuit, otherwise the Inverters and devices may be damaged.

The frequency reference power supply (FS) of the Inverter is of basic insulation construction. When connecting the Inverter to peripheral devices, be sure to increase the degree of insulation.

2-41

Preparing for

Operation and

Monitoring

3-1 Nomenclature

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function

Chapter 3

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

3-1 Nomenclature

3-1-1 Names of Parts and their Functions

Data display

Simplified-LED indicators

Operation keys

FREQUENCY adjuster

Chapter 3

3-2

Appearance Name

Data display

FREQ adjuster

FREF indicator

FOUT indicator

IOUT indicator

MNTR indicator

F/R indicator

LO/RE indicator

PRGM indicator

Function

Displays relevant data items, such as frequency reference, output frequency, and parameter set values.

Sets the frequency reference within a range between 0 Hz and the maximum frequency.

The frequency reference can be monitored or set while this indicator is lit.

The output frequency of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The output current of the Inverter can be monitored while this indicator is lit.

The values set in U-01 through U-18 are monitored while this indicator is lit.

The direction of rotation can be selected while this indicator is lit, when operating the Inverter with the RUN

Key.

The operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator or according to the parameters set is selectable while this indicator is lit.

Note This status of this indicator can be only monitored while the Inverter is in operation. Any RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

The parameters in n001 through n179 can be set or monitored while this indicator is lit.

Note While the Inverter is in operation, the parameters can be only monitored and only some parameters can be changed. The RUN command input is ignored while this indicator is lit.

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Appearance Name

Mode Key

Increment Key

Decrement Key

Enter Key

RUN Key

STOP/RESET Key

Function

Switches the simplified-LED (setting and monitor) item indicators in sequence.

Parameter setting being made is canceled if this key is pressed before entering the setting.

Increases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Decreases multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and parameter set values.

Enters multi-function monitor numbers, parameter numbers, and internal data values after they are set or changed.

Starts the Inverter running when the 3G3MV is in operation with the Digital Operator.

Stops the Inverter unless n007 is not set to disable the

STOP Key. Functions as a Reset Key when an Inverter error occurs. (See note.)

Note For safety reasons, the reset will not work while a RUN command (forward or reverse) is in effect.

Wait until the RUN command is OFF before resetting the Inverter.

3-3

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

3-1-2 Outline of Operation

Selecting Indicators

Whenever the Mode Key is pressed, an indicator is lit in sequence beginning with the

FREF indicator. The data display indicates the item corresponding to the indicator selected.

The FOUT or IOUT indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while the FOUT or IOUT indicator is lit. The FREF indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while an indicator other than the

FOUR or IOUT indicator is lit.

Power On

FREF (Frequency Reference)

Monitors and sets the frequency reference.

FOUT (Output Frequency)

Monitors the output frequency.

Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.

IOUT (Output Current)

Monitors the output current.

Note This indicator will be lit by turning the Inverter ON again if the Inverter is turned OFF while this indicator is lit.

MNTR (Multi-function Monitor)

Monitors the values set in U-01 through U-18.

F/R (Forward/Reverse Rotation)

Selects the direction of rotation.

LO/RE (Local/Remote)

Selects the operation of the Inverter through the Digital Operator or according to the parameters.

PRGM (Parameter Setting)

Monitors or sets the values in n001 through n179.

The FREF indicator is lit again.

Note The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set value in n035. The default unit is Hz.

3-4

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Example of Frequency Reference Settings

Chapter 3

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the

Mode Key repeatedly until the FREF indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the frequency reference.

The data display will flash while the frequency reference is set. (see note 1)

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit. (see note 1)

Note 1.

The Enter Key need not be pressed when performing the setting for n009. The frequency reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement Key while the data display is continuously lit.

Note 2.

The frequency reference can be set in either of the following cases.

Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1 (i.e., frequency reference 1 is enabled) and the Inverter is in remote mode.

Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1 (i.e., the Digital Operator is enabled) and the Inverter is in local mode.

Frequency references 2 through 16 are input for multi-step speed operation.

Note 3.

The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.

Example of Multi-function Display

Key sequence Indicator Display Explanation

Power On

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the MNTR indicator is lit.

U01 will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to select the monitor item to be displayed.

Press the Enter Key so that the data of the selected monitor item will be displayed.

The monitor item will appear again by pressing the

Mode Key.

3-5

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Status Monitor

Item

U-01

U-02

U-03

U-04

Display Display unit

Frequency reference Hz (see note 1)

Output frequency

Output current

Output voltage

Hz (see note 1)

U-05

U-06

DC bus voltage V

Input terminal status ---

Function

Monitors the frequency reference. (Same as FREF)

Monitors the output frequency. (Same as FOUT)

Monitors the output current. (Same as IOUT)

Monitors the internal output voltage reference value of the

Inverter.

Monitors the DC voltage of the internal main circuit of the

Inverter.

Shows the ON/OFF status of inputs.

U-07 status

U-08 Torque monitor

U-09 recent one) )

U-10

U-11

U-13

Software No.

Output power

Accumulated operating time

---

W x10H

: ON : OFF

Not used

Terminal S1: Multi-function input 1

Terminal S2: Multi-function input 2

Terminal S3: Multi-function input 3

Terminal S4: Multi-function input 4

Terminal S5: Multi-function input 5

Terminal S6: Multi-function input 6

Terminal S7: Multi-function input 7

Shows the ON/OFF status of outputs.

: ON : OFF

Not used

Terminal MA: Multi-function contact output

Terminal P1: Multi-function photo-coupler output 1

Terminal P2: Multi-function photo-coupler output 2

Displays the torque being currently output as a percentage of the rated motor torque. This display can only be made in vector control mode.

The four most recent errors can be checked.

Error generation item

Error

Note “1” means that the latest error is displayed. Press the

Increment Key to display the second latest error. A maximum of four errors can be displayed.

OMRON use only.

Monitors the output power of the Inverter. (See note 2.)

Monitor the accumulated operating time in 10-second units.

(See note 3.)

3-6

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Item

U-15

Display

Communications error

---

Display unit

Function

Displays communications errors that occur during serial communications (RS-422/RS-485). The errors that are displayed have the same content as the serial communications error at register number 003D Hex.

U-16

U-17

U-18

PID feedback

PID input

PID output

(Not used.)

: Error : Normal operation

CRC error

Data length error

(Not used.)

Parity error

Overrun error

Framing error

Communications time-over

Monitors the PID control feedback (Max. frequency: 100%)

Monitors the PID control input (Max. frequency: 100%)

Monitors the PID output (Max. frequency: 100%)

Note 1.

The setting unit of the frequency reference and output frequency is determined by the set value in n035. The default unit is Hz.

Note 2.

The output power monitor is not displayed in vector control mode. “––––” is displayed instead.

Note 3.

This function is provided for 200- and 400-V (5.5-/7.5-kW) Inverters only.

Example of Forward/Reverse Selection Settings

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the F/R indicator is lit.

The present setting will be displayed.

For: Forward; rEv: Reverse

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the direction of motor rotation. The direction of motor rotation selected will be enabled when the display changes after the key is pressed.

Note The direction of motor rotation can be changed, even during operation.

3-7

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Example of Local/Remote Selection Settings

Chapter 3

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the LO/RE indicator is lit.

The present setting will be displayed.

rE: Remote; Lo: Local

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the

Inverter to local or remote mode. The selection will be enabled when the display changes after the key is pressed.

Note 1.

Local or remote selection is possible only when the Inverter is not in operation. The present setting can be monitored when the Inverter is in operation.

Note 2.

Local or remote settings in multi-function input terminals can be changed through the multifunction input terminals only.

Note 3.

Any RUN command input will be ignored while the LO/RE indicator is lit. To enable a RUN command, first turn OFF the RUN command and then press the Mode Key to display an item with a green indicator (FREF to MNTR). Finally, input the RUN command again.

Example of Parameter Settings

Cancels set data.

Key sequence Indicator Display example

In approximately 1 s.

Explanation

Power On

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the parameter number.

Press the Enter Key.

The data of the selected parameter number will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the data.

At that time the display will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit. (see note 1)

The parameter number will be displayed.

In approximately

1 s.

3-8

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Note 1.

To cancel the set value, press the Mode Key instead. The parameter number will be displayed.

Note 2.

There are parameters that cannot be changed while the Inverter is in operation. Refer to the list of parameters. When attempting to change such parameters, the data display will not change by pressing the Increment or Decrement Key.

Note 3.

Any RUN command input will be ignored while the Parameter Setting (PRGM) indicator is lit.

To enable a RUN command, first turn the RUN command OFF and then press the Mode Key to display an item with a green indicator (FREF to MNTR). Finally, input the RUN command again.

3-9

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

3-2 Parameter Copy and Verify Function

Chapter 3

The Digital Operator of the 3G3MV Inverter has an EEPROM in which the set values in all the parameters and data on the capacity and software version of the Inverter can be stored.

By using the EEPROM, most parameter set values in the Inverter can be copied to another Inverter.

Note In the above case, however, the Inverters must have the same power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control mode). Some types of parameter set values cannot be copied.

3-2-1 Parameter for Copying and Verifying Set Values

•

Use the following parameter to read, copy, and verify the set values.

Parameter

Register Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting n176 01B0 rdy to

Sno

--rdy

Changes during operation

No Parameter copy and verify function selection

The following items are selectable.

rdy: Ready to accept the next command rEd: Reads the parameter

CPy: Copies the parameter vFy: Verifies the parameter vA: Displays the capacity of the Inverter

Sno: Displays the software version.

3-10

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Sequence of Display

Chapter 3

Reading

Writing

Verifying

Inverter capacity

Software version

Completed reading

Completed writing

Completed verifying or or or or or

Note The following display is an example of the capacity displayed. The values in parentheses indicate the capacities for European motors.

Voltage class

2: 3-phase 200 V b: Single-phase 200 V

4: 3-phase 400 V

Max. applicable motor capacity

0.1: 0.1kW (0.1 kW)

0.2: 0.25 kW/0.37 kW (0.2 kW)

0.4: 0.55 kW (0.4 kW)

0.7: 1.1 kW (0.75 kW)

1.5: 1.5 kW (1.5 kW)

2.2: 2.2 kW (2.2 kW)

3.7: 3.7 kW (3.7 kW)

5.5: 5.5 kW (5.5 kW)

5: 7.5 kW (7.5 kW)

Note The values in parentheses indicate Japanese motor capacities.

3-2-2 Parameter Copying Procedure

•

To copy parameter values to another Inverter, take the following steps.

1. Set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

2. Set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.

3. Read the parameter set value with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator with the item rED selected.

4. Turn OFF the Inverter and remove the Digital Operator.

5. Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are to be copied. Then turn ON the Inverter.

6. Copy the data in the EEPROM to the Inverter with the item CPy selected.

3-11

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

7. Check that the data is written correctly with the item vFy selected.

•

The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters have the same power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control). It is not possible to copy parameters from a 200-V model to a 400-V model or from an Inverter that is in V/f control mode to another that is in vector control mode, for example.

Note 1.

The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.

n176: Parameter copy function selection n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection n178: Error log n179: Software version

Note 2.

The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each other in capacity.

n011 to n017: V/f setting n036: Rated motor current n080: Carrier frequency n105: Torque compensation core loss n106: Rated motor slip n107: Motor wire-to-wire resistance n108: Motor leakage inductance n109: Torque compensation limit n110: Motor no-load current n140: Energy-saving control coefficient K2 n158: Motor code

Note 3.

Functions for 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.

Setting n001 for Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter

Initialization

•

No data can be written to n176 for parameter copy function selection unless the default setting is changed. To write data to this parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

3-12

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Parameter n001

Register

0101

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

No Parameter writeprohibit selection/parameter initialization

Used to prohibit parameters to be written, sets parameters, or change the monitor range of parameters.

Used to initialize parameters to default settings.

0: Sets or monitor parameter n001. The parameters within a range from n002 to n179 can be monitored only.

1: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n49 (i.e., function group 1 settings).

2: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n79 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).

3: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).

4: Sets or monitor the parameters within a range from n001 to n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).

6: Clears the error log.

8: Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence.

9: Initializes parameters in

3-wire sequence.

10: For the USA, initializes parameter in 2-wire sequence.

11: For the USA, initializes parameter in 3-wire sequence.

0 to 11

3-13

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Parameter Settings in n001

Key sequence Indicator Display example

In approximately

1 s.

Chapter 3

Explanation

Power ON

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Check that “n001” is displayed.

Press the Enter Key.

The data of the specified parameter number is displayed.

Press the Increment Key repeatedly to display the figure “4.” At that time the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

Reading the Parameter Set Value (rEd)

• To read the parameter set values in the Inverter with the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to rEd.

Procedure to Read the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Check that the PRGM indicator is lit. If the PRGM is not lit, press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display n176.

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “rEd.”

Completes or

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values in the Inverter will be read by the EEPROM of the

Digital Operator, during which the display flashes.

When the set values have been all read, “End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number

(n176) will be displayed again.

Note Be sure to set n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection to 1 so that the parameters can be read.

3-14

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Copying the Data in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator to another

Inverter (CPy)

•

To copy the parameter set values to another Inverter from the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to CPy.

•

When the parameter set values have been read, turn OFF the Inverter and remove the Digital Operator. Refer to 2-1-3 Removing and Mounting the Covers for details.

•

Mount the Digital Operator to the Inverter to which the parameters are copied. Then turn ON the

Inverter.

• Check that n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to 4 in the Inverter

(i.e., values can be set in n001 through n179). If n001 is not set to 4, take the steps described above and set n001 to 4.

Note The above procedure is possible provided that the Inverters are the same in power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control).

Procedure to Read the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Power ON

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display

“n176.”

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “CPy.”

Completes or

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator will be copied to the Inverter, during which the display flashes.

When the set values have been all copied, “End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number

(n176) will be displayed again.

Note 1.

Check and verify the set ranges and set values of the parameters written to the Inverter. If any error is found as a result, all the parameter set values will be prohibited and the previous values will be reset.

If a set range error results, the corresponding parameter number will flash. In the case of a verification error, “oP j

” ( j

is a figure) will flash.

Note 2.

The following parameter set values or output frequency on hold cannot be copied.

n176: Parameter copy function selection n178: Error log n177: Parameter read-prohibit selection n179: Software version

3-15

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Note 3.

The following parameter set values cannot be copied if the Inverters are different to each other in capacity.

Note 4.

Functions for 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters cannot be copied to Inverters with different capacities.

Verifying the Parameter Set Values (vFy)

•

In order to verify that the copied parameter set values in the Inverter coincide with those in the

EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n176 for parameter copy function selection to vFy.

Note The parameter set values can be verified provided that they are copied between the Inverters that are the same in power supply specification and control mode (i.e., V/f or vector control).

Procedure to Verify the Parameter Set Values

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Power ON

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display

“n176.”

Press the Enter Key. Then “rdy” will be displayed.

Use the Increment Key to display “vFy.”

Completes or

Press the Enter Key so that the parameter set values are verified, during which the display flashes.

If there is a parameter set value that does not coincide, the parameter number will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the corresponding set value in the Inverter will flash.

Press the Enter Key again so that the corresponding set value in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator will flash.

Press the Increment Key so that verification will resume.

When the set values have been all checked, “End” will be displayed.

Press the Mode or Enter Key. The parameter number

(n176) will be displayed again.

Note 1.

The above operation is interrupted when the STOP/RESET Key is pressed while the parameter number or parameter set value is flashing because the parameter set value does not coincide. “End” will be displayed. By pressing the Mode or Enter Key, the parameter number

(n176) is displayed again.

3-16

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring Chapter 3

Note 2.

By attempting to verify the parameter set values in Inverters that are different in capacity,

“vAE” flashes for a capacity error. Press the Enter Key to continue verifying the parameter set values. To cancel the operation, press the STOP/RESET Key.

3-2-3 Parameter Read-prohibit Selection (Prohibiting Data

Written to the EEPROM of the Digital Operator)

•

To store the parameter set values in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator, set n177 for parameter readprohibit selection to 0. A protection error (PrE) will be detected by attempting to read the parameter set values in the Inverter with rEd set. This protects the parameter set values in the EEPROM from change. The PrE display is turned OFF by pressing the Mode Key.

Parameter

Register Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

No n177 01B1 Parameter readprohibit selection

Used to keep the data in the

EEPROM of the Digital

Operator on hold.

0: Parameter read-prohibit

(No data can be written to the EEPROM)

1: Parameter read possible

(Data can be written to the

EEPROM)

0, 1 1

Note 1.

No data can be written to n177 unless the default setting is changed. To write data to this parameter, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 4.

Note 2.

The parameter setting has an effect on the Digital Operator. If the Digital Operator with the data in the EEPROM protected is mounted to another Inverter, n117 will be set to 0 regardless of the n117 setting in the Inverter.

Steps to Set Parameter Read-prohibit

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power ON

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display

“n176.”

Press the Enter Key. The present set data will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display to set the data, during which the display flashes.

0: Parameter read-prohibit (No data can be written to the EEPROM)

1: Parameter read possible (Data can be written to the

EEPROM)

3-17

Preparing for Operation and Monitoring

Key sequence Indicator

In approximately

1 s.

Chapter 3

Display example

Explanation

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

3-2-4 Parameter Copy or Verify Errors

• The following description provides information on errors that may result while the parameter set values are read, copied, or verified, and the remedies to be taken. The display flashes while displaying these errors.

Display pre rde cse nde cpe cye uae ife

Name

Protection error

Read error

Checksum error

No data error

Copy error

Copy voltage error

Capacity error

Communications error

Probable cause

An attempt was made to read the parameter set values while n177 for parameter read-prohibit selection was set to 0.

The parameter set values were not read correctly or a main-circuit low voltage was detected while the parameter set values were read.

A checksum error resulted in the parameter set values in the

EEPROM of the Digital Operator.

There are no parameter set values stored in the EEPROM of the

Digital Operator.

An attempt was made to copy or verify the parameter set values while the Inverters are different to each other in voltage or control mode.

Main-circuit low voltage is detected while the Inverter was copying the parameter set values.

An attempt was made to verify the parameter set values while the

Inverters were different to each other in capacity.

A communications error resulted between the Inverter and Digital

Operator.

Remedy

Set n177 to 1 and retry after rechecking the necessity of reading the parameter set values.

Retry after checking that the voltage of the main circuit is normal.

Read the parameter set values again and store them in the

EEPROM.

Read the parameter set values and store them in the EEPROM.

Check that the Inverters are the same in voltage and control mode.

If either of them is different, no parameter set values can be either copied or verified.

If the Inverters are different only in control mode, retry after changing the mode of the Inverter to which the parameter set values are to be written.

Retry after checking that the voltage of the main circuit is normal.

To continue verifying the parameter set values, press the

Enter Key.

To cancel the operation, press the

STOP/RESET Key.

Retry after checking the connection between the Inverter and Digital Operator.

3-18

Test Run

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

Chapter 4

Test Run Chapter 4

WARNING

Turn ON the input power supply only after mounting the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, and optional items. Not doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not remove the front cover, terminal covers, bottom cover, Operator, or optional items while the power is being supplied. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or damage to the product.

WARNING

Do not operate the Operator or switches with wet hands. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not touch the inside of the Inverter. Doing so may result in electrical shock.

WARNING

Do not come close to the machine when using the error retry function because the machine may abruptly start when stopped by an alarm. Doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Provide a separate emergency stop switch because the STOP Key on the Operator is valid only when function settings are performed. Not doing so may result in injury.

WARNING

Caution

Be sure to confirm permissible ranges of motors and machines before operation because the Inverter speed can be easily changed from low to high. Not doing so may result in damage to the product.

Provide a separate holding brake when necessary. Not doing so may result in injury.

Do not perform a signal check during operation. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

Do not carelessly change settings. Doing so may result in injury or damage to the product.

4-2

Test Run

4-1 Procedure for Test Run

Chapter 4

1. Installation and Mounting

Install the Inverter according to the installation conditions. Refer to page 2-2. Ensure that the installation conditions are met.

2. Wiring and Connection

Connect to the power supply and peripheral devices. Refer to page 2-11. Select peripheral devices which meet the specifications and wire correctly.

3. Power Connection

Carry out the following pre-connection checks before turning ON the power supply.

Always ensure that a power supply to the correct voltage is used and that the power input terminals

(R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are wired correctly.

3G3MV-A2 j : 3-phase 200 to 230 V AC

3G3MV-AB j

: Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)

3G3MV-A4 j

: 3-phase 380 to 460 V AC

Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly.

S Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that all control terminals are turned OFF.

Note Set parameter n052 (terminal S3) to 0 if a 3-wire sequence is set.

Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).

Having conducted the above checks, connect the power supply.

4. Check the Display Status

Check to be sure that there are no faults in the Inverter.

If the display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows:

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: OFF

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: Displays the corresponding data of the indicator that is lit.

When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Chapter 8

Maintenance Operations and take necessary remedies.

5. Initializing Parameters

Initialize the parameters.

Set n001 to 8 for initialization in 2-wire sequence.

6. Setting Parameters

Set the parameters required for a test run.

Perform the test run in V/f control mode. The control mode needs to be set to V/f control since it will not be initialized. Set the rated motor current in order to prevent the motor from burning due to overloading.

4-3

Test Run Chapter 4

7. No-load Operation

Start the no-load motor using the Digital Operator.

Set the frequency reference using the Digital Operator and start the motor using key sequences.

8. Actual Load Operation

Connect the mechanical system and operate using the Digital Operator.

When there are no difficulties using the no-load operation, connect the mechanical system to the motor and operate using the Digital Operator.

9. Operation

Basic Operation:

Operation based on the basic settings required to start and stop the Inverter. Refer to page 5-1.

Advanced Operation:

Operation that uses PID control or other functions. Refer to page 6-1.

For operation within standard parameters, refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation .

Refer to Chapter 5 Basic Operation and Chapter 6 Advanced Operation for the various advanced functions, such as energy-saving control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting, overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.

4-4

Test Run

4-2 Operation Example

Chapter 4

1 Power Connection

Checkpoints before Connecting the Power Supply

•

Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage and that the motor output terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) are connected to the motor correctly.

3G3MV-A2 j

: Three-phase 200 to 230 V AC

3G3MV-AB j

: Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC (Wire R/L1 and S/L2)

3G3MV-A4 j

: Three-phase 380 to 460 V AC

•

Make sure that the motor output terminals (U/T1, V/T2, and W/T3) are connected to the motor correctly.

•

Ensure that the control circuit terminals and the control device are wired correctly. Make sure that all control terminals are turned OFF.

Note Set parameter n052 (terminal S3) to 0 if a 3-wire sequence is set.

•

Set the motor to no-load status (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system).

Connecting the Power Supply

• After conducting the above checks, connect the power supply.

2 Check the Display Status

•

If the display is normal when the power is connected, it will read as follows:

Normal

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: Off

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: Displays the corresponding data for the indicator that is lit.

•

When a fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed. In that case, refer to Chapter 8

Maintenance

Operations and take necessary action.

Fault

RUN indicator: Flashes

ALARM indicator: Lit (fault detection) or flashes (alarm detection)

Simplified-LED (setting/monitor) indicators: FREF, FOUT, or IOUT is lit.

Data display: The fault code, such as UV1, is displayed. The display will differ depending on the type of fault.

4-5

Test Run Chapter 4

3 Initializing Parameters

•

Initialize the parameters using the following procedure.

• To initialize the parameters, set n01 to 8.

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Power On

---

In approximately

1 s.

Explanation

Press the Mode Key repeatedly until the PRGM indicator is lit.

Press the Enter Key. The data of n001 will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n01 to 8.

The display will flash.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

Parameter n001 will be initialized and reset to 1 from 8.

The parameter number will be displayed.

4 Setting the Motor Current Parameter

• Run the Inverter in V/f control mode for trial operation. The control mode is not initialized. Therefore, set n002 to 0 for V/f control. Set the motor current parameter in n036 in order to prevent the motor from burning due to overloading.

Control Mode Setting

Parameter n002

Register Name

0102

Description

Control mode selection

Sets the control mode for the

Inverter.

0: V/f control mode

1: Vector control mode

0, 1

Note 1.

The control mode is not initialized with n001 settings.

Note 2.

There are parameters that are changed according to the set value in n002. For details, refer to

5-1-2 Setting the

Control Mode

(n002) .

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

4-6

Test Run Chapter 4

Key sequence Indicator Display example

Explanation

The parameter number is displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n002.”

Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n002.

Use the Increment or Decrement key to set n002 to 0 unless the value is already set to 0, during which the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

In approximately

1 s.

Setting the Rated Motor Current

Parameter n036

Register Name

0124

Key sequence

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Rated motor current

Indicator

Used to set the rated motor current (A) used for the reference current of motor overload detection (OL1).

Note 1.

The default setting for the rated motor current is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Note 2.

Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

0.0% to

150%

(A) of rated output current of the

Inverter

Display example

0.1 A

Explanation

Default setting

See note

1 under

“Description.”)

Changes during operation

The parameter number is displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to display “n036.”

In approximately

1 s.

Press the Enter Key to display the set value in n036.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set n036 to the rated motor current, during which the display flashes.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

The parameter number will be displayed again in approximately 1 s.

4-7

Test Run Chapter 4

5 No-load Operation

•

Start the no-load motor (i.e., not connected to the mechanical system) using the Digital Operator.

Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.

Forward/Reverse Rotation with the Digital Operator

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Monitors the frequency reference.

Press the RUN Key. The RUN Indicator will be lit.

Turn the FREQ adjuster clockwise slowly.

The monitored frequency reference will be displayed.

The motor will start rotating in the forward direction according to the frequency reference.

Press the MODE Key to turn ON the F/R indicator.

“For” will be displayed.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to change the direction of motor rotation. The direction of motor rotation selected will be enabled when the display is changed after the Key is pressed.

•

After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor.

•

Check that no faults have occurred in the Inverter during operation.

Stopping the Motor

•

On completion of operating the motor in the no-load state in the forward or reverse direction, press the

STOP/RESET Key. The motor will stop. (The RUN indicator will flash until the motor stops.)

6 Actual Load Operation

•

After checking the operation with the motor in no-load status, connect the mechanical system and operate with an actual load.

Note Before operating the Digital Operator, check that the FREQ adjuster is set to MIN.

Connecting the System

• After confirming that the motor has stopped completely, connect the mechanical system.

•

Be sure to tighten all the screws when fixing the motor axis in the mechanical system.

Operation Using the Digital Operator

•

In case a fault occurs during operation, make sure the Stop Key on the Digital Operator is easily accessible.

•

Use the Digital Operator in the same way as no-load operation.

•

First set the frequency reference to a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed.

4-8

Test Run Chapter 4

Checking the Operating Status

•

Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference.

•

After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no vibration or abnormal sound from the motor. Check the monitor display (IOUT or multi-function monitor U-03) to ensure that the output current is not becoming excessive.

4-9

Basic Operation

5-1 Initial Settings

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

5-3 Operation in V/f Control

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Method

5-10 Multi-function I/O

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse

Monitor Output

Chapter 5

Basic Operation Chapter 5

This section explains the basic settings required to operate and stop the Inverter.

The settings of parameters described here will be sufficient for simple Inverter operations.

First make these basic settings and then skip to the explanations of those special functions, even when your application requires special functions, such as energy-saving control, PID control, stall prevention, carrier frequency setting, overtorque detection, torque compensation, slip compensation. Refer to Chapter 6 Advanced Operation .

5-1 Initial Settings

•

The following initial settings are required.

Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter Initialization (n001): Set n001 to 4 so that n001 through n179 can be set or displayed.

Control Mode Selection (n002): Set to V/f or vector control mode according to the application.

5-1-1 Setting the Parameter Write-prohibit Selection/Parameter

Initialization (n001)

•

Set n001 to 4 so that n001 through n179 can be set or displayed.

n001

Setting range

Parameter Write-prohibit

Selection/Parameter Initialization

0 to 11

Register 0101 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Note This parameter makes it possible to write-prohibit parameters, change the parameter set or displayed range, or initialize all parameters to default values.

Set Values

Value

Description

Displays and sets n001. Parameters from n002 to n179 can be displayed only.

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n049 (i.e., function group 1 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n079 (i.e., function groups 1 and 2 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n119 (i.e., function groups 1 through 3 settings).

Sets or monitors parameters n001 through n179 (i.e., function groups 1 through 4 settings).

Clears the error log.

Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence. (See note.)

Initializes parameters in 3-wire sequence. (See note.)

For the USA, initializes parameter in 2-wire sequence (See note.)

For the USA, initializes parameter in 3-wire sequence (See note.)

Note The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8, 9, 10, or 11.

Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the preset control mode. The default value varies with the control mode. For details, refer to page 5-3.

n014 (middle output frequency), n015 (middle output frequency voltage), n016 (minimum output frequency), n017 (minimum output frequency voltage), n104 (torque compensation primary-

5-2

Basic Operation Chapter 5 delay time constant), n111 (slip compensation gain), n112 (slip compensation primary-delay time constant)

5-1-2 Setting the Control Mode (n002)

•

The 3G3MV Inverter operates in vector or V/f control mode to be selected according to the application.

•

These two modes have the following characteristics.

Vector Control Mode

The Inverter in vector control mode calculates the vector of the operating condition of the motor. Then the 150% rated output torque of the motor is provided at an output frequency of 1 Hz. Vector control provides more powerful motor control than V/f control and makes it possible to suppress speed fluctuation regardless of changes in loads. Normally set the Inverter to this mode.

V/f Control Mode

This mode, which is used by conventional general-purpose inverters, is convenient when replacing a conventional model with the 3G3MV Inverter because the Inverter in this mode can be operated without considering the constants of the motor. Furthermore, set the Inverter to this mode if the Inverter is connected to more than one motor or special motors such as high-speed motors.

n002 Control Mode Selection No

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0102 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Note This parameter is used for selecting the control mode of the Inverter.

Set Values

Value

V/f control mode

Vector control mode (open loop)

Description

Note 1.

This parameter is not initialized by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8, 9, 10, or 11 for parameter initialization. Be sure to change the parameter n002 before changing the control mode.

Note 2.

Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the control mode set in this parameter. The default value varies with the control mode. Therefore, be sure to set the following parameters after setting the control mode in n002.

5-3

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Parameter n014 n015 n016 n017 n104 n111 n112

Name

Middle output frequency

Middle output frequency voltage

Minimum output frequency

Minimum output frequency voltage

1.5 Hz

V/f control

(Set value: 0)

Default value

Vector control

(Set value: 1)

3.0 Hz

11.0 V (22.0 V) 12.0 V (24.0 V)

(See note 2.)

1.5 Hz

12.0 V (24.0 V)

(See note 2.)

0.3 s

1.0 Hz

4.3 V (8.6 V)

0.2 s Torque compensation primary-delay time constant

Slip compensation gain

Slip compensation primary-delay time constant

0.0

2.0 s

1.0

0.2 s

Note 1.

Values in parentheses are for 400-V models.

Note 2.

For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to 20.0 V for 400-V-class models.

5-4

Basic Operation

5-2 Operation in Vector Control

Chapter 5

To operate the Inverter in vector control mode, be sure to set the following parameters.

n036 (rated motor current), n106 (rated motor slip), n107 (motor wire-to-wire resistance), n110 (motor no-load current)

Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

•

Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.

•

This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is also used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.

n036 Rated Motor Current No

Setting range

0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output current of the Inverter

Register 0124 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 A Default setting See note.

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Rated Motor Slip (n106)

• Set the rated motor slip in n106.

• This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is used for slip compensation as well.

•

Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by using the following formula.

Rated slit value (Hz) = Rated frequency (Hz) – Rated rpm x Number of poles/120 n106 Rated Motor Slip Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)

Register 016A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting See note.

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard motor slip of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance (n107)

•

Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance or phase-to-neutral resistance of the motor.

•

Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the above resistance.

•

This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly.

n107

Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance Register 016B Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0.000 to 65.50 ( Ω ) Unit of setting

See note

Default setting

See note

5-5

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Note 1.

The value will be set in 0.001-

Ω

increments if the resistance is less than 10

Ω

and 0.01-

Ω increments if the resistance is 10

Ω

or over.

Note 2.

The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase-to-neutral resistance of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Motor No-load Current (n110)

•

Set the motor no-load current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

•

Contact the manufacturer of the motor for the motor no-load current.

•

This parameter is used as a vector control constant. Be sure to set the parameter correctly. This set value is used for slip compensation as well.

n110 Motor No-load Current No

Setting range

0 to 99 (%)

Register 016E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting See note.

Note The default setting for this parameter is the standard no-load current of the maximum applicable motor.

5-6

Basic Operation

5-3 Operation in V/f Control

Chapter 5

This mode, which is used by conventional general-purpose inverters, is convenient when replacing a conventional model with the 3G3MV Inverter because the Inverter in this mode can be operated without considering the constants of the motor. Furthermore, set the Inverter to this mode if the Inverter is connected to two or more motors or special motors, such as high-speed motors.

To operate the Inverter in V/f control mode, be sure to set n036 for the rated motor current and n011 through n017 for the V/f pattern.

5-3-1 Setting the Rated Motor Current (n036)

•

Check the motor nameplate and set this parameter to the rated current.

•

This set value is used for determining the electronic thermal characteristics to protect the motor from overheating. The correct set value protects the motor from burning that may result from overloading.

n036

Rated Motor Current No

Setting range

0.0% to 150% (A) of rated output current of the Inverter

Register 0124 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 A Default setting See note

Note 1.

The default setting for this parameter is the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

Note 2.

Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

5-3-2 Setting the V/f Patterns (n011 to n017)

•

Set the V/f pattern so that the motor output torque is adjusted to the required load torque.

•

The 3G3MV incorporates an automatic torque boost function. Therefore, a maximum of 150% torque can be output at 3 Hz without changing the default settings. Check the system in trial operation and leave the default settings as they are if no torque characteristic changes are required.

n011 Maximum Frequency (FMAX) No

Setting range

50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting 60.0

n012 Maximum Voltage (VMAX) No

Setting range n013

0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V)

Register 010C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting 200.0

[400.0]

Setting range n014

Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA) Register 010D Hex Changes during operation

0.2 to 400.0 (Hz) Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Middle Output Frequency (FB)

60.0

Setting range

0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)

Register 010E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting 1.5

5-7

Basic Operation Chapter 5 n015

Setting range

Middle Output Frequency Voltage

(VC)

0.1 to 255.0 [0.1 to 510.0] (V)

Register 010F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting

12.0

[24.0]

(See note 2.) n016 Minimum Output Frequency

(FMIN)

0.1 to 10.0 (Hz) Setting range n017 Minimum Output Frequency

Voltage (VMIN)

Setting range

0.1 to 50.0 [0.1 to 100.0] (V)

Register 0110 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Register 0111 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting

1.5

12.0

[24.0]

(See note 2.)

Note 1.

[ ] values indicate those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2.

For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, this value is set to 10.0 V for 200-V-class models and to 20.0 V for 400-V-class models.

Output voltage

(V) n012 (VMAX)

Note 1.

Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 x n014 < n013 x n011

Note 2.

The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and n014 are the same in value.

n015 (VC) n017 (VMIN)

Frequency (Hz) n016

(FMIN) n014

(FB) n013

(FA) n011

(FMAX)

•

Set the rated motor frequency as the maximum voltage frequency, and set the rated motor voltage as the maximum voltage.

•

The vertical-axis load or the load with high viscous friction may require high torque at low speed. If the torque is insufficient at low speed, increase the voltage in the low-speed range by 1 V, provided that no overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the use of an Inverter model with a higher capacity.

•

The required torque of fan or pump control increases in proportion to the square of the speed. By setting a quadratic V/f pattern to increase the voltage in the low-speed range, the power consumption of the system will increase.

5-8

Basic Operation

5-4 Setting the Local/Remote Mode

Chapter 5

The 3G3MV operates in local or remote mode. The following description provides information on these modes and how to select them.

Basic Concept

Operation mode

Remote

Local

Basic concept

The Inverter in a system operates according to the control signal of the host controller.

The Inverter in a system operates independently in this mode so that the Inverter can be checked independently.

Description

Operation Command

Selectable from four types and set in n003.

Frequency Reference

Selectable from ten types and set in n004.

Operation Command

Starts with the RUN Key of the Digital Operator and stops with the STOP/RESET Key.

Frequency Reference

Set with the Digital Operator or the FREQ adjuster.

Set with frequency reference selection in local mode in n07.

Local/Remote Selection Methods

•

The following two selection methods are available to set the Inverter to local or remote mode. However, it is not possible to switch between local and remote modes during operation command input.

Select the mode with the LO/RE Key of the Digital Operator.

Set any one of multi-function inputs 1 through 7 (n050 through n056) to 17 to set the Inverter to local mode with control input turned ON.

Note If the above setting is made, mode selection will be possible only with multi-function input, and not with the Digital Operator.

•

The Inverter always goes into remote mode when the power is turned ON. To operate immediately after powerup, preset the RUN command and frequency reference settings in remote mode.

5-9

Basic Operation

5-5 Selecting the Operation Command

Chapter 5

The following description provides information on how to input operation commands to start or stop the Inverter or change the direction of rotation of the Inverter.

Two types of command input methods are available. Select either one of them according to the application.

Selecting the Operation Mode (n003)

•

Select the method of operation mode input to start or stop the Inverter.

•

The following method is enabled in remote mode only. The command can be input through key sequences on the Digital Operator.

n003 Operation Command Selection No

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0103 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

The RUN and STOP/RESET Keys of the Digital Operator are enabled.

Multi-function input in 2- or 3-wire sequence through the control circuit terminals is enabled.

RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

Input from option (DeviceNet Communications Unit) is enabled.

Selecting the STOP/RESET Key Function (n007)

•

When parameter n003 is not set to 0, set whether or not to use the STOP/RESET Key of the Digital

Operator to stop the Inverter in remote mode. The STOP/RESET Key is always enabled in local mode regardless of the setting in n007.

n007 STOP Key Function Selection No

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0107 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is enabled.

The STOP/RESET Key of the Digital Operator is disabled.

5-10

Basic Operation

5-6 Setting the Frequency Reference

Chapter 5

5-6-1 Selecting the Frequency Reference

The following description provides information on how to set the frequency reference in the Inverter. Select the method according to the operation mode.

Remote mode: Select and set one out of ten frequency references in n004.

Local mode: Select and set one out of two frequency references in n008.

Selecting the Frequency Reference (n004) in Remote Mode

• Select the input method of frequency references in remote mode.

• Five frequency references are available in remote mode. Select one of them according to the application.

n004

Frequency Reference Selection No

Setting range

0 to 9

Register 0104 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

The settings of the FREQUENCY adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 1.)

Frequency reference 1 (n024) is enabled.

The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 10-V input) is enabled. (See note 2.)

The frequency reference control terminal (for 4- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (See note

3.)

The frequency reference control terminal (for 0- to 20-mA current input) is enabled. (See note

3.)

The pulse train command control input is enabled.

Frequency reference (0002 Hex) through RS-422/485 communications is enabled.

Multi-function analog voltage input (0 to 10 V) is enabled. This setting is not required unless two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current input (4 to 20 mA) is enabled. This setting is not required unless two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Frequency reference input from option (DeviceNet Communications Unit) is enabled.

Note 1.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.

Note 2.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 10 V input.

Note 3.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set with 20 mA input, provided that SW2 on the control

PCB is switched from V to I.

5-11

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Note 4.

Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to the maximum frequency (FMAX).

•

The frequency reference set in n004 functions as frequency reference 1 when the Inverter is in multistep speed operation. The set values in n025 through n031 and n120 through n127 for frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled.

Selecting the Frequency Reference (n008) in Local Mode

•

Select the input method of frequency references in local mode.

•

Two frequency references are available in local mode. Select one of them according to the application.

n008

Setting range

Frequency Reference Selection in

Local Mode

0, 1

Register 0108 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The settings of the FREQ adjuster in the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 1.)

Key sequences on the Digital Operator are enabled. (See note 2.)

Note 1.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is set when the FREQ adjuster is set to MAX.

Note 2.

The frequency reference can be set with key sequences while the FREF indicator is lit or with the set value in n024 for frequency reference 1. In either case, the value is set in n024.

5-6-2 Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits

Regardless of the methods of operation mode and frequency reference input, the upper and lower frequency reference limits can be set.

Setting the Upper and Lower Frequency Reference Limits (n033 and n034)

•

Set the upper and lower frequency reference limits as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

n033 No

Setting range

Upper Frequency Reference Limit Register 0121 Hex Changes during operation

0% to 110%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 100 n034 No

Setting range

Lower Frequency Reference Limit Register 0122 Hex Changes during operation

0% to 110%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 0

Note If n034 is set to a value less than the minimum output frequency (FMIN), the Inverter will have no output when a frequency reference less than the minimum output frequency input is ON.

5-12

Basic Operation

5-6-3 Frequency Referencing by Analog Input

Chapter 5

This section explains the methods for referencing frequencies by analog input, adjusting input characteristics, and detecting input command errors. Either the frequency reference control terminal (voltage/current) or multi-function analog voltage/current input can be used for analog inputs. The gain, bias, and filter time parameters can be used for adjustments, or, alternatively, the adjustments can be made by external analog voltage

(current), using the multi-function analog inputs.

Setting Frequency References by Analog Input

•

Analog inputs can be set only in remote mode. Set parameter n004 (frequency reference selection) to any of the following: 2 to 4 (frequency reference control terminal), 7 (multi-function analog voltage input), or 8 (multi-function analog current input).

Note If the frequency reference control terminal is to be used for current inputs, the SW2 setting must be changed from V to I.

FR Terminal Adjustments for Frequency Reference Input

Gain and Bias Settings (n060 and n061)

•

Set the input characteristics of analog frequency references in n060 (for the frequency reference gain) and n061 (for the frequency reference bias).

• Set the frequency of maximum analog input (10 V or 20 mA) in n060 as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Example: In order to obtain the maximum frequency at 5 V, set the value to 200% because 10-V input is 200% maximum frequency.

•

Set the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V, 0 mA, or 4 mA) in n061 as percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Example: In order to obtain 50% maximum frequency output with 0 V input, set the value to 50%.

•

Use the following equation to obtain the reference value for the analog input value.

Reference value = {Analog input (%) (Gain – Bias)} Maximum frequency + Bias Maximum frequency n060

Frequency Reference Gain Yes

Setting range

0% to 255%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Register 013C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 100 n061

Setting range

Frequency Reference Bias

–99% to 99%

(Max. frequency = 100%)

Register 013D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Yes

5-13

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Filter Time Constant Settings (n062)

•

A primary-delay digital filter can be set for analog frequency references to be input.

•

This setting is ideal if the analog input signal changes rapidly or the signal is subject to noise interference.

•

The larger the set value is, the slower the response speed will be.

n062

Setting range

Analog Frequency Reference

Filter Time Constant

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 013E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 s Default setting

0.10

Multi-function Analog Input

Various auxiliary analog inputs can be set for the Digital Operator’s multi-function analog voltage/current input. Select from the following functions.

n077 Multi-function Analog Input

Terminal Function Selection

Setting range

0 to 4

Register 014D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

0 n078 Multi-function Analog Input

Terminal Selection

Setting range

0, 1 n079 Multi-function Analog Input

Frequency Bias

Setting range

0 to 50

Register 014E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 014F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 % Default setting

5-14

Basic Operation Chapter 5

•

For n077, select from the following five functions allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.

n077 Set Values

Value Name

Multi-function

Analog Input

Function Disable

Auxiliary Frequency

Reference

Description

Disables multi-function analog inputs.

Set 0 when setting multi-function inputs with n004 (Frequency Reference

Selection) or n164 (PID Feedback Input Block Selection). If this function is allocated for both, an error (err or oP6) will be generated.

Set n077 to 0 to disable the multi-function analog input function when enabling PID control in n128 (PID Control Selection). If this function is not disable when PID control is being used, an error will be generated.

Sets the terminal to be used as a second analog frequence reference terminal. The analog input from the multi-function analog input becomes the frequency reference in place of Frequency Reference 2. Toggle the two analog inputs with the multi-function input’s multi-step speed references.

Frequency Gain

(See note 1.)

When this function is set, Frequency Reference 2 (n025) is ignored.

Adjusts the gain for frequency references that are input to the frequency reference input (analog) terminal.

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0x to 2x (See note 2.)

Adjusts the bias for frequency references that are input to the frequency reference input (analog) terminal.

Frequency Bias

(See note 1.)

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): –n079 SV to +n079 SV (See note 2.)

Output Voltage Bias Adjusts the Inverter’s output voltage bias. The bias value that is input is added to the output voltage value for the normal V/f setting.

0 to 10 V (4 mA, or 0 mA to 20 mA): 0 V to +100 V

(See note 2.)

Note 1.

The frequency reference gain (n060) and frequency reference bias (n061) parameter settings are enabled. If “frequency gain” is set for the multi-function analog input, it is multiplied by n060; if “frequency bias” is set, it is added to n061.

Note 2.

The relationship between the multi-function analog input’s input voltage and control variable is shown for when the frequency reference and multi-function analog input gain are 100%, and when the bias setting is 0%.

•

For n078, select whether select whether voltage inputs or current inputs are to be used.

Value Description

Enable multi-function analog voltage inputs. (Disable current inputs.)

1 Enable multi-function analog current inputs. (Disable voltage inputs.)

• When setting “3” (frequency bias) for the multi-function analog input terminal function selection

(n077), set the standard value for the bias in n079. Make the setting as a percentage, with the maximum frequency (n011) as100%.

5-15

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Adjusting Multi-function Analog Input

Setting the Gain and Bias of Multi-function Analog Voltage/Current Input (n068 to n072)

• Set the multi-function analog voltage input characteristics in n068 (multi-function analog voltage input gain) and n069 (multi-function analog voltage input bias). Set the multi-function analog current input characteristics in n071 (multi-function analog current input gain) and n072 (multi-function analog current input bias).

•

When the gain is a positive value (>0), the reference value

from the multi-function analog input is calculated by the Inverter as follows:

Reference value = (Analog input (%) + Bias)



Gain



•

When the gain is a negative value (<0), the reference value from the multi-function analog input is calculated in the same way as follows:

Reference value = (100 – (Analog input (%) + Bias)



Gain



Note 1.

The analog input as a percentage is 100% at 10 V or 20 mA.

Note 2.

When the reference value is used as the frequency (n004 = 7 or 8, or n077 = 1), the frequency is calculated as a multiple of the maximum frequency (n011).

Note 3.

The calculation method is different from that for the frequency reference input (FR terminal).

Note 4.

A negative reference value may result depending on the bias setting, but the minimum reference value is 0.

n068 Yes

Setting range

Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Gain

–255(%) to 255(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%)

Register 0144 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 100 n069

Setting range

Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Bias

–100(%) to 100(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%) n071 Multi-function Analog Current

Input Gain

Setting range

–255(%) to 255(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%) n072

Multi-function Analog Current

Input Bias

Setting range

–100(%) to 100(%)

(Max. frequency: 100%)

Register 0145 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Register 0147 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Register 0148 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Yes

100

Yes

5-16

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Setting the Filter Time Constant for Multi-function Analog Voltage/Current Input

(n070 and n073)

•

These parameters can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for multi-function analog voltage input. For voltage inputs, set the multi-function analog voltage input filter time constant (n070). For current inputs, set the multi-function analog current input filter time constant (n073).

• These parameter settings are effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the analog input signal changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.

•

The larger the set value is, the lower the response will be.

n070 Multi-function Analog Voltage

Input Filter Time Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 0146 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 s Default setting

Yes

0.10

n073 Multi-function Analog Current

Input Filter Time Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00 (s)

Register 0149 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 s Default setting

Yes

0.10

Frequency Reference Loss Detection (n064)

This function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only. If the frequency reference from the control circuit drops by more than 90% within 400 ms, this function detects it and determines that the reference has been lost (e.g., from some cause such as disconnected wiring).

•

When operating in remote mode, the setting for the frequency reference loss detection function is enabled when either an analog reference or a pulse train reference is selected for n004 (frequency reference selection).

Note 1.

If “frequence reference agree” (set value: 2) is preset for multi-function outputs 1 to 3 (n057 to n059), the frequency reference loss status can be checked. When using this output, implement external error processing.

Note 2.

When the frequency reference loss detection is enabled and a loss is detected, operation will continue at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the loss.

Note 3.

If the frequency reference is restored during a frequency reference loss, and the frequency returned to at least the level of the continuing operation, the frequency reference loss detection will be cleared and the Inverter will return to normal operation.

Note 4.

Frequency reference loss detection does not operate for multi-function analog inputs.

n064

Setting range

Frequency Reference Loss

Detection

0, 1

Register 0140 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Value

Description

Loss detection disabled. (Operation according to frequency reference; frequency reference loss detection disabled.)

Loss detection enabled. (After loss detection, operation continues at 80% of the frequency reference prior to the loss; frequency reference loss detection enabled.)

5-17

Basic Operation Chapter 5

5-6-4 Setting Frequency References through Key Sequences

The following description provides information on parameters related to frequency reference settings through key sequences on the Digital Operator

Frequency Reference Setting/Display Unit Selection (n035)

•

Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored in n035 through the Digital Operator.

•

The frequency reference value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

n035

Setting range

Frequency Reference

Setting/Display Unit Selection

0 to 3,999

Register 0123 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value Description

0 Less than 100 Hz: 0.01-Hz increments

100 Hz or over: 0.1-Hz increments

0.1% increments (Max. frequency: 100%) 1

2 to 39 1-rpm increments (number of motor poles)

40 to 3,999 Unit setting

The value to be set or monitored at max. frequency jjjj

Three digits

Decimal place

Note To display 50.0 for example, set the value to 1500. (See note.)

Note The unit of setting of each parameter and monitor item below varies with the decimal place.

Parameters

n024 to n032: Frequency references 1 through 8 and inching frequency command n120 through n127: Frequency references 9 through 16

Monitor Items

U-01: Frequency reference monitor

U-02: Output frequency monitor

5-18

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 and the Inching Frequency

Command (n024 through n031, n120 through n127)

Frequency references 1 through 16 and an inching frequency command can be set together in the

Inverter (using registers n024 through n31, n120 through n127).

Setting Frequency References 1 through 16 (n024 through n31, n120 through n127)

n024 Frequency Reference 1 Register 0118 Hex Changes during operation

Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 6.0

n025 Frequency Reference 2 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0119 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n026 Frequency Reference 3 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n027 Frequency Reference 4 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n028 Frequency Reference 5 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n029 Frequency Reference 6 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n030 Frequency Reference 7 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

n031 Frequency Reference 8 Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 011F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 0.00

5-19

Basic Operation Chapter 5 n120

Setting range

Frequency Reference 9

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0178 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n121

Setting range

Frequency Reference 10

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0179 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n122

Setting range

Frequency Reference 11

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n123

Setting range

Frequency Reference 12

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n124

Setting range

Frequency Reference 13

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n125

Setting range

Frequency Reference 14

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n126

Setting range

Frequency Reference 15

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

n127

Frequency Reference 16

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 017F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Yes

0.00

Note 1.

The setting unit of frequency references 1 through 16 is changed with the set value in n035 for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. Values will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

Note 2.

Frequency reference 1 is enabled with n004 for frequency reference selection set to 1.

Note 3.

Frequency references 2 through 16 are enabled by setting multi-step speed references 1 through 4 in n050 through n056 for multi-function input. Refer to the following table for the

5-20

Basic Operation Chapter 5 relationship between multi-step speed references 1 through 4 and frequency references 1 through 16.

Frequency reference Multi-step speed reference 1

(Set value: 6)

Frequency reference 1 OFF

Frequency reference 2

Frequency reference 3

OFF

Frequency reference 4

Frequency reference 5

Frequency reference 6

Frequency reference 7

OFF

Frequency reference 8

Frequency reference 9

OFF

Frequency reference 10 ON

Frequency reference 11 OFF

Frequency reference 12 ON

Frequency reference 13 OFF

Frequency reference 14 ON

Frequency reference 15 OFF

Frequency reference 16 ON

OFF

Multi-step speed reference 2

(Set value: 7)

OFF

Multi-step speed reference 3

(Set value: 8)

OFF

Multi-step speed reference 4

(Set value: 9)

OFF

To change the frequency of frequency reference 2, for example, turn ON only the multi-function input terminal where multi-step speed reference 2 is set, and turn OFF any other multi-function input terminal.

For example, no settings for multi-step speed reference 3 or 4 will be required if only frequency references 1 through 4 are used. Any multi-step speed reference not set is regarded as turned-OFF input.

Setting the Inching Frequency Command (n032)

• The inching frequency command must be set as multi-function input in order to use the inching frequency command.

n032

Inching Frequency Command Yes

Setting range

0.00 to max. frequency

Register 0120 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz

(See note

1.)

Default setting 6.0

Note 1.

The setting unit of the inching frequency command is changed with the set value in n035 for frequency reference setting and decimal place selection. The value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100

Hz or over.

Note 2.

In order to use the inching frequency command, one of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input must be set to 10 as an inching frequency command. Parameter n032 is selectable by turning ON the multi-function input set with the inching frequency command.

The inching frequency command takes precedence over the multi-step speed reference (i.e., when the inching frequency command is ON, all multi-step speed reference input will be ignored).

5-21

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Setting the Frequency Reference with the FREF Indicator Lit

•

The frequency reference can be set while the FREF indicator of the Digital Operator is lit in the following cases.

Parameter n004 for frequency reference selection is set to 1, which enables frequency reference

1, and the Inverter is in remote mode.

Parameter n008 for frequency selection in local mode is set to 1, which enables key sequences on the Digital Operator, and the Inverter is in local mode.

Frequency references 2 through 16 are set with multi-step speed reference input.

•

The frequency reference can be changed, even during operation.

•

When the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit, the corresponding parameter is changed simultaneously. For example, if frequency reference 2 has been selected with multi-function input (a multi-step speed reference), the set value in n025 (for frequency reference 2) will be changed simultaneously when the frequency reference is changed while the FREF indicator is lit.

•

Take the following default steps, for example, to change the frequency reference with the FREF indicator lit.

Key sequence

Indicator Display example

Explanation

Power On

Note If the FREF indicator has not been lit, press the Mode Key repeatedly until the FREF indicator is lit.

Use the Increment or Decrement Key to set the frequency reference.

The data display will flash while the frequency reference is set.

Press the Enter Key so that the set value will be entered and the data display will be lit.

Setting the Operator Frequency Setting Method (n009)

•

The Enter Key need not be pressed when changing the setting in n009. In that case, the frequency reference will change when the set value is changed with the Increment or Decrement Key while the data display is continuously lit.

n009

Setting range

Operator Frequency Setting

Method

0, 1

Register 0109 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Enter Key enabled (The set value is entered with the Enter Key pressed.)

Enter Key disabled (The set value set is entered immediately.)

5-22

Basic Operation Chapter 5

5-6-5 Setting Frequency References by Pulse Train Input

By setting n004 for frequency reference selection to 5 for enabling the pulse train reference control terminal, frequency references can be executed by pulse train input through the PR terminal.

The following description provides information on the n149 parameter (pulse train input scale), which is used to execute frequency references by pulse train input.

Setting the Pulse Train Input Scale (n149)

•

Set this parameter to the pulse train input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse train input.

•

Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based on 10 Hz as 1. A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency.

n149 Pulse Train Input Scale No

Setting range

100 to 3,300

Register 0195 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 (10 Hz) Default setting 2,500

Note 1.

For example, to set the maximum frequency reference with pulse train frequency input at 10 kHz, set the parameter to 1,000 from the following formula.

10,000 (Hz)/10 (Hz) = 1,000

Note 2.

Input the pulse train into the frequency reference common (FC) and pulse train input (RP) terminals under the following conditions.

High level: 3.5 to 13.2 V

Low level: 0.8 V max.

The response frequency is within a range from 0 to 33 kHz (30% to 70% ED).

Setting the Pulse Train Frequency Reference Gain/Bias (n074/n075)

•

Set the input characteristics of pulse train input.

•

Gain: Set the gain in percentage based on the maximum frequency of the pulse train input scale in n149 as 100%.

•

Bias: Set the bias in percentage for frequency reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input based oh the maximum frequency as 100%.

n074 Pulse Train Frequency Reference

Gain

Setting range

0 to 255

Register 014A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Yes

100

5-23

Basic Operation n075

Pulse Train Frequency Reference

Bias

Setting range

–100 to 100

Frequency reference (Hz)

Register 014B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Chapter 5

Yes

Pulse train input frequency (Hz) n011: Maximum frequency

Pulse Train Frequency Reference Input Filter Constant (n076)

•

This parameter can be used to set a primary-delay digital filter for pulse train frequency reference input.

• This parameter setting is effective for smooth operation of the Inverter if the pulse train input signal changes too rapidly or the signal is interfered with by noise.

•

The larger the set value is, the lower the response will be.

n076

Pulse Train Frequency Reference

Input Filter Constant

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00

Register 014C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 s Default setting

0.10

5-24

Basic Operation

5-7 Setting the Acceleration/Deceleration Time

Chapter 5

The following description provides information on parameters related to acceleration and deceleration time settings.

Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available. Using the

S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping or starting.

Acceleration/Deceleration Time Unit (n018)

•

The acceleration and deceleration time of the Inverter can be set within a range from 0.0 to 6,000 s without changing the default setting. If a more precise unit of setting is required, this parameter can be set for 0.01-s increments. In this case, the setting range will be from 0.00 to 600.0 s.

n018

Setting range

Acceleration/Deceleration Time

Setting Unit

0, 1

Register 0112 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments

1,000 s or over: 1-s increments

Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments

100 s or over: 0.1-s increments

Description

Acceleration/Deceleration Time Setting (n019 to n022, n041 to n044)

•

Acceleration and deceleration each have four time settings available. They range from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency for acceleration and from 100 % to 0% of the maximum frequency for deceleration. Actual times are computed using the following formula.

• Acceleration/deceleration time = (Acceleration/deceleration time setting) x (Frequency reference) /

(Maximum frequency)

•

Select one of the following for acceleration or deceleration times 2 to 4 if either acceleration/deceleration time selection 1 (setting: 11) or acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (setting: 27) is set at any multi-function input from n050 to n056.

[Example: S5 (n054) is set to 11 and S6 (n055) is set to 27.]

Selection 2 (S6) Selection 1 (S5)

OFF OFF

OFF

Acceleration/deceleration time

Acceleration time 1 (n019), deceleration time 1 (n020)

Acceleration time 2 (n021), deceleration time 2 (n022)

Acceleration time 3 (n041), deceleration time 3 (n042)

ON ON Acceleration time 4 (n043), deceleration time 4 (n044)

•

The acceleration time and deceleration time change as shown in the following table, according to the

ON/OFF status of the input terminals that are set to acceleration/deceleration time selection 1 (setting:

11) and acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (setting: 27).

5-25

Basic Operation Chapter 5

•

If acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (setting: 27) is not set at any multi-function input from n050 to n056, the Inverter will determine that the acceleration/deceleration selection 2 is set to OFF, and select the acceleration/deceleration time.

In the same way, if acceleration/deceleration time selection 1 (setting: 11) is not set at any multi-function input, the Inverter will determine that the acceleration/deceleration selection 1 is set to OFF, and select the acceleration/deceleration time.

• Deceleration time 2 is used if emergency stop (setting: 19 to 22) is set at any multi-function input from n050 to n056 and if decelerate to a stop (setting: 0) is set at stopping mode selection n005.

n019 Acceleration Time 1 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 0113 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

n020

Deceleration Time 1 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 0114 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

n021

Acceleration Time 2 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 0115 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

n022 Deceleration Time 2 Yes

Setting range n041

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Acceleration Time 3

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 0116 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting

Register 0129 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting

10.0

Yes

10.0

n042 Deceleration Time 3 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 012A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

n043 Acceleration Time 4 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 012B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

n044 Deceleration Time 4 Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 6,000 (s) (See note 1.)

Register 012C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(See note

1.)

Default setting 10.0

5-26

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Note 1.

The setting unit of acceleration or deceleration time is determined by the set value in n018

(acceleration/deceleration time setting unit).

n018 set to 0 (0.1 s unit): Setting range from 0.0 to 6,000 s (0.0 to 999.9 s or 1,000 to 6,000 s) n018 set to 1 (0.01 s unit): Setting range from 0.00 to 600.0 s (0.0 to 99.99 s or 100.0 to

600.0 s)

Note 2.

When n018 is set to 1 (0.01 s unit), the default value of acceleration or deceleration time will be set to 10.00.

S-shape Acceleration/Deceleration Characteristic (n023)

•

Trapezoidal and S-shape acceleration and deceleration are available. Using the S-shape characteristic function for acceleration and deceleration can reduce shock to the machinery when stopping or starting.

• Any one of three S-shape acceleration/deceleration times (0.2, 0.5, and 1.0 s) is selectable.

n023

Setting range

S-shape Acceleration/Deceleration

Characteristic

0 to 3

Register 0117 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

No S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic (Trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 0.2 s

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 0.5 s

S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is 1.0 s

Note When the S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened according to the S-shape at the beginning and end of acceleration/deceleration.

5-27

Basic Operation

5-8 Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit

Chapter 5

This parameter is used to specify whether to enable or disable the reverse rotation command sent to the Inverter from the control circuit terminals or Digital Operator.

The parameter should be set to “not accept” when the Inverter is applied to systems that prohibit the reverse rotation of the Inverter.

Selecting the Reverse Rotation-prohibit (n006)

n006 Reverse Rotation-prohibit

Selection

Register 0106 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0, 1 Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Not accept

Description

5-28

Basic Operation

5-9 Selecting the Stopping Method

Chapter 5

This parameter is used to specify the stopping method when the STOP command is input.

The Inverter either decelerates or coasts to a stop according to the stopping method selection.

Selecting the Stopping Method (n005)

n005 Stopping Method Selection Register 0105 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0, 1 Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Frequency deceleration stop (See notes 1 and 2.)

Free running (coasts to stop) (See note 3.)

Note 1.

The Inverter will decelerate to stop according to the setting in n020 for deceleration time 1 if any of the n050 through n056 parameters for multi-function input is not set to 11 for acceleration/deceleration time selection. If any one of the n050 through n056 multi-function input parameters is set to acceleration/deceleration time selection, the Inverter will decelerate to stop according to the selected setting of deceleration time when the STOP command is input.

Note 2.

If the RUN signal is input again during a deceleration stop, deceleration will be stopped at the point of the input and operation will accelerate to the frequency reference.

Note 3.

Do not input a RUN signal for a free-running stop if the motor’s rotation speed is not sufficient slowed. If a RUN signal is input under these conditions, a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent (OC) will be detected. To restart a free running motor, set a speed search command in one of the multi-function inputs 1 to 7 (n50 to n56) and use the speed search to detect the speed of the free running motor, and then accelerate smoothly.

5-29

Basic Operation

5-10 Multi-function I/O

Chapter 5

5-10-1 Multi-function Input

The 3G3MV incorporates seven multi-function input terminals (S1 through S7). Inputs into these terminals have a variety of functions according to the application.

Multi-function Input (n050 through n056)

n050 Multi-function Input 1 (S1) Register 0132 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

1 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

1 n051

Setting range n052

Multi-function Input 2 (S2)

1 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0133 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Setting range n053

Multi-function Input 3 (S3)

0 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0134 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Setting range n054

Multi-function Input 4 (S4)

1 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0135 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Setting range n055

Multi-function Input 5 (S5)

1 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0136 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Setting range n056

Multi-function Input 6 (S6)

1 to 33 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0137 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Setting range

Multi-function Input 7 (S7)

1 to 35 (for 26, see note 1 and for 27, see note 2)

Register 0138 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Note 1.

Set value 26 is supported by 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Note 2.

Set value 27 is supported by Inverters up to 3.7-kW using software version 0024 or later and by 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters using software version 0104 or later.

5-30

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Set Values

Value

Function

Forward/Reverse rotation command

Description

3-wire sequence (to be set in n052 only)

By setting n052 to 0, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)

Forward/Stop

Reverse/Stop

External fault (NO)

External fault (NC)

Fault reset

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Multi-step speed reference 4

Inching frequency command

Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1

External base block command (NO)

External base block command (NC)

Search command

(Searching starts from maximum frequency)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command

(OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)

Forward rotation command in 2-wire sequence

Reverse rotation command (2-wire sequence)

ON: External fault (EF j detection: j is a terminal number)

OFF: External fault (EF j detection: j is a terminal number)

ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)

Signals to select frequency references 2 through 16.

Note Refer to 5-6-4 Setting the Frequency References through Key

Note

Sequences for the relationship between multi-step speed ref-

Any multi-step speed reference not set is regarded as turned-

ON: Inching frequency command (taking precedence over the multi-step speed reference)

Refer to the description for set value 27.

ON: Output turned OFF (while motor coasting to a stop and “bb” flashing)

OFF: Output turned OFF (with motor free running and “bb” flashing)

ON: Speed search (Searching starts from n011)

Search command

(Searching starts from preset frequency)

ON: Speed search

Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command

ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold (running at parameter frequency)

Local or remote selection ON: Local mode (operated with the Digital Operator)

Note After this setting is made, mode selection with the Digital Operator is not possible.

Communications/Remote selection

ON: RS-422/485 communications input is enabled.

Communications RUN command (0001 Hex) is enabled together with frequency reference (0002 Hex).

5-31

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Value

26 (See note.)

Function

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

Description

The Inverter stops according to the setting in n005 for interruption mode selection with the emergency stop input turned ON.

Emergency stop warning

(NC) n022. n005 set to 1: Coasts to a stop.

Note NO: Emergency stop with the contact closed.

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

Note Fault: Fault output is ON and reset with RESET input.

Warning: Warning output is ON and automatically restored

Emergency stop warning

(NC)

Note “STP” is displayed (lit with fault input ON and flashes with alarm input ON)

PID control cancel ON: PID control is disabled.

PID control set is disabled and the Inverter is in normal operation according to the n003 and n004 settings.

PID control integral reset ON: Integral value is reset (cleared).

The integral value as a result of PID operation is cleared when the

Inverter is in PID control. The input status of the Inverter continues with the integral function disabled.

PID control integral hold ON: Integral value is kept on hold (fixed).

The integral value as a result of PID operation is kept on hold with only the integral operation function disabled when the Inverter is in

PID control.

Inverter overheating warning oH3

ON: oH3 display (at the Operator); Inverter overheating warning output ON (multi-function output).

Operation continues during input. When the input turns OFF, the

Operator display and multi-function output are cleared.

Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2

Use for functions such as displaying the status of external thermal relays.

A pair of inputs is needed to select acceleration and deceleration times. If acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (setting: 27) is not set at any multi-function input from n050 to n056, the Inverter will determine that the acceleration/deceleration selection 2 is set to OFF, and select the acceleration/deceleration time.

In the same way, if acceleration/deceleration time selection 1

(setting: 11) is not set at any multi-function input, the Inverter will determine that the acceleration/deceleration selection 1 is set to

OFF, and select the acceleration/deceleration time.

Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2

Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1

Acceleration/deceleration time

OFF OFF Acceleration time 1 (n019), deceleration time 1 (n020)

OFF

Acceleration time 2 (n021), deceleration time 2 (n022)

Acceleration time 3 (n041), deceleration time 3 (n042)

ON ON Acceleration time 4 (n043), deceleration time 4 (n044)

5-32

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Value

Function Description

General -purpose input 1 p

General -purpose input 2 f ti t Th d h t t

General -purpose input 3

General -purpose input 4

General -purpose input 5 regardless of n050 to n056 settings.

General -purpose input 6

Multi-function input monitoring is a useful function for DeviceNet.

Up or down command Up or down command (set in n056 only)

By setting n056 to 0, the set value in n055 is ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S6: Up command S7: Down command

Self-diagnostic test

Acceleration Deceleration Hold Hold

S6 terminal

(Up command)

S7 terminal

(Down command)

OFF

Note It is impossible to set the up or down command and multi-step speed references 1 through 4 together.

Note To keep the frequency reference that has been adjusted with the Up or Down command after the Inverter is turned OFF, set n100 (Up/Down frequency memory) to 1.

ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test (set in n056 only)

The communications function is tested by connecting the transmission and reception terminals together and checking that the data received is the same as the transmission data.

Note Set value 26 is available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Operation in 2-wire Sequence (Set Value: 1, 2)

•

The Inverter operates in 2-wire sequence by setting a multi-function input selection to 1 (forward/reverse) or 2 (reverse/stop).

• The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 2-wire sequence.

Forward-rotation switch

Reverse-rotation switch

Forward/Stop

(Forward rotation with the forward-rotation switch closed)

Reverse/Stop

(Reverse rotation with the reverse-rotation switch closed)

Sequence input common j : 1 to 7

5-33

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Operation in 3-wire Sequence (n052 = 0)

•

The Inverter operates in 3-wire sequence by setting n052 for multi-function input 3 to 0.

•

Only n052 can be set to 0 (3-wire sequence). By making this setting, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings are forcibly made.

S1: RUN input (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input (STOP when OFF)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command (OFF: Forward; ON: Reverse)

• The following diagram shows a wiring example of the terminals in 3-wire sequence.

Stop switch

(NC)

RUN switch

(NO)

RUN input (Operates with the RUN switch closed)

Direction switch

Stop input (Stops with the stop switch opened)

Forward/Reverse rotation command (Forward with the Direction switch opened, Reverse with the Direction switch closed)

Sequence input common

Note Set parameter n052 (terminal S3) to 0 if a 3-wire sequence is set.

External Base Block Command (Set Value: 12, 13)

When an SPST-NO (set value: 12) or SPST-NC (set value: 13) input is received, Inverter outputs are shut OFF. Use these inputs in the following cases to stop Inverter outputs.

•

For switching the motor to free running status when applying an external brake.

•

For stopping Inverter outputs before disconnecting motor wiring when changing the motor from an

Inverter to a commercial power supply.

Note The external base block only shuts Off the Inverter’s output frequency, and the Inverter’s internal frequency continues to be calculated as usual. Therefore, if the external base block is cleared when the frequency is not zero, the frequency calculated at that point will be output. Because of this, if the baseblock is cleared during deceleration while the motor is free running, a large discrepancy between the motor speed at that moment and the Inverter output frequency may result in a main circuit overvoltage (OV) or overcurrent (OC).

5-34

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Speed Search (Set Value: 14, 15)

•

The speed search function is provided for smooth restarting without stopping a free running motor.

Use it when switching the motor from a commercial power supply operation to Inverter operation, when starting with the Inverter a motor turned by external force, and so on.

•

The speed search function searches for the present motor frequency, from high frequency to low.

When the motor’s rotation speed is detected, it is accelerated from that frequency to the frequency reference according to the acceleration/deceleration time setting.

Forward (reverse) RUN command

Speed search command

0.5 s min.

High-speed frequency or set frequency (frequency reference) n101: Deceleration time n102: Speed search operating level

Minimum base block time (0.5 s) Speed search operation

Note For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only, the speed search function can be adjusted by setting parameters n101 (speed search deceleration time) and n102 (speed search operating level). If the speed search cannot be executed properly using the default setting, lengthen the deceleration time or lower the operating level. To reduce the speed search time, check with the application while either shortening the deceleration time or raising the operating level.

n101 No

Setting range n102

Speed Search Deceleration Time Register 0165 Hex Changes during operation

0.0 to 10.0

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

Speed Search Operating Level

2.0

Setting range

0 to 200

Register 0166 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 % Default setting 150

5-35

Basic Operation Chapter 5

•

For n101, set the origin search deceleration time to the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.

•

If 0 is set for the origin search deceleration time, operation will be carried out at the default setting of 2.0

seconds.

•

For n102, set the operating level as a percentage, with the Inverter’s rated input taken as 100%. If the

Inverter’s output current drops below the level of the Inverter’s output current, the speed search will be completed and acceleration will be resumed.

5-10-2 Multi-function Output

The 3G3MV incorporates four multi-function output terminals: two multi-function contact outputs (MA and MB) and two multi-function photocoupler outputs (P1 and P2).

Output from these terminals has a variety of functions according to the application.

Selecting the Multi-function Output (n050 through n056)

n057 Multi-function Output 1 (MA/MB and MC)

Register 0139 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0 to 7, 10 to 21 (See note.) Unit of setting

1 Default setting n058

Setting range n059

Setting range

Multi-function Output 2 (P1 and

PC)

0 to 7, 10 to 21 (see note.)

Multi-function Output 3 (P2 and

PC)

0 to 7, 10 to 21 (See note.)

Register 013A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 013B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Note Set values 20 and 21 are available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Set Values

Value Function

Fault output

Operation in progress

Frequency agree

Idling

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2

Overtorque being monitored (NO-contact output)

7 Overtorque being monitored (NC-contact output)

Description

ON: Fault output (with protective function working)

ON: During RUN (with RUN command input or inverter output)

ON: Frequency agree (output frequency agrees with frequency reference)

ON: Zero speed (at less than min. output frequency)

ON: Output frequency y frequency detection level (n095)

ON: Output frequency x

frequency detection level (n095)

Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

•

Overtorque detection function selection 1 (n096)

•

Overtorque detection function selection 2 (n097)

• O t d t ti l l ( 098)

• Overtorque detection time (n099)

Note NO contact: ON with overtorque being detected; NC contact:

OFF with overtorque being detected

5-36

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Value

20 (See note 2.)

21 (See note 2.)

Undertorque being monitored (NO-contact output)

Function

Undertorque being monitored (NC-contact output)

Description

Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

•

Undertorque detection function selection (n117)

• Undertorque detection level (n118)

• O t d t ti f ti l ti 2 ( 097)

•

Undertorque detection time (n119)

Note NO contact: ON with undertorque being detected, NC contact:

OFF with undertorque being detected

Warning output

Base block in progress

RUN mode

Inverter ready

ON: Warning being detected (Nonfatal error being detected)

ON: Base block in progress (in operation with output turned OFF)

ON: Local mode (with the Digital Operator)

ON: Inverter ready to operate (with no fault detected)

Fault retry

UV in progress

ON: Fault retry (Inverter resetting with fault retry (n082) not set to 0)

ON: Undervoltage being monitored (main circuit undervoltage UV1 detected)

ON: Rotating in reverse direction Rotating in reverse direction

Speed search in progress ON: Speed search in progress

Communications output

PID feedback loss

ON: Communications output (turns ON/OFF according to 0009 Hex set from communications. Communications setting = ON)

ON: PID feedback being lost (set detection method in n136, n137, n138)

Frequency reference loss ON: Frequency reference lost. (When the frequency reference loss detection (n064) is enabled, and the frequency reference selection

(n004) is set for analog input or pulse train input.)

Inverter overheating warning oH3

ON: Inverter overheating warning

ON while the Inverter overheating warning signal is being input

(while oH3 is flashing).

Note 1.

Use “during RUN” (set value: 1) or “zero speed“ (set value: 3) for the timing for stopping the motor using a brake. To specify a precise stop timing, set “frequency detection 1” (set value: 4) or “frequency detection 2” (set value: 5), and set the frequency detection level (n095).

Note 2.

Set values 20 (frequency reference loss) and 21 (Inverter overheating warning oH3) are available for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

5-37

Basic Operation Chapter 5

5-11 Multi-function Analog Output and Pulse Monitor Output

The 3G3MV Inverter incorporates multi-function analog output terminals (AM and AC).

A parameter setting makes it possible to output pulse monitor signals from these terminals. Make the necessary settings in these terminals according to the application.

5-11-1 Setting the Multi-function Analog Output (n065 through n067)

•

By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 0 for analog voltage output, analog monitoring is possible through the multi-function analog output terminals.

•

A monitoring item is set in n066 (multi-function analog output selection). Six items including the output frequency and current are available.

•

Set the analog output characteristics in n067 (multi-function analog output gain).

n065

Setting range

Multi-function Analog Output Type

Selection

0, 1

Register 0141 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)

Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150) n066 Multi-function Analog Output

Setting range

0 to 5

Register 0142 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Output frequency (Reference: 10-V output at max. frequency)

Output current (Reference: 10-V output at rated output current)

Main circuit DC voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 400 V DC for 200-V models and 800 V

DC for 400-V models)

Vector operation torque monitor (Reference: 10-V output at rated motor torque)

Output power (Reference: 10-V output at power equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity and 0-V output during regenerative operation).

Output voltage (Reference: 10-V output at 200 V AC for 200-V models and 400 V AC for

400-V models)

Note Output power cannot be monitored in vector control mode.

n067

Multi-function Analog Output Gain Register 0143 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0.00 to 2.00

Unit of setting

0.01

Default setting

Yes

1.00

5-38

Basic Operation Chapter 5

Note 1.

Refer to the above information on the set values in n066 and set the multiplication rate based on the reference value. For example, if 5-V output is desired at maximum output frequency

(with n066 set to 0), set n067 to 0.50.

Note 2.

The multi-function analog output terminals (AM and AC) have a maximum output of 10 V.

5-11-2 Setting the Pulse Monitor Output (n065 and n150)

•

By setting n065 for multi-function analog output type selection to 1 for pulse train output, monitoring pulse output frequency signals is possible through the multi-function analog output terminals.

•

The relationship between the output frequency and pulse train output frequency is set in n150 for multi-function analog output, pulse train frequency selection.

n065 No

Setting range

Multi-function Analog Output Type

Selection

0, 1

Register 0141 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

Analog voltage output (with monitoring item set in n066)

Pulse train output (according to output frequency set in n150) n150

Setting range

Multi-function Analog Output,

Pulse Train Frequency Selection

0, 1, 6, 12, 24, and 36

Register 0197 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

1,440 Hz at max. frequency (A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency)

1x output frequency

6x output frequency

12x output frequency

24x output frequency

36x output frequency

Note The pulse train voltage is 10 V at high level and 0 V at low level at a duty rate of 50%.

5-39

Chapter 6 Advanced Operation

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and

Adjustments

6-2 Energy-saving Control

6-3 PID Control

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

6-6 Stall Prevention Function

6-7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

6-10 Other Functions

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

This chapter provides information on the use of advanced functions of the Inverter for operation.

Refer to this chapter to use the various advanced functions, such as precise vector control setting, energy-saving control, PID control, carrier frequency setting, DC injection braking, stall prevention, overtorque detection, torque compensation, and slip compensation.

6-1 Precise Vector Control Settings and Adjustments

6-1-1 Precise Vector Control Settings

•

In addition to the settings described in 5-2 Operation in Vector Control , check the motor test report and precise motor constants and make the following settings in order to make full use of the Inverter in vector control.

Setting the Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance (n107)

•

Set this parameter to 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance or phase-to-neutral resistance of the motor at 50 ° C.

•

Obtain from the manufacturer of each motor the test report of the motor or equivalent datasheet including precise specifications of the motor. Use the the applicable formula from those listed in the following and calculate the phase-to-neutral resistance at 50

C from the insulation class and phaseto-phase resistance of the motor described in the test report.

Insulation class E: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75

C (

Ω

) x 0.92 x 1/2

Insulation class B: Phase-to-phase resistance at 75

C (

Ω

) x 0.92 x 1/2

Insulation class F: Phase-to-phase resistance at 115

C (

Ω

) x 0.87 x 1/2 n107 Motor Phase-to-neutral Resistance Register 016B Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0.000 to 65.50 ( Ω ) Unit of setting

See note 1 Default setting

See note

Note 1.

The value will be set in 0.001-

Ω

increments if the resistance is less than 10

Ω

and 0.01-

Ω increments if the resistance is 10

Ω

or over.

Note 2.

The default setting for this parameter is the standard phase-to-neutral resistance of the maximum applicable motor.

Setting the Motor Leakage Inductance (n108)

• Set the motor leakage inductance in 1-mH increments.

•

Motor leakage inductance is a magnetic field that is leaking externally or consumed as core loss, and is not used for torque generation.

•

To insert an AC reactor for surge suppression into the output side of the Inverter, set this parameter to the motor leakage inductance added with the inductance of the AC reactor.

•

The Inverter fully functions in vector control with the default setting for motor leakage inductance.

Therefore, set this parameter only if the motor leakage inductance is known.

n108

Motor Leakage Inductance No

Setting range

0.000 to 655.0 (mH)

Register 016C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

See note 1 Default setting See note

6-2

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Note 1.

The value will be set in 0.01-mH increments if the resistance is less than 100 mH and 0.1-mH increments if the resistance is 100 mH or over.

Note 2.

The default setting for this parameter is the standard leakage inductance of the maximum applicable motor.

6-1-2 Adjusting Output Torque in Vector Control

•

The Inverter controls the output torque of the motor according to the required load torque in vector control. Normally, no special adjustments are required. Adjust the output torque if the maximum torque of the motor is unavailable or improvements are required in the output torque and response in a low-speed range.

Adjusting the Torque Compensation Limit (n109)

•

Adjust the set value in n109 (torque compensation limit) if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient or to limit the output torque to a certain degree while the motor is driven by the Inverter in vector control.

•

Set the torque compensation limit in percentage based on the rated output current of the Inverter as

100%.

Compensating Torque Insufficiency

•

Set n109 to a larger value if the maximum torque of the motor is insufficient.

•

Set the value in 5% increments while checking the operation of the Inverter and motor.

•

Check that no overload (OL1 or OL2) is detected. If an overload is detected, decrease the set values or consider the use of an Inverter model or motor with a higher capacity.

Limiting Output Torque

• Set n109 to a smaller value if the fluctuation of the output torque is large and heavy shock is imposed on the load, or excessive output torque is not required.

•

Set the value according to the condition of the load.

n109 Torque Compensation Limit No

Setting range

0 to 250 (%)

Register 016D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 150

Note 1.

The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5 times larger than the set value.

Note 2.

This parameter is enabled only when the Inverter is in vector control.

Adjusting the Torque and Response through the V/f Pattern (n011 through n017)

•

The Inverter in vector control uses the V/f pattern as the reference value of the output voltage. Therefore, by adjusting the V/f pattern the output torque and response are adjusted.

•

If the application requires high torque, adjust the V/f pattern so that the output voltage at the required frequency will be high. Furthermore, energy-saving effects can be expected by decreasing the output voltage values in the frequency ranges where high torque is not required.

n011

Maximum Frequency (FMAX) No

Setting range

50.0 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 010B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting 60.0

6-3

Advanced Operation n012

Setting range n013

Maximum Voltage (VMAX)

0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V)

Register 010C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting

Setting range n014

Maximum Voltage Frequency (FA) Register 010D Hex Changes during operation

0.2 to 400.0 (Hz) Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Setting range n015

Middle Output Frequency (FB)

0.1 to 399.9 (Hz)

Register 010E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Setting range

Middle Output Frequency Voltage

(VC)

0.1 to 255.0 (0.1 to 510.0) (V)

Register 010F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting n016 Minimum Output Frequency

(FMIN)

0.1 to 10.0 (Hz) Setting range n017 Minimum Output Frequency

Voltage (VMIN)

Setting range

0.1 to 50.0 (0.1 to 100.0) (V)

Register 0110 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Register 0111 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 V Default setting

Note Figures in brackets are for 400-V Inverter models.

Chapter 6

200.0

(400.0)

60.0

1.5

11.0

(22.0)

1.5

4.3 (8.6)

Output voltage (V)

Note 1.

Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 x n014 < n013 x n011

Note 2.

The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and n014 are the same in value.

Frequency (Hz)

•

6-4

Advanced Operation

6-2 Energy-saving Control

Chapter 6

The energy-saving control function automatically saves unnecessary power that is uselessly consumed while the load is light.

The Inverter in energy-saving control estimates the capacity of the load from the motor current and controls the output voltage of the Inverter when the load is light so that only the power required is provided to the motor.

Energy-saving control is suitable for loads with little fluctuation. It is not suitable for control where responses of less than 50 ms are required.

The longer the operation time of the Inverter in energy-saving control of a light load is, the more energy is saved. If the load exceeds 70% of the rated motor torque, only some energy may be saved.

This control is available to general-purpose motor and Inverter-dedicated motors but not applicable to special motors such as spindle motors or underwater motors.

Energy-saving control is possible in V/f control mode only and does not operate in vector control mode.

The following description provides details of the operation and adjustment of the Inverter in energy-saving control.

6-2-1 Energy-saving Control Operation

•

The Inverter operates in energy-saving control as described below.

Acceleration

The Inverter accelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.

Constant Speed

1. When the Inverter reaches the reference frequency, the Inverter operates in energy-saving control.

2. An ideal output voltage is calculated from the internal status of the Inverter and energy-saving control coefficient K2 in n140.

3. The Inverter changes the output voltage to the calculated voltage.

4. The Inverter goes into probe operation to find the point where output power is at the minimum.

Probe operation: A control method to find the point where the power is at the minimum while changing the voltage according to the probe operation control voltage step set in n145 and n146.

6-5

Advanced Operation

Deceleration

The Inverter decelerates normally and is not in energy-saving control.

Power consumption

Load rate: 100%

Chapter 6

As shown in the graph, the voltage to operate the motor most efficiently varies with the motor load condition. The Inverter in energy-saving control adjusts the output voltage by using the ideal calculated value so that the actual output power will be minimum.

Load rate: 50%

Motor voltage

6-2-2 Performing Energy-saving Settings n139

Setting range

Energy-saving Control Selection Register 018B Hex Changes during operation

0, 1 Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Energy-saving control disabled

Energy-saving control enabled

Description

Note 1.

Set n139 to 1 to enable energy-saving control.

Note 2.

Energy-saving control is enabled within a frequency range from 15 to 120 Hz and disabled if the frequency exceeds 120 Hz.

n158 Motor Code No

Setting range

0 to 70

Register 019E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting See note

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Set Values

•

The motor code is used for automatically setting the energy-saving constant in n140.

•

By setting the motor code, the value in n140 (energy-saving control coefficient K2) will change automatically. To adjust energy-saving control coefficient K2, set the motor code in advance.

•

Select the motor code from the following table based on the power supply voltage of the Inverter and the capacity of the motor.

6-6

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Motor code Power supply voltage

200 V AC

40 V AC

Motor capacity

0.1 kW

0.2 kW

0.4 kW

0.75 kW

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

3.0 kW

3.7 kW

4.0 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

0.1 kW

0.2 kW

0.4 kW

0.75 kW

1.5 kW

2.2 kW

3.0 kW

3.7 kW

4.0 kW

5.5 kW

7.5 kW

338.8

313.6

245.8

189.5

145.4

156.8

122.9

94.8

72.7

963.5

713.8

576.4

447.4

Energy-saving control coefficient K2 (n140)

481.7

356.9

288.2

223.7

169.4

n140

Setting range

Energy-saving Control Coefficient

0.0 to 6,550

Register 018C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting

See note

Note 1.

The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Note 2.

The constant automatically changes according to the motor code in n158. For the fine-tuning of this parameter, set the motor code in advance.

Set Values

•

Motor constants vary with the motor manufacturer. Therefore, the fine-tuning of the parameter is required to find the ideal value. Fine-tune the parameter while the Inverter is operating at constant frequency so that the output power will be minimum.

n143

Power Averaging Time No

Setting range

1 to 200

Register 018F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 (24 ms) Default setting 1

6-7

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

•

Set n143 to the time required to calculate the average of power used in energy-saving control.

Power averaging time (ms) = Set value in n143 x 24 (ms)

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

The Inverter averages the power for the set time for energy-saving control.

•

The value set in n143 is used for probe operation. The Inverter in probe operation changes the voltage at intervals set in this parameter.

•

Increase the set value if the power fluctuates frequently and the Inverter cannot perform stable energy control.

n141

Setting range

Energy-saving Voltage Lower

Limit at 60-Hz Output

0 to 120 (%)

Register 018D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

50 n142

Setting range

Energy-saving Voltage Lower

Limit at 6-Hz Output

0 to 25 (%)

Register 018E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Set Values

•

When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter is set to the primary level of energy-saving control by n140. Parameter n141 and parameter n142 prevent the output voltage of the Inverter from dropping excessively so that the motor will not stall or stop at that time.

•

Set the lower limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

•

Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed. If the motor stalls or stops because the internal constants of the motor are special, increase the set values by approximately 5% to 10%.

Output voltage lower limit (%)

Output frequency (Hz) n159

Setting range n160

Setting range

Energy-saving Voltage Upper

Limit at 60-Hz Output

0 to 120 (%)

Energy-saving Upper Limit

Voltage at 6-Hz Output

0 to 25 (%)

6-8

Register 019F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Register 01A0 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

120

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

•

These parameters prevent the motor from over excitation due to voltage changes during energy-saving control.

•

Set the upper limit of output voltage in percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

•

Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

Output voltage upper limit (%)

Output frequency (Hz) n144

Setting range

Probe Operation Voltage Limit

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0190 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Set Values

•

When the output frequency is constant for a certain period while the Inverter is in effective energy-saving control, the Inverter will be set to the primary level of energy-saving control by n140 (energy-saving constant K2). Then the Inverter will be set to the secondary level (i.e., probe operation) for more efficient, energy-saving control. Set the control voltage range of the Inverter in probe operation in parameter n144.

•

Set the upper limit of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as

100%. Normally set the value to approximately 10%.

•

No probe operation will be available if the value is set to 0.

n145

Setting range

Probe Operation Control Voltage

Step at 100%

0.1 to 10.0 (%)

Register 0191 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1% Default setting

0.5

n146

Setting range

Probe Operation Control Voltage

Step at 5%

0.1 to 10.0 (%)

Register 0192 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1% Default setting

0.2

6-9

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

•

Set the range of probe operation voltage in percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

If the fluctuation of speed in probe operation is large, decrease the set value. If the response of the

Inverter in probe operation is slow, increase the set value.

Control voltage step (%)

Inverter output voltage (%) n161

Setting range

Power Detection Width for Probe

Operation Switching

0 to 100 (%)

Register 01A1 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Set Values

•

Set this parameter to the detection width of power that sets the Inverter to probe operation. When the fluctuation of power is within the detection width, the Inverter will be in probe operation.

• Set the width in percentage based on the power to be detected as 100%.

• Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

• The Inverter will operate with a power detection width of 10% if the value is set to 0.

n162 Power Detection Filter Constant No

Setting range

0 to 255

Register 01A2 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 (4 ms) Default setting 5

Set Values

•

Set this parameter to the filter time constant of the power detection block of the Inverter operating in probe operation.

Filter time constant (ms) = Set value in n162 x 4 (ms)

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

• The Inverter will operate with a time constant of 20 ms if the value is set to 0.

6-10

Advanced Operation

6-3 PID Control

Chapter 6

The PID control function is a control system that matches a feedback value (i.e., a detected value) to the set target value.

Proportional control, integral control, and derivative control in combination are available to machinery systems involving redundancy time in control operation. The PID control function of the 3G3MV Inverter is not suitable to the control of systems that require a response of 50 ms or quicker, however.

The following description provides the applications and operation of PID control together with required parameter settings and adjustments.

6-3-1 PID Control Applications

• The following table provides application examples of the Inverter in PID control.

Application

Speed control

Pressure control

Flow rate control

Temperature control

Control

The speed data of the machinery system is fed back so that the operating speed of the machinery system will coincide with the target value.

The speed data of another machinery system is input as a target value and the actual operating speed of the machinery is fed back for synchronous control.

Data on pressure is fed back for constant pressure control.

Data on the flow rate of liquid is fed back for precise flow control.

Data on temperature is fed back for temperature control using fan operation.

Sensor used (example)

Tachogenerator

Pressure sensor

Flow sensor

Thermocouple

Thermistor

6-11

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-3-2 PID Control Operation

•

To simply explain the operation of proportional control, integral control, and derivative control, the following graph is used to show that the output frequency changes while the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is constant.

Deviation

Time

Control value

PID control

Integral

(I) control Derivative

(D) control

Proportional (P) control

Time

•

Proportional (P) Control : The output is in proportion to the deviation. The deviation cannot be set to 0 with proportional control only.

•

Integral (I) Control : The output is the integral value of the deviation. This control method makes the feedback value coincide with the target value effectively but cannot catch up with a rapid change in deviation.

•

Derivative (D) Control : The output is the derivative value of the deviation. This control method quickly responds to a rapid change in deviation.

• PID Control : By combining the merits of the above control functions, ideal control is possible.

6-3-3 Types of PID Control

•

Two types of PID control are available to the 3G3MV Inverter. Normally, measured-value derivative

PID control is used.

• Measured-value Derivative PID Control

In this control, the feedback derivative value is used. The Inverter normally uses this control method.

The response will be comparatively slow if the target value changes because the feedback derivative value is used. The stable control of the target is, however, possible.

Target value

Target of control

Detected value (Feedback value)

6-12

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

Basic PID Control

This is the basic control method. The response will be quick if the target value changes because the deviation derivative value is used. If the target value changes rapidly, however, the control value of the derivative control block will be large. As a result, overshooting or undershooting may result.

Target value

Target of control

Detected value (Feedback value)

• Furthermore, 3G3MV Inverter can add the frequency reference to the operation result of the PID control block.

If the target of control is motor speed, by adding the frequency reference, motor speed control with high-speed response will be possible.

Do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.

6-13

Advanced Operation

6-3-4 Block Diagram of PID Control

•

The following diagram shows the PID control block of the 3G3MV Inverter.

Chapter 6

Target value

Proportional (P) gain

Integral time (I)

Integral (I) upper limit

Multi-function input

Integral hold input

Limit

Max. frequency: 100%

PID primary delay time

0 (zero)

Multi-function input

Integral reset input

Derivative time (D)

Integral hold value

0 (zero)

Feedback value adjustment gain

Feedback value

Limit

Derivative time (D)

PID offset adjustment

PID output gain

Limit

Max. frequency: 100%

Limit

PID control selection

Inverter output frequency

6-14

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-3-5 Input Selection of PID Control Target Value and Detection

Value

•

The target value and detected value (feedback value) of PID control are set according to n004 for frequency reference selection, n008 for local mode frequency reference selection, and n164 PID feedback input block selection as shown in the following diagram.

Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other. Setting details are provided from the next page onward.

Input Selection of PID Control Target Value

Local/Remote

FREQUENCY adjuster of the

Digital Operator

Frequency reference 1 (n024)

External terminal (0 to 10 V)

External terminal (4 to 20 mA)

External terminal (0 to 20 mA)

Pulse train input

Communications frequency reference

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)

Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)

Frequency reference 2 (n025)

Frequency reference 3 (n026)

Frequency reference 4 (n027)

Frequency reference 16 (n127)

Inching frequency (n032)

Multi-step speed reference

FREQUENCY adjuster of the

Digital Operator

Frequency reference 1 (n024)

Target value

Input Selection of PID Control Detection Value

External terminal (0 to 10 V)

External terminal (4 to 20 mA)

External terminal (0 to 20 mA)

Multi-function analog input (0 to 10 V)

Multi-function analog input (4 to 20 mA)

Pulse train input

Feedback value

6-15

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-3-6 PID Control Settings n128

Setting range

PID Control Selection

0 to 8

Register 0180 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

PID control

Disabled

Enabled

Description

---

Derivative control method

Deviation integrated No

Feedback value integrated No

Addition of frequency reference

---

Deviation integrated Yes

Feedback value integrated Yes

Deviation integrated No

Feedback value integrated No

Deviation integrated Yes

Feedback value integrated Yes

Positive or negative characteristics

---

Positive

Negative

Note 1.

Normally select feedback-value integral PID control as the derivative control method.

Note 2.

Add the frequency reference if the target of control is motor speed and do not add the frequency reference if the target of control is temperature or pressure.

Note 3.

Set positive or negative characteristics according to the characteristics of the detector. If the feedback value is decreased with the output frequency increased, set negative characteristics.

Note 4.

Set PID control in n128 (PID Control Selection) only after returning n077 to 0. An error will occur and it will not be possible to change n128 if n077 is set to other than 0 (disable).

n129 Yes

Setting range

Feedback Value Adjustment Gain Register 0181 Hex Changes during operation

0.00 to 10.00

Unit of setting

0.01

Default setting 1.00

Set Values

•

Set the multiplication rate of the feedback value.

•

This parameter adjusts the feedback value so that the input level of the input device, such as a sensor, will coincide with the input level of the target value.

For example, if the target value of 1,000 rpm is input as 10 V and the feedback value at 1,000 rpm is

5 V, the feedback value will be doubled.

n130 Proportional (P) Gain Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 25.0

Register 0182 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting 1.0

n131

Integral (I) Time Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 360.0 (s)

Register 0182 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting 1.0

6-16

Advanced Operation Chapter 6 n132

Setting range

Derivative (D) Time

0.0 to 2.50 (s)

Register 0182 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 s Default setting

Yes

0.00

Set Values

•

While the mechanical load is in actual operation, adjust the values so that the best response will be returned from the load. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments .

•

If n130 (proportional gain) is set to 0.0, PID control will be disabled. Not only proportional control but also all PID control will be disabled.

•

If n131 (integral time) is set to 0.0, integral control will be disabled.

•

If n132 (derivative time) is set to 0.0, derivative control will be disabled.

n133

PID Offset Adjustment Yes

Setting range

–100 to 100 (%)

Register 0185 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 0

Set Values

•

This parameter is for the offset adjustment of all PID control.

•

Adjust the parameter so that the output frequency of the Inverter will be 0 when the target value and feedback value are both set to 0.

n134

Integral (I) Upper Limit Yes

Setting range

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0186 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 100

Set Values

•

Set this parameter to the upper limit of integral control output.

•

Set the value in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

• The integral upper limit is set so that the output frequency will not be excessively high when the deviation is large.

n135 PID Primary Delay Time Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 10.0 (s)

Register 0187 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting 0.0

Set Values

•

Set this parameter to the primary delay time constant for the frequency reference after PID control.

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

If load is a mechanical one with high viscous friction or low rigidity, the load may resonate. If that happens, set a value larger than the resonant frequency of the load so that the load will not resonate, even though the response will be slower.

n136

Setting range

Feedback Loss Detection

Selection

0 to 2

Register 0188 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

6-17

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

Value

Description

Feedback loss detection disabled

Feedback loss detection enabled (Nonfatal error: FbL warning)

Feedback loss detection enabled (Fatal error: FbL error)

Note 1.

Set the method of detecting loss of the feedback as a detected value for PID control.

Note 2.

If the detection level set in n137 or lower is detected for the set time in n138, the result will be determined as feedback loss.

n137 Feedback Loss Detection Level No

Setting range n138

0 to 100 (%)

Feedback Loss Detection Time

Register 0189 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 0

Setting range

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 018A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting 1.0

Set Values

• These parameters are reference values for detecting loss of feedback for PID control.

• Set n137 to the feedback level in percentage based on the feedback level at maximum frequency as

100%.

•

Set n138 in 0.1-s increments for the permissible continuous period of t he feedback signal level that is the same as or less than the feedback level set in n137.

n163 PID Output Gain No

Setting range

0.0 to 25.0

Register 01A3 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting 1.0

Set Values

•

Set this parameter to a rate by which PID control value is multiplied for PID control.

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

This parameter is used for the adjustment of the PID control value to be added with the frequency reference.

n164

Setting range

PID Feedback Input Block

Selection

0 to 5

Register 01A4 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled. (See note 1.)

Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled. (See note 2.)

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled. (See note 2.)

Multi-function analog voltage (0- to 10-V) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current (4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled. (See note 3.)

6-18

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Note 1.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 10-V input.

Note 2.

The maximum frequency (FMAX) is reached with 20-mA input. The SW2 on the control PCB must be switches from V to I.

Note 3.

Set n149 for the pulse train input scale to the pulse train frequency that is equivalent to the maximum frequency (FMAX).

Note 4.

Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other.

6-3-7 PID Adjustments

PID Adjustments with Step Response Method

•

The following describes how to adjust each parameter of PID control by monitoring the step response of the target of control.

Measurement of Step Response Waveform

Take the following steps to measure the step response waveform of the target of control.

a) Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.

b) Set n128 to 0 so that the Inverter will not perform PID control.

c) Minimize the acceleration time and input the step frequency reference.

d) Measure the response waveform of the feedback.

Note Measure the response waveform so that the timing of the step input will be known.

Calculation of PID Parameters

S Draw a tangent line that comes into contact with the steepest inclination point of the response waveform.

Measurement of R

Measure the gradient of the tangent line provided that the set point is 1.

Measurement of L

Measure the required time (seconds) between the origin and the point of intersection of the tangent line and time axis.

6-19

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Measurement of T

Measure the required time (seconds) between the point of intersection of the tangent line and time axis and the point of intersection of the tangent line and set point line.

Response

Target value

Time

PID Parameter

The following PID parameters are calculated from the R, L, and T of intersection of the tangent line and set point line as general rules.

Control Integral (I) time (n131) Derivative (D) time (n132)

P control

PI control

PID control

Proportional (P) gain

(n130)

0.3/RL

0.35/RL

0.6/RL

---

1.2T

---

0.5L

Note 1.

Obtain PID parameter values from the above method, set the PID parameters, and tune in the

PID parameter values precisely.

Note 2.

PID parameter values obtained from the above method may not be optimum if the friction factor of the mechanical system is large or the rigidity of the mechanical system is low.

Manual PID Adjustments

• Perform the following procedure to adjust the PID parameter values of the Inverter performing PID control by monitoring the response waveform.

1. Connect the load in the same way as the connection of the load to the Inverter in normal operation.

2. Set n128 so that the Inverter will perform PID control.

3. Increase the proportional (P) gain in n130 within a range causing no vibration.

4. Increase the integral (I) time in n131 within a range causing no vibration.

5. Increase the derivative (D) time in n132 within a range causing no vibration.

6-20

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-3-8 PID Fine Tuning

•

Refer to the following to tune in PID parameters exactly.

•

Suppression of Overshooting

Set the derivative (D) time to a smaller value and the integral (I) time to a larger value if overshooting results.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

•

Prompt Stability

Set the integral (I) time to a smaller value and the derivative (D) time to a large value for prompt stability control, even though overshooting results.

Response

After fine tuning

Before fine tuning

Time

•

Suppression of Long-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength longer than the integral (I) time results from excessive integral control.

The vibration can be suppressed by setting the integral (I) time to a larger value.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

6-21

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

Suppression of Short-cycle Vibration

Vibration with a wavelength almost as long as the differential time results from excessive derivative

(D) control. The vibration can be suppressed by setting the derivative (D) time to a smaller value.

If the vibration cannot be suppressed after the differential time is set to 0.00, set the proportional gain to a smaller value or the PID primary delay time constant to a larger value.

Response

Before fine tuning

After fine tuning

Time

6-22

Advanced Operation

6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency

Chapter 6

The carrier frequency of the 3G3MV can be fixed or varied in proportion to the output frequency.

n080

Setting range

Carrier Frequency Selection

1 to 4, 7 to 9

Register 0150 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

(See note.)

Set Values

Value Description

2.5 kHz

5.0 kHz

7.5 kHz

10.0 kHz

2.5 kHz (12

): 12 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

2.5 kHz (24

): 24 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

2.5 kHz (36

): 36 times as high as output frequency (from 1.0 to 2.5 kHz)

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

Change the default setting in the following cases.

The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:

Set the Inverter to a lower carrier frequency.

Reference carrier frequency: Wiring distance ≤ 50 m:

50 m < Wiring distance

≤

100 m:

Wiring distance > 100 m:

10 kHz

5 kHz

2.5 kHz

Note The carrier frequency changes as shown in the following graph with 7 through 9 set in n46.

Carrier Frequency (n080: 7 through 9)

Carrier

Frequency

83.3 Hz (Set value: 7)

41.6 Hz (Set value: 8)

27.7 Hz (Set value: 9)

208.3 Hz (Set value: 7)

104.1 Hz (Set value: 8)

69.4 Hz (Set value: 9)

Output frequency

6-23

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

The Inverter cannot maintain rated output current with the carrier frequency set to a value higher than the default one.

The following table shows the default settings and the reduced rated output currents resulting from a higher setting for the carrier frequency for each Inverter model.

When the carrier frequency is set to a higher value than the default setting, use the Inverter at a current less than the reduced rated output current.

Voltage Model 3G3MVDefault setting Rated output current (A)

AB002

AB004

AB007

AB015

AB022

AB037

A4002

A4004

A4007

A4015

A2001

A2002

A2004

A2007

A2015

A2022

A2037

A2055

A2075

AB001

A4022

A4030

A4037

A4055

A4075

4 (10 kHz)

3 (7.5 kHz)

4 (10 kHz)

3 (7.5 kHz)

0.8

1.6

3.0

5.0

8.0

11.0

17.5

25.0

33.0

0.8

1.6

3.0

5.0

8.0

11.0

17.5

1.2

1.8

3.4

4.8

5.5

7.2

8.6

14.8

18.0

←

Set to 3

Reduced rated output current

(A)

10.0

16.5

1.0

1.6

3.0

4.0

23.0

30.0

←

7.0

←

7.0

Set to 4

Reduced rated output current

(A)

10.0

16.5

4.8

6.3

8.1

14.8 (See note.)

17.0

Note The rated output current can be output without reduction.

n175 Low Carrier Frequency at Low

Speed

Setting range

0, 1

Register 01AF Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

(See note.)

Note For 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters, the default setting is “1” (enable).

6-24

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

Value Description

Low carrier frequency at low speed disabled.

Low carrier frequency at low speed enabled.

•

Normally set n175 to 0 (except for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters).

•

When the output frequency is 5 Hz or less and the output current rate is 110% or more, the carrier frequency will be automatically reduced to 2.5 kHz with n175 set to 1. If the load is heavy at low speed, the Inverter will withstand higher overcurrent by suppressing the heat radiation of the Inverter caused by the carrier frequency.

•

This function is enabled with 2, 3, or 4 set in n080 for carrier frequency.

6-25

Advanced Operation

6-5 DC Injection Braking Function

Chapter 6

The DC injection braking function applies DC on the induction motor for braking control.

Startup DC Injection Braking:

This braking is used for stopping and starting the motor rotating by inertia with no regenerative processing.

DC Injection Braking to Stop:

Adjust the stop DC injection braking time if the motor rotating does not decelerate to a stop in normal operation due to inertia from a heavy load. By increasing the DC injection braking time or DC injection braking current, the time required for stopping the motor is reduced.

n089

Setting range n090

DC Injection Braking Current

0 to 100 (%)

Register 0159 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Setting range

DC Injection Braking-to-stop Time Register 015A Hex Changes during operation

0.0 to 25.5 (s) Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

0.5

n091

Setting range

Startup DC Injection Braking Time Register 015B Hex Changes during operation

0.0 to 25.5 (s) Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

0.0

•

Set the DC injection braking current as percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

•

After the startup DC injection braking time is set, the Inverter starts up at minimum frequency on completion of the startup DC injection braking control of the Inverter.

• After the speed is reduced, the Inverter is switched to DC injection braking at minimum output frequency.

DC Injection Braking Control

Output frequency

Minimum output frequency

(n016) n091

Startup DC injection braking time

Time n090

DC injection braking-to-stop time

Note It is normally not necessary to change the settings of n173 (Proportional Gain for DC Control) and n174 ( Integral Time Constant for DC Control ). Adjust n89 to n91 to achieve optimum performance.

6-26

Advanced Operation

6-6 Stall Prevention Function

Chapter 6

A stall will occur if the motor cannot keep up with the rotating magnetic field on the motor stator side when a large load is applied to the motor or a sudden acceleration/deceleration is performed.

In the 3G3MV, stall prevention functions can be set independently for accelerating, running, and decelerating conditions.

n092

Setting range

Stall Prevention during

Deceleration

0, 1

Register 015C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Stall prevention during deceleration

No stall prevention during deceleration

Description

•

If 1 is set, the motor will be decelerated according to the set deceleration time. If the deceleration time is too short, the main circuit may result in overvoltage.

•

If 0 is set, the deceleration time will be automatically lengthened to prevent overvoltage.

•

Be sure to set n092 to 1 to disable stall prevention during acceleration if the braking resistor or Braking

Resistor Unit is in use. If n092 is set to 0, no deceleration time reduction will be possible because the braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected is not used.

Stall Prevention during Deceleration with n092 Set to 0

Output frequency

Deceleration time is controlled to prevent overvoltage.

Time

Deceleration time (Set value)

6-27

Advanced Operation n093

Setting range

Stall Prevention Level during

Acceleration

30 to 200 (%)

Register 015D Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Set Values

Chapter 6

170

Set Values

•

This function is used to stop accelerating the load if the output current exceeds the set current value so that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The Inverter accelerates the load while the output current is the same as or less than the set value.

•

Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls with the default value.

The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current as percentage based on the rated inverter current as 100%.

Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Output current n093 (stall prevention level during acceleration)

Output frequency

Time

The output frequency is controlled so that the Inverter will not stall.

Time

6-28

Advanced Operation n094

Setting range

Stall Prevention Level during

Operation

30 to 200 (%)

Register 015E Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting

Chapter 6

160

Set Values

•

This function will decrease the output frequency if the output current exceeds the set current value by a minimum of approximately 100 ms so that the Inverter will continue operating without stalling. The

Inverter will increase the output frequency to return to the set frequency reference level when the output current is less than the set value.

•

The Inverter accelerates or decelerates the output frequency according to the preset acceleration or deceleration time set in n116 (stall prevention acceleration/deceleration time setting).

•

Set the parameter as percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

Decrease the set value if the capacity of the motor is smaller than that of the Inverter or the motor stalls with the default value.

The set value is normally 2 or 3 times higher than the rated current of the motor. Set this current in percentage based on the rated Inverter current as 100%.

Stall Prevention during Acceleration

Output current n094 (Stall prevention level during acceleration)

Time

Output frequency

The output frequency is controlled so that the Inverter will not stall.

Time n115

Setting range

Stall Prevention Level Automatic

Suppression Selection

0, 1

Register 0173 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Set Values

Set Values

Value

Description

Disabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is enabled in all the frequency range.

Enabled. The set value in n094 for stall prevention during operation is automatically decreased when the output frequency exceeds the maximum voltage frequency (FA).

6-29

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

If n115 is set to 1, the stall prevention level will be suppressed as shown below. When using frequencies exceeding the maximum voltage frequency, set n 115 to 1.

Automatic Suppression of Stall Prevention Level (n115 Set to 1)

Operation level Constant output range

Operating level: n094 x

(Max. voltage frequency/output frequency) n116

Setting range

Output frequency

Max. voltage frequency (FA)

Stall Prevention

Acceleration/Deceleration Time

Setting

0, 1

Register 0174 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Set Values

Set Values

Value Description

Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2 presently selected.

Accelerates or decelerates at acceleration/deceleration time 2 set in n021 and n022.

•

Select the acceleration/deceleration time with the stall prevention function operating function enabled.

•

To accelerate or decelerate quicker or slower than normal, set 1 in n116 and the acceleration time in n021 (acceleration time 2) and deceleration time in n022 (deceleration time 2) for stall prevention use.

6-30

Advanced Operation

6-7 Overtorque/Undertorque Detection Function

Chapter 6

When an excessive load is applied to the equipment, the Inverter detects the overtorque condition through an increase in the output current. The Inverter detects the undertorque condition through a decrease in the output current (or output torque) generated when a small load is applied to the equipment.

n096

Setting range

Overtorque Detection Function

Selection 1

0 to 4

Register 0160 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value Description

Inverter does not monitor overtorque.

Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It continues operation (issues warning) even after overtorque is detected.

Inverter monitors overtorque only when speed is matched. It discontinues operation

(through protective function) when overtorque is detected.

Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It continues operation (issues warning) even after overtorque is detected.

Inverter always monitors overtorque during operation. It discontinues operation (through protective function) when overtorque is detected.

•

Set n097 (overtorque detection function selection 2), n098 (overtorque detection level) and n099

(overtorque detection time) to enable the overtorque detection function. The Inverter will detect overtorque when the current is the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

•

Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to either of the following so that external overtorque detection output will be ON.

Set Value: 6 for overtorque detection (NO)

Set Value: 7 for overtorque detection (NC)

Overtorque Detection

Output current

(or output torque)

See note.

n098 (Overtorque detection level)

Time n099

Overtorque detection time

Overtorque detection (NO)

Time

Note Overtorque detection will be canceled if the output current decreases from the detection level by approximately 5% of the Inverter rated current.

6-31

Advanced Operation n097

Overtorque Detection Function

Selection 2

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0161 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Chapter 6

Set Values

Value

Detects overtorque from output torque.

Detects overtorque from output current.

Description

•

Set n097 to the item used for overtorque detection.

•

In V/f control mode, overtorque is detected through the output current of the Inverter regardless of the set value.

n098 Overtorque Detection Level No

Setting range

30 to 200 (%)

Register 0162 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 160

Set Values

•

Set n098 to the type of overtorque detection level.

To detect the level through the output torque, set the torque in percentage based on the rated motor torque as 100%.

To detect the level through the output current, set the current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

Note With general-purpose induction motors for example, a current equivalent to approx. 60% of the rated motor current will be generated when there is no load. (This current will vary according to the model and capacity of the motor.) When setting the overtorque detection level, allow for a no-load current.

n099

Setting range

Overtorque Detection Time

0.1 to 10.0 (s)

Register 0163 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

0.1

Set Values

•

Set the overtorque detection time.

•

The Inverter will detect overtorque when the current (or torque) the same as or higher than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

n117

Undertorque detection function selection

Setting range

0 to 4

Register 0163 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

6-32

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

Setting Description

Inverter does not monitor undertorque.

Inverter monitors undertorque only while matching speed. It continues operation (warning) even after undertorque is detected.

Inverter monitors undertorque only while matching speed. It discontinues operation

(protective operation) when undertorque is detected.

Inverter monitors undertorque during operation. It continues operation (warning) even after undertorque is detected.

4 Inverter monitors undertorque during operation. It discontinues operation

(protective operation) when undertorque is detected.

•

Set n117 (undertorque detection function selection, n118 (undertorque detection level) and n119 (undertorque detection time) to enable the undertorque detection function. The Inverter will detect undertorque when current (or torque) the same as or lower than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

•

Set a multi-function input (n057 to n059) to output an undertorque detection signal to an external device.

Set value: 8 for undertorque detection (NO-contact input)

Set value: 9 for undertorque detection (NC-contact input)

Undertorque detection

Undertorque detection level (n118)

Frequency matching n119

Undertorque detection time

Undertorque being detected (NO contact)

Time

Note Undertorque detection will be canceled if the value increases from the detection level by approximately 5% of the Inverter rated current (or motor’s rated torque).

n118 Undertorque detection level No

Setting range

0 to 200

Register 0176 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1% Default setting 10%

Set Values

•

Set the undertorque detection level.

To detect the level through the output torque, set the torque in a percentage based on the motor’s rated torque as 100%.

To detect the level through the output current, set the current in percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

Note With general-purpose motors, for example, a current equivalent to approx. 60% of the motor’s rated current will be generated when there is no load. (This current will vary according to the type

6-33

Advanced Operation Chapter 6 and capacity of the motor.) When setting the undertorque detection level, allow for a no-load current.

n119

Setting range

Undertorque detection time

0.1 to 10.0 (s)

Register 0177 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

0.1 s

Set Values

•

Set the undertorque detection time.

•

The Inverter will detect undertorque when current (or torque) the same as or lower than the detection level is output for the preset detection time.

6-34

Advanced Operation

6-8 Torque Compensation Function

Chapter 6

This function increases the output torque of the Inverter by detecting an increase in the motor load.

n103

Setting range

Torque Compensation Gain

0.0 to 2.5

Register 0167 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting

Yes

1.0

Set Values

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

Change the default setting in the following cases.

The wiring distance between the Inverter and motor is long:

Set the gain to a larger value.

The capacity of the motor is lower than the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter:

Set the gain to a larger value.

The motor vibrates:

Set the gain to a smaller value.

•

The torque compensation gain must be adjusted so that the output current at low speed will not exceed

50% of the rated output current of the Inverter, otherwise the Inverter may be damaged.

n104

Setting range

Torque Compensation Primary

Delay Time Constant

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 0168 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

Note The default value is 0.2 (s) with the Inverter set to vector control mode.

0.3 (See note.)

Set Values

• This parameter is used for adjusting the response of torque compensation.

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

Adjust the parameter in the following cases.

The motor vibrates: Increase the set value.

The response of the motor is slow: Decrease the set value.

n105

Setting range

Torque Compensation Core Loss Register 0168 Hex Changes during operation

0.0 to 6,550 (W) Unit of setting

0.1 W

(See note

1.)

Default setting

See note

Note 1.

The value will be set in 0.1-W increments if the loss is less than 1,000 W and 1-W increments if the loss is 1,000 W or over.

Note 2.

The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

6-35

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

•

Set this value to the core loss of the motor in used.

•

This parameter is valid in V/f control mode only.

•

Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

•

Set the value if the capacity of the motor does not coincide with the maximum applicable motor capacity of the Inverter.

6-36

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-9 Slip Compensation Function

The slip compensation function calculates the motor torque according to the output current, and sets gain to compensate for output frequency.

This function is used to improve speed accuracy when operating with a load. It is mainly valid for V/f control.

Set the rated motor current (n036) and the motor no-load current (n110) before using the slip compensation function. If n036 = 0, the slip compensation function cannot be used.

n106

Setting range

Rated Motor Slip

0.0 to 20.0 (Hz)

Register 016A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 Hz Default setting

Note The default setting varies with the capacity of the Inverter model.

Yes

(See note.)

Set Values

•

Set the rated slip value of the motor in use.

•

This parameter is used as a slip compensation constant.

•

Calculate the rated motor slip value from the rated frequency (Hz) and rpm on the motor nameplate by using the following formula.

Rated slit value (Hz)

Rated frequency (Hz) –

Rated rpm Number of poles

120 n111 Slip Compensation Gain Yes

Setting range

0.0 to 2.5

Register 016F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting 0.0

(See note 1.)

Note 1.

If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 1.0.

Note 2.

This parameter is disabled with the value set to 0.0.

Set Values

•

Set the parameter to 1.0 first and check the operation of the Inverter. Then fine-tune the gain with

0.1-gain increments or decrements.

If the speed is lower than the target value, increase the set value.

If the speed is higher than the target value, decrease the set value.

n112

Setting range

Slip Compensation Primary Delay

Time

0.0 to 25.5 (s)

Register 0170 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

Note If set to vector control mode, the default value will be 0.2.

2.0 (See note.)

Set Values

•

This parameter is used for the response adjustment of the slip compensation function.

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

Change the default setting in the following cases.

The motor vibrates: Set the value to a larger value.

The motor response is low: Set the value to a smaller value.

6-37

Advanced Operation n113

Setting range

Slip Compensation During

Regeneration

0, 1

Register 0171 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Chapter 6

Set Values

Value Description

Slip compensation function disabled during regeneration

Slip compensation function enabled during regeneration

• Select whether the slip compensation function is enabled or not, even during regeneration (i.e.: when regeneration energy is returning during deceleration, etc.).

•

This parameter is only enabled in vector control mode. (In V/f control mode, the slip compensation function will be disabled during regeneration, regardless of the setting for this parameter.)

6-38

Advanced Operation

6-10 Other Functions

Chapter 6

The following description provides information on the other functions and parameter settings of the Inverter.

Refer to Section 7 Communications for parameters used for communications.

6-10-1 Digital Operator Disconnection Error Detection

•

This parameter setting is to select whether or not to detect Digital Operator connection errors.

n010

Setting range

Operation Selection at Digital

Operator Interruption

0, 1

Register 010A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The Digital Operator connection error is not detected (Nonfatal error)

The Digital Operator connection error is detected (Error output and the Inverter coasts to a stop)

6-10-2 Motor Protection Functions (n037 and n038)

• This parameter setting is for motor overload detection (OL1).

n037

Motor Protection Characteristics Register 0125 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0 to 2 Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors

Protection characteristics for Inverter-dedicated motors

No protection

•

This parameter is used to set the electric thermal characteristics of the motor to be connected.

• Set the parameter according to the motor.

•

If a single Inverter is connected to more than one motor, set the parameter to 2 for no protection. The parameter is also disabled by setting n036 for rated motor current to 0.0. Provide overload protection for each motor by setting up, for example, thermal relays.

n038

Motor Protection Time No

Setting range

1 to 60 (min)

Register 0126 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 min Default setting 8

6-39

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Set Values

•

This parameter is used to set the electronic thermal protection constant of motor overload detection

OL1.

•

The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

•

To set the parameter according to the characteristics of the motor, confirm the thermal time constant with the motor manufacturer and set the parameter with some margin. In other words, set the value a little shorter than the thermal time constant.

•

To detect motor overloading more quickly, reduce the set value, provided that it does not cause any application problems.

6-10-3 Cooling Fan Operation Function (n039)

• This parameter is used to operate the cooling fan of the Inverter while the Inverter is turned ON or only while the Inverter is in operation.

n039

Cooling Fan Operation No

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0127 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value Description

The fan rotates only while the RUN command is input and for 1 minute after the Inverter stops operating.

The fan rotates while the Inverter is turned ON.

•

This parameter is available only if the Inverter incorporates a cooling fan.

•

If the operation frequency of the Inverter is low, the life of the fan can be prolonged by setting the parameter to 0.

6-10-4 Momentary Power Interruption Compensation (n081)

•

The parameter specifies the processing that will be performed when a momentary power interruption occurs.

n081

Setting range

Momentary Power Interruption

Compensation

0, 1, 2, 5 to 100

Register 0151 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

5 to 100

Description

Disabled. (An undervoltage fault will be detected when there is momentary power interruption for 15 ms or more.)

The Inverter will continue operating if power is restored within 0.5 s. (See note 2.)

The Inverter will restart when power is restored. (See note 3.)

Power interruption recovery timer (Operation will continue after the set value times 0.1 s.)

Note 1.

UV1 will be detected when a momentary power interruption occurs if n081 is set to 0. Operation cannot be continued until the UV1 error is cleared either by an error reset or by turning

OFF the Inverter for complete power discharge.

6-40

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

Note 2.

By setting n081 to 1, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for power restoration for 0.5 s if a momentary power interruption occurs. If the power recovers within 0.5 s, the Inverter will restart after speed searching. If the momentary power interruption continues more than 0.5 s, the Inverter will detect UV1.

Note 3.

By setting n081 to 2, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for power restoration if a momentary power interruption occurs. When the power recovers, the

Inverter will restart after speed searching.

Note 4.

By setting n081 to 5 to 100, the Inverter will detect UV warning, turn OFF the output, and wait for power restoration if a momentary power interruption occurs. When the power recovers, an operation prohibit status will be created internally for the set value times 0.1 s. When the operation prohibit status is cleared, the Inverter will restart after speed searching.

Note 5.

If power is completely discharged, operation will be the same as for initially turning ON the power supply regardless of the setting of n081. (Operation will start immediately when the

RUN signal turns ON.)

6-10-5 Fault Retry (n082)

Caution The Inverter may break if the fault retry function is used.

If the Inverter breaks, take the following measures:

Be sure to install a no-fuse breaker (NFB).

Provide the Inverter and peripheral machines with a sequence so that the machines will stop operating when the Inverter has an operational fault.

•

The fault retry function automatically resets and restarts the Inverter in the case the Inverter has an overvoltage fault or an overcurrent fault during operation.

•

In the case of any other fault, the protective function operates instantly and the fault retry function does not operate.

•

This function is to be used only if the user does not want to interrupt the mechanical system, even if this function may damage the Inverter.

• Set a multi-function output (n057 to n059) to the following so that the fault retry signal will be output.

Set value: 14 for fault retries n082 Number of Fault Retries No

Setting range

0 to 10

Register 0152 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

•

Set the number of fault retries required.

•

The count of fault retries will be cleared in any of the following cases.

The Inverter is normal for 10 minutes continuously after the latest fault retry was made.

Power supply to the Inverter is interrupted.

A fault reset is input.

6-41

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-10-6 Frequency Jump Function (n083 to n086)

•

The frequency jump function prevents the Inverter from generating frequencies that make the mechanical system resonate.

•

The frequency jump function can be used effectively to set three dead bands of a frequency reference.

n083

Jump Frequency 1 No

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 0153 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz Default setting 0.00

n084 Jump Frequency 2 No

Setting range n085

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Jump Frequency 3

Register 0154 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz Default setting 0.00

Setting range n086

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Jump Width

Register 0155 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz Default setting 0.00

Setting range

0.00 to 25.50 (Hz)

Register 0156 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz Default setting 0.00

Set Values

•

Set n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 to the central values of jumping frequencies.

• Values will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

•

These values must satisfy the following condition.

n083 y n084 y n085

• The value in n086 must be set for the jump width.

•

This function is disabled with n086 set to 0.0.

•

The operation of the Inverter within the dead bands is prohibited. While the Inverter is in acceleration or deceleration control, however, the Inverter does not jump the bands but changes the frequency smoothly.

6-42

Advanced Operation

Frequency Jump Function

Output frequency

Chapter 6

Reference frequency

6-10-7 Accumulated Operating Time (n087, n088)

•

The accumulated operating time function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

• This function calculates and stores in memory the Inverter’s accumulated operating time. The accumulated operating time that is saved can be checked (unit: 10h) by the “accumulated operating time”

(U-13) of the multi-function monitor (MNTR indicator).

•

Use this function in determining the maintenance schedule.

n087 Accumulated Operating Time No

Setting range

0, 1

Register 0157 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

•

Select the operation status to be accumulated.

Value Description

Accumulate the Inverter’s power-ON time (the time from when the power is turned ON until it is shut OFF).

Accumulate the Inverter’s RUN time (the time that the RUN command is being input).

n088

Setting range

Accumulated Operating Time

Selection

0 to 6,550

Register 0158 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

10 H Default setting

•

Set the initial value for the accumulated operating time with 10 hours set as 1. The accumulation will begin from the time that is set.

Note To clear (i.e., set to 0) the monitor value (U-13) for the accumulated operating time, set n088 to 0.

The monitor value cannot be cleared by setting n001 (parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization) to 8 or 9 (initialize).

6-43

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

6-10-8 Frequency Detection

• The 3G3MV has the following frequency detection functions.

Frequency Detection:

Detects that the frequency reference coincides with the output frequency.

Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2:

Detects that the output frequency is the same as or higher or lower than the set value (frequency detection level) in n095.

• The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set for the frequency detection function.

Frequency Detection

•

The multi-function outputs (n057 to n059) must be set to the following in order to issue an output indicating that the frequency reference and the output frequency agree.

Set value: 2 for frequency agree

Frequency Detection Operation

Output frequency

Detection width ± 2 Hz

Reset width

4 Hz

Frequency reference

Frequency detection

Time

Frequency Detection Levels 1 and 2

• The parameters in n057 to n059 for multi-function output must be set for frequency detection output.

Set value: 4 for frequency detection level 1 (Output frequency y

n095)

Set value: 5 for frequency detection level 2 (Output frequency x

n095)

•

Set the frequency detection level in n095.

n095 Frequency Detection Level No

Setting range

0.00 to 400.0 (Hz)

Register 015F Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.01 Hz Default setting 0.00

Set Values

•

Set the frequency to be detected.

6-44

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

The value will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over.

Frequency Detection Level 1

Output frequency

Reset width –2 Hz n095 (Frequency detection level)

Time

Frequency detection level 1

Time

Frequency Detection Level 2

Output frequency

Reset width +2 Hz n095 (Frequency detection level)

Time

Frequency detection level 2

Time

6-10-9 UP/DOWN Command Frequency Memory (n100)

•

This function changes the reference frequency by turning the UP and DOWN commands ON and OFF.

•

In order to use this function, set n056 for multi-function input 7 to 34. Then the multi-function input 6

(S6) and multi-function input 7 (S7) terminals are set as described below.

Multi-function input 6 (S6): UP command

Multi-function input 7 (S7): DOWN command

•

The output frequency held by the UP/DOWN function will be stored in the memory if n100 for UP/

DOWN frequency storage is set to 1.

•

By setting n100 to 1, the frequency reference kept on hold for 5 s or more will be retained even after a power interruption, and operation will be restarted at this frequency the next time the RUN command is input.

• The stored output frequency will be cleared from the memory if n100 is set to 0. The retained frequency is initialized if n001 for parameter initialization is set to 8 or 9.

Note While this function is used, frequency references can only be used in remote mode with the UP/

DOWN command or inching frequency command. All multi-step speed references are disabled.

6-45

Advanced Operation n100

Setting range

UP/DOWN Frequency Memory

0, 1

Register 0164 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

The frequency on hold is not retained.

The frequency on hold for 5 s or more is retailed.

Operation of UP/DOWN Function

RUN command

(Forward rotation)

UP command

(S5)

DOWN command

(S6)

Output frequency

Upper limit

Time

Chapter 6

Lower limit

Status

Frequency detection

Note Status U: UP (acceleration)

D: DOWN (deceleration)

H: Hold

U1: Frequency acceleration restricted by upper limit.

D1: Frequency deceleration restricted by lower limit.

Time

•

The following ON/OFF combinations of UP and DOWN commands are possible.

Command

S6 (UP command)

S7 (DOWN command)

Acceleration

OFF

Deceleration

OFF

Hold

•

With the UP/DOWN function used, the output frequency has the following restrictions for upper and lower limits.

Upper limit: The maximum frequency in n011 or the frequency reference upper limit in n033, whichever is smaller.

Lower limit: The minimum output frequency in n016 or frequency reference lower limit in n034, whichever is smaller.

6-46

Advanced Operation Chapter 6

•

When the RUN command for forward or reverse rotation is input, the Inverter will start operating at the lower limit regardless of whether the UP/DOWN command is input or not.

•

When the UP/DOWN function and inching frequency command are both assigned to multi-function inputs, an inching frequency command input will have the highest priority.

•

If n100 for UP/DOWN frequency storage is set to 1, the output frequency held by the UP/DOWN function for 5 s or more will be stored in the memory. The output frequency will be held by the UP/DOWN function when both UP and DOWN commands are ON or OFF together.

6-10-10 Input Open-phase Detection (n166, n167)

•

The input open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

•

This function detects the occurrence of an input power supply open phase. The open phase is detected by means of fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage, enabling detection of power supply voltage fluctuations and imbalances, decreasing values due to ageing of the main circuit capacitor, and so on, in the same way.

• If the fluctuations in the main circuit DC voltage exceed the input open-phase detection level (n166), and persist at this level for longer than the input open-phase detection time (n167), a main-circuit voltage fault (PF) will be detected.

n166

Setting range

Input Open-phase Detection Level Register 01A6 Hex Changes during operation

0 to 100 Unit of setting

1 % Default setting n167

Input Open-phase Detection Time Register 01A7 Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0 to 255 Unit of setting

1 s Default setting

Set Values

•

For the input open-phase detection level (n166), set the main-circuit DC voltage fluctuation level for detecting an input open phase. Set the level as a percentage, as follows:

200-V-class Inverters: Take 400 V as 100%.

400-V-class Inverters: Take 800 V as 100%.

•

For the input open-phase detection time (n167), set the time (in seconds) for detecting an input open phase.

Note 1.

The following values are recommended for detecting an input open phase: n166 = 7 (%); n167

= 10 (s)

Note 2.

If either n166 or n167 is set to 0, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

6-10-11 Output Open-phase Detection (n168, n169)

• The output open-phase detection function is provided for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

•

This function detects the occurrence of an output terminal open phase. The detection is performed at the current flowing at each output phase.

•

If the current in any of the Inverter output phases becomes less than the output open-phase detection level (n168) and persists at this level for longer than the output open-phase detection time (n169), an output open-phase fault (LF) will be detected.

6-47

Advanced Operation Chapter 6 n168

Setting range n169

Setting range

Output Open-phase Detection

Level

0 to 100

Output Open-phase Detection

Time

0.0 to 2.0

Register 01A8 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 % Default setting

Register 01A9 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

0.1 s Default setting

0.0

Set Values

•

For the output open-phase detection level (n168), set the current for detecting an output open phase.

Make the setting as a percentage, taking the Inverter’s rated output current as 100%.

•

For the output open-phase detection time (n169), set the time in seconds for detecting an output open phase.

Note 1.

The following values are recommended for detecting an output open phase: n168 = 5 (%); n169 = 0.2 (s)

Note 2.

If either n168 or n169 is set to 0, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Note 3.

If the applicable motor capacity is small in relation to the Inverter capacity, it may cause errors in the output open-phase detection. To prevent this from occurring, lower the output openphase detection level to match the motor capacity.

6-10-12 Fault Log (n178)

•

The 3G3MV stores information on the four most recent faults.

•

The latest record is displayed. By pressing the Increment Key, the previous record is displayed. A maximum of four records can be checked. “1.” indicates the most recent fault.

•

The details of the information are the same as that obtained from the multi-function monitor U-09.

n178

Fault Log ---

Setting range

---

Register 01B2 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

--Default setting ---

Note The information is read only.

Display Example

D Fault display D No fault stored

Fault generation item

Fault code

•

To clear the fault log, set n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization to 6.

6-48

Chapter 7 Communications

7-1 Inverter Settings

7-2 Message Communications Basic Format

7-3 DSR Message and Response

7-4 Enter Command

7-5 Setting the Communications Data

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

7-7 Communications Error Codes

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test

7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller

Communications Chapter 7

The 3G3MV Inverter has standard RS-422/485 and optional DeviceNet communications functions. This section provides information on how to communicate over

RS-422/485. For DeviceNet communications in detail, refer to the 3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet Communications Unit/Card User’s Manual (I539) .

It is possible to control the Inverter, give frequency references, monitor the Inverter status, and read and write parameters through communications.

A maximum of 32 Inverter Units can be connected to RS422/485 communications and used as a simple network system.

Note The RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the MOD-

BUS Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with any other communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-Series products can be connected as Slaves. If a DeviceNet Communications Unit is used, RS-422/485 communications will not be possible. Therefore, select which communications method is to be used.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider

Automation.)

7-1 Inverter Settings

7-1-1 Setting the Communications Conditions

Communications Time-over Detection Selection (n151)

•

This parameter is used for monitoring the communications system.

•

The set value in the parameter determines whether communications time-over detection will be performed with “CE” displayed if there is an interval of more than 2 s between normal communications.

The method to process the detected communications time-over is also determined according to the set value in the parameter.

•

When a control signal (the RUN command, forward/reverse rotation command, or an external fault signal) is input into the Inverter through communications, be sure to set n151 to 0, 1, or 2. Then the system will stop in the case of a time-over detection.

If there is a communications failure, no control input will be operable. It will be, however, impossible to stop the Inverter if n151 is to 4 or 3.

Use a host program that monitors how the Inverter handles all control input signals, for example, so that there will be no interval of more than 2 s between communications.

n151

Setting range

RS-422/485 Communications

Time-over Detection Selection

0 to 4

Register 0197 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

7-2

Communications Chapter 7

Set Values

Value

Description

Detects a time-over and fatal error and coasts to a stop (See note 1.)

Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 1 (See note 1.)

Detects a time-over and fatal error and decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2 (See note 1.)

Detects a time-over and nonfatal error warning and continues operating. The warning is canceled when the communications return to normal. (See note 2.)

No time-over is detected.

Note 1.

The fatal error is canceled with error reset input.

Note 2.

The nonfatal error warning is canceled when the communications returns to normal.

Communications Frequency Reference/Display Unit Selection (n152)

•

Set this parameter to the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through communications.

•

This unit is for communications use only and independent from the units of setting made through the

Digital Operator.

n152

Setting range

RS-422/485 Communications

Frequency Reference/Display Unit

Selection

0 to 3

Register 0198 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

0.1 Hz

0.01 Hz

Converted value based on 30,000 as max. frequency

0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)

Note Communications data after the above conversion is hexadecimal.

For example, if the frequency is 60 Hz and the unit of setting is 0.01 Hz, the converted value is obtained as follows:

60/0.01 = 6000 = 1770 Hex

Slave Address (n153)

• Set this parameter to the Slave address (Slave unit number) for communications.

•

If more than one Inverter is connected as a Slave, make sure that there will be no Slave address duplication.

n153

Setting range

RS-422/485 Communications

Slave Address

00 to 32

Register 0199 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

01 to 32

Description

Only receives broadcast messages from the Master (See note.)

Slave address

7-3

Communications Chapter 7

Note Address 00 is for broadcast purposes only. Do not set the Slave to this address, otherwise the

Slave will not communicate.

Communications Baud Rate and Parity Selection (n154 and n155)

•

Set the baud rate and parity according to the communications conditions of the Master.

n154

RS-422/485 Baud Rate Selection No

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 019A Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 2

Set Values

Value

2,400 bps

4,800 bps

9,600 bps

19,200 bps n155

Setting range

RS-422/485 Parity Selection

0 to 2

Description

Register 019B Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Even

Odd

No parity

Description

In normal serial communications, data is configured in single bytes, and messages are created by stringing together multiple bytes of data. The parity check described here sets the check for each byte of data. Set the parity check method that is required by the Master.

Note The entire message is checked by a separate check code called “CRC-16,” so the communications data will be checked even if no special parity check is performed.

Send Wait Time Setting (n156)

• Set this parameter to an awaiting period for returning a response after the DSR (data-send-request) message is received from the Master.

n156

RS-422/485 Send Wait Time No

Setting range

10 to 65 (ms)

Register 019C Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 ms Default setting 10

7-4

Communications Chapter 7

Set Values

•

When the DSR message is received from the Master, the Inverter must wait for a communications time of 24-bit length plus the set value in n156 before returning a response.

Set this value according to the response time of the Master.

RTS Control Selection (n157)

• Select whether or not to enable the RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.

•

This function can be disabled (i.e., set to “1”) only when a 1-to-1 Master/Slave configuration is used in

RS-422 communications. When multiple Slaves are used for RS-422, or whenever RS-485 communications are used, it is necessary to set “0” (enable RTS control).

n157 RS-422/485 RTS Control Selection Register 019D Hex Changes during operation

Setting range

0, 1 Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Enabled

Disabled (Available to 1-to-1 RS-422 communication only)

7-1-2 RUN Command Selection (n003)

•

Select the method to input the RUN or STOP command into the Inverter.

•

This parameter is enabled in remote mode only. The Inverter in local mode accepts the RUN command only through key sequences on the Digital Operator.

n003 Operation Command Selection No

Setting range

0 to 3

Register 0103 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

The RUN Key and STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator are enabled.

Multi-function input terminals are enabled in 2- or 3-wire sequence.

RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

Input from the option (DeviceNet Communications Unit) is enabled.

Note 1.

To input the RUN command through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to 2.

Then the RUN command only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.

Note 2.

The RUN command can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings as well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs .

7-5

Communications Chapter 7

7-1-3 Frequency Reference Input Selection (n004)

• Select the method to input the frequency reference into the Inverter in remote mode.

•

Ten methods can be used to input the frequency reference in remote mode. Select the ideal method according to the application.

n004 Frequency Reference Selection No

Setting range

0 to 8

Register 0104 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 0

Set Values

Value

Description

The FREQUENCY adjuster on the Digital Operator is enabled.

Frequency reference 1 (024) is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 10-V voltage input is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 4- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

Frequency reference control terminal for 0- to 20-mA current input is enabled.

Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

Frequency reference through communications is enabled.

Multi-function analog voltage for 0- to 10-V input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Multi-function analog current for 4- to 20-mA) input is enabled.

Used only if two analog inputs are required in PID control.

Frequency reference through option (DeviceNet communications) is enabled.

Note 1.

To input the frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications, set this parameter to

6. Then the frequency reference only through RS-422/485 communications will be enabled.

Note 2.

The frequency reference can be input through RS-422/485 with multi-function input settings as well. For details, refer to 7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs .

7-1-4 Setting the Multi-function Inputs (n050 to n056)

•

In addition to the methods described above, the RUN command and frequency reference can be input through RS-422/485 communications by setting the value 18 in any one of the parameters from n050 to n056 (multi-function input).

•

Subsequently, the following operations are selectable in remote mode. None of these parameters, however, can be changed while the operation command is being input.

When the function-set input terminal is OFF, the RUN command will be executed according to the setting in n003 (RUN command selection) and the frequency reference will be executed according to the setting in n004 (frequency reference selection).

When the function-set input terminal is ON, the Inverter will operate according to the RUN command and frequency reference through RS-422/485 communications.

n050

Multi-function input 1 (S1) No

Setting range

1 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Register 0132 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting 1

7-6

Communications n051

Setting range n052

Setting range n053

Setting range n054

Setting range n055

Setting range n056

Setting range

Multi-function input 2 (S2)

1 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Multi-function input 3 (S3)

0 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Multi-function input 4 (S4)

0 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Multi-function input 5 (S5)

0 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Multi-function input 6 (S6)

0 to 25, (26, 27), 28-33

Multi-function input 7 (S7)

0 to 25, (26, 27), 28-35

Register 0133 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 0134 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 0135 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 0136 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 0137 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Register 0138 Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Chapter 7

7-7

Communications

7-2 Message Communications Basic Format

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on the format of message data (DSR and response data).

Message communications of the Inverter conform to the MODBUS Communications

Protocol, which does not require message start and end processing.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation.)

Communications Format

•

The following format is used for message data communications.

•

Message data consists of a Slave address, function code, communications data, and error check block.

Message data (DSR message and response)

Slave address

1 byte

Function code

1 byte

Communications data

Error check block

2 bytes

Message Interval

•

When the Inverter receives a DSR message from the Master, the Inverter waits for a period that is equivalent to 24 bits in length and a Send Wait Time set in n156. Then the Inverter will return a response. Set n156 according to the Master’s processing time or the timing adjustment.

•

When the Master issues the next message after receiving the response from the Inverter, the Master must wait for a 24-bit period plus another period of at least 10 ms.

DSR message from Master Response from Inverter

DSR message from Master

24-bit (or 3-byte) standby period

Standby period set in n156

24-bit (3-byte) standby period

Set a standby period of

10 ms or more for the

Master.

Message Data Configuration

•

The communications message is configured entirely of hexadecimal data. (ASCII and FINS are not used.)

•

Communications data is divided into the four areas shown in the following table.

Data name

Slave address

Function code

Communications data

Error check

Description

Set the Slave address (the set value in n153) of the Inverter, to which the

DSR message is sent. The Slave address must be within a range from 00 to

32 (00 to 20 Hex).

A command giving instructions of the details of processing to the Inverter.

Example: Data read (03 Hex) and data write (10 Hex)

Data attached to the command.

Example: The register number of read start data and the number of registers of read data

CRC-16 check code for checking the reliability of the message data.

7-8

Communications Chapter 7

Note In the above communications, the default is –1 (65535) and the LSB (least-significant byte) is converted as MSB (most-significant byte) (in the opposite direction). The CRC-16 check is automatically performed by using the protocol macro function of OMRON’s SYSMAC CS-series or

C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controllers.

Slave Address

• The Master can communicate with a maximum of 32 Slaves over RS-422/485. A unique Slave address is allocated to each Slave (Inverter) for communications.

•

Slave addresses are within a range from 00 to 32 (00 through 20 Hex). If a DSR message is issued to

Slave address 00, the message will be a broadcast message.

Note The broadcast message is addressed to all Slaves. Only the RUN command (register 0001 Hex) and frequency command (register 0002 Hex) can be written to the message. The Inverter receiving this message does not return a response regardless of whether or not the message is received properly. Therefore, for measures against communications errors, the monitor function of the Inverter should be used for checking the reception of broadcast messages.

Function Code

•

The function code is a command giving instructions of the details of processing to the Inverter.

•

The following three functions codes are available.

Function code

03 Hex

Command name

Data read

08 Hex

10 Hex

Loop-back test

Data write

Description

Reads the data of the specified register number.

Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes) can be read.

The DSR message is returned as a response. This command is used for checking the status of communications.

The attached data in the format is written to the specified register number. Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes) can be written.

Note 1.

Do not use any code other than the above, otherwise the Inverter will detect a communications error and return an error message.

Note 2.

The Inverter uses the same function code for the response. If an error occurs, however, the

MSB of the function code will be set to 1. For example, if an error occurs in a DSR message with function code 03, the function code of the response will be 83.

Communications Data

•

Communications data is attached to the command. The contents and its arrangement of communications data vary with the function code. For details, refer to 7-3 DSR Message and Response .

7-9

Communications Chapter 7

Error Check

•

The CRC-16 check code is the remainder (16 bits) when all of the message blocks from the Slave address to the final communications data are connected in series, as shown in the following diagram, and this data is divided by a fixed 17-digit binary number (1 1000 0000 0000 0101).

8 bits

The LSB of the Slave address is handled as the MSB in CRC-16 calculation.

Slave address

Function code

Start of communications data

Note 1.

Normally “0” is used as the initial value for CRC-16 calculations, but “–1” (16 bits all “1”) is used here.

Note 2.

The CRC-16 code is calculated with the LSB of the

Slave address handled as the MSB, and the final MSB of the communications data handled as the LSB.

Note 3.

Calculate the CRC-16 code for responses from the

Slave as well, and compare it with the CRC-16 code in the response message.

End of communications data

7-10

Communications

7-3 DSR Message and Response

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on how to set DSR messages and what details are returned as responses. Each DSR message or response is divided into 8-bit blocks. Therefore, data must be set in 8-bit blocks for communications.

7-3-1 Data Read (Function Code: 03 Hex)

Settings and Responses

•

To read data (such as control I/O status data, monitor item data, or parameter set value data) from the

Inverter, issue the following DSR message.

•

Data read is a maximum of 16 words in length (i.e., data of 32 bytes from 16 registers) per DSR message.

•

A register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O, monitor item, and parameter functions. The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters . For register numbers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail .

Note 1.

A parameter corresponds to one register (one word), so the “number of registers of read data” indicates the number of parameters to be read (i.e., the number of consecutive registers beginning with the first register number).

Note 2.

The “number of bytes of attached data” indicates the number of bytes of data read from the registers attached from that point onwards. The number of registers must equal the number of bytes divided by two.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (03 Hex)

CRC-16 check

Data

7-11

Communications

Response

Normal

Byte No.

: n–1 n

Slave address

Function code (03 Hex)

Number of bytes of attached data

CRC-16 check

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (83 Hex)

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data

Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

Chapter 7

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Example of Data Read

•

In the following example, four-register data (status signal data) is read from register 0020 Hex of the

Inverter with a Slave address of 02.

7-12

DSR Message

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

CRC-16 check

Data

Data example

(Hex)

Communications

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Chapter 7

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

Number of bytes of attached data

CRC-16 check

Data

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Slave address

Function code

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data example

(Hex)

7-3-2 Data Write/Broadcast Data Write (Function Code: 10 Hex)

Settings and Response

•

To write data to the Inverter, such as control I/O and parameter set value data, issue the following DSR message.

•

Consecutive data of a maximum of 16 words (32 bytes for 16 registers) can be written per DSR message.

•

The register number is allocated to each function item, such as control I/O and parameter functions.

The register number of each parameter is indicated wherever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters . For register numbers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Details .

Note 1.

A parameter corresponds to one register (one word), so the “number of registers of write data” indicates the number of parameters to be written (i.e., the number of consecutive registers beginning with the first register number).

Note 2.

The “number of bytes of attached data” indicates the number of bytes of data written to the registers attached from that point onwards. The number of registers must equal the number of bytes divided by two.

Data example

(Hex)

7-13

Communications

DSR Message

Byte No.

: n–1 n

Slave address

Function code (10 Hex)

Data of start register

CRC-16 check

Data

Chapter 7

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (10 Hex)

CRC-16 check

Data

MS B

LSB

MSB

LSB

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (90 Hex)

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data

Note 1.

When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

Note 2.

A broadcast message uses the same DSR message format. The Slave address is, however, always set to 00 and only register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) and register number 0002

Hex (the frequency reference) can be written.

7-14

Communications Chapter 7

Example of Data Read

• In the following example, two-register data (the RUN command) is written from register 0002 Hex of the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Data

Slave address

Function code

Data of start register

CRC-16 check

MSB

LSB

MSB

LSB

Data example

(Hex)

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

CRC-16 check

Data

Data example

(Hex)

Slave address

Function code

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data example

(Hex)

7-15

Communications

7-3-3 Loop-back Test (Function Code: 08 Hex)

Chapter 7

Settings and Response

•

The DSR message from the Master is returned as a response. The Inverter does not retrieve or process this data.

•

The DSR message or normal response for loop-back test use is divided into 8-byte blocks as shown below. Any data can be set as test data 1 or 2 provided that the number of data items remains changed.

•

This command is used for checking the status of communications or for dummy communications without detecting any communications time-over.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (08 Hex)

Test data 1

Test data 2

CRC-16 check

Data

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (08 Hex)

Test data 1

Test data 2

CRC-16 check

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code (88 Hex)

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data

Note When an error occurs, the MSB of the function code will be set to 1.

7-16

Communications Chapter 7

Example of Loop-back Test

•

In the following example, a loop-back test is conducted on the Inverter with a Slave address of 01.

DSR Message

Byte No.

Data

Slave address

Function code

Test data 1

Test data 2

CRC-16 check

Data example

(Hex)

Response

Normal

Byte No.

Data

Error

Byte No.

Slave address

Function code

Test data 1

Test data 2

CRC-16 check

Data

Data example

(Hex)

Slave address

Function code

Error code

CRC-16 check

Data example

(Hex)

7-17

Communications

7-4 Enter Command

Chapter 7

The Enter command is used for copying parameter set values that have been written through communications in and after register 0101 Hex of the RAM area to the

EEPROM of the Inverter. This is done so that the EEPROM can maintain the parameter set values.

By issuing a DSR message to write data, the data is written to the RAM area of the

Inverter. This data will be lost when the Inverter is turned OFF. Issue the Enter command to store in the EEPROM of the Inverter the parameter set value that has been written through communications.

DSR Message of Enter Command

• The Enter command is issued in response to the DSR message (with a function code of 10 Hex) to write data.

•

By writing data 0000 Hex to be sent to register 0900 Hex, the Inverter copies to the EEPROM all parameter set values that the Inverter has received.

Note 1.

Only the parameter constants (in and after register 0101 Hex) are stored in the EEPROM with the Enter command.

The RUN command (in register No. 0001 Hex) is in the RAM area. The frequency reference

(in register 0002 Hex) or any other data in registers with a number up to 003D Hex is also in the

RAM area. Therefore, the EEPROM does not store these parameters.

Note 2.

Data can be written to the EEPROM a maximum of approximately 100,000 times. Therefore, be sure to reduce the number of Enter commands sent as much as possible.

Enter Command Operation Selection

• The condition under which the Enter command from DeviceNet (3G3MV-PDRT2) or RS-422/485 communications to save parameters in EEPROM can be changed.

n170

Enter Command Operation

Selection

Setting range

0 to 1

Register 01AA Hex Changes during operation

Unit of setting

1 Default setting

Set Values

Value

Description

Accept Enter command only when operation is stopped.

Accept Enter command at any time.

7-18

Communications

7-5 Setting the Communications Data

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on how to convert the register data (such as monitor value or parameter set value data) in the communications data block of the message data (such as DSR and response data).

Converting the Register Data

• The data in each register is sent as 2-byte data.

•

The data in each register is processed under the following rules and sent in hexadecimal.

The data is converted to a hexadecimal value based on the minimum unit of setting of each register as 1.

If the frequency reference is 60 Hz and the minimum unit of setting will be 0.01 Hz, the data will be converted as follows:

60 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 6000 = 1770 Hex

Note 1.

The minimum unit of setting of each parameter is indicated whenever the parameter is explained in this manual and in Section 10 List of Parameters . For registers other than those of parameters, refer to 7-6 Register Number Allocations in Details .

Note 2.

The minimum unit of setting of frequency reference data or frequency monitor data is determined by n152 (register 0198 Hex: RS-422/485 communications frequency reference/monitor unit selection). The unit of setting of each of the three registers below is determined by the set value in n152. For the units of setting of these constants, refer to the List of Parameters .

The set value in n152 has nothing to do with frequency data items set as parameter constants

(e.g., frequency references 1 through 16, inching frequency reference, maximum frequency, minimum output frequency, jump frequency).

Monitor Items

Communications-dedicated Register

In spite of the set value in n152, however, set the maximum frequency to 3000 when the frequency reference is executed with a broadcast message. In this case, the Inverter rounds off any value less than 0.01 Hz.

Note 3.

There are parameters that make setting unit changes when the values are increased with the

Digital Operator. The smaller units are, however, used for communications in such cases. For example, the value in n083 (register 0153 Hex: jump frequency 1) will be set in 0.01-Hz increments if the frequency is less than 100 Hz and 0.1-Hz increments if the frequency is 100 Hz or over. The value 0.01 Hz is always 1 Hex for communications.

If the jump frequency is 100.0 Hz, the minimum unit of setting will be 0.01 Hz and the data will be converted as follows:

100.0 (Hz)/0.01 (Hz) = 10000 = 2710 Hex

7-19

Communications Chapter 7

Negative Values Expressed in 2’s Complements

If the frequency reference bias in n061 is –100%, the minimum unit of setting will be

1% and the data will be converted as follows:

100 (%)/1 (%) = 100 = 0064 Hex

→

2’s complement: FF9C Hex

Bit reversed.

1 is added.

Note Whether the data is positive or negative is determined by the parameter set value.

The MSB of negative-value data is always set to 1. Data with its MSB set to 1 is not, however, always negative-value data.

For example, the setting range of the n083 parameter (register 0153 Hex: jump frequency 1) is within a range from 0.00 to 400.00 Hz. If the jump frequency is 400.0 Hz, the data is obtained from the following formula and its MSB will be 1.

400.0 (Hz)/0.001 (Hz) = 4000 = 9C40 Hex

Setting All Unused Bits to 0

•

Bits 11 through 15 of the RUN command (register 0001 Hex) are unused. When writing the data, be sure to set all of these bits to 0.

These bits when read are set to 0.

No Data Settings in Unused Registers

•

Registers described “not used” may be used for internal processing. Do not write any data to such registers.

7-20

Communications

7-6 Register Number Allocations in Detail

Chapter 7

The following description provides information on register numbers allocated to the

Inverter and the meanings of the registers. As for the register numbers of the parameters

(n001 through n179), refer to Section 10 List of Parameters and the description of each of these parameters wherever explained in this manual.

7-6-1 I/O Function

Communications with a Single Slave with Addresses 01 to 32

(01 to 20 Hex) Read/Write

Function Description Register No.

(Hex)

0000

0001

0002

0003

0004 to 0008

0009

000A to 000F

Not used.

RUN command

Frequency reference

V/f gain

Not used.

Inverter output

Not used.

---

Refer to the table below.

Set the frequency reference in the unit according to the set value in n152.

Set on condition that 100% is 1000 within a range from 2.0 to 200.0% (20 to 2000). (See note 1.)

---

Refer to the table below.

---

Note 1.

The V/f gain is a rate to be multiplied by the output voltage obtained from V/f operation. If 1000

(03E8 Hex) is set, the multiplication rate will be 1.

Note 2.

When the above registers are read, values that are set through communications will be read.

For example, when the RUN command (register 0001) is read, the control input in the register that was previously set through communications will be returned. This is not a value monitored through the input signal terminal.

RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

11 to 15

Bit No.

RUN command (1: RUN)

Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)

External fault (External fault EF0)

Fault reset (1: Fault reset)

Multi-function input 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 2 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 3 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 4 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 5 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 6 (1: ON)

Multi-function input 7 (1: ON)

Not used.

Function

7-21

Communications Chapter 7

Note There is an OR relationship between input from the control terminals and input through communications. Therefore, if multi-function inputs of this register are set to forward/stop and reverse/ stop, it is possible to execute the RUN command through the multi-function inputs. These settings are not, however, recommended because these settings establish two command lines.

Inverter Output (Register 0009 Hex)

Bit No.

3 to 15

Multi-function contact output (1: ON)

Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)

Not used.

Function

Note The settings will be enabled if multi-function outputs 1 through 3 in n057 through n059 are set to

18 for communications output. Then the corresponding output terminal will be turned ON and

OFF through communications.

Broadcast Message with Slave Address: 00 (00 Hex) Write

Function Description Register No.

(Hex)

0000

0001

0002

0003 to 000F

Not used.

RUN command

Frequency reference

Not used.

---

Refer to the table below.

Set the frequency reference based on the maximum frequency as 30,000.

---

Note 1.

Data can be written to registers 0001 and 0002 only.

Note 2.

No data can be written to multi-function input.

Note 3.

The unit of setting of the broadcast message is different from that in the DSR message to communicate with a single Slave.

RUN Command (Register 0001 Hex)

Bit No.

4 to 15

RUN command (1: RUN)

Forward/Reverse (1: Reverse)

External fault (1: External fault EF0)

Fault reset (1: Fault reset)

Not used.

Function

7-6-2 Monitor Functions

Function Register No.

(Hex)

0020

0021

0022

Status signal

Fault status 1

Data link status

7-22

Description

Refer to the following corresponding table.

Communications Chapter 7

Register No.

(Hex)

0023

0024

0025 to 0026

0027

0028

0029

002A

002B

002C

002D

002E

002F to 0030

0031

0032

Function

Frequency reference

Output frequency

Not used.

Output current

Output voltage

Fault status 2 (See note.)

Warning status (See note.)

Input terminal status

Inverter status 1

Output terminal status

Inverter status 2 (See note.)

Not used.

Main circuit DC voltage

Torque reference

Description

According to the set value in n152.

---

Read based on 1 A as 10.

Read based on 1 V as 1.

Refer to the following corresponding table.

---

Read based on 1 V as 1.

Read based on

1% as

1 and the rated motor torque is 100%.

---

Read based on 1 [h] as 1.

0033 to 0034

0035

0036

0037

0038

0039

003A

003B to 003C

003D

003E to 00FF

Not used.

Accumulated operating time

(See note.)

Not used.

Output power

PID feedback

PID input

PID output

Not used.

Communications error

Not used.

---

Read based on ± 1 W as ± 1. Cannot be monitored in vector control mode.

Read based on 1% as 10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as 100%.

Read based on

1% as

10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as 100%.

Read based on

1% as

10 and a value equivalent to the maximum frequency as 100%.

---

Refer to the following corresponding table.

---

Note The fault status 2, warning status, Inverter status 2, and accumulated operating time functions are provided for 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

8 to 15

Status Signal (Register 0020 Hex)

Bit No.

Function

During RUN (1: During RUN)

Forward/reverse operation (1: Reverse operation)

Inverter ready (1: Ready)

Fault (1: Fault)

Data setting error (1: Error)

Multi-function output 1 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 2 (1: ON)

Multi-function output 3 (1: ON)

Not used.

7-23

Communications Chapter 7

Fault Status 1 (Register 0021 Hex)

Bit No.

Function

OL2

Not used.

FBL

EF j

, STP

Bit No.

Note When a fault results, the corresponding bit will be set to 1.

F j

OL1

OL3

Not used.

UV1

UV2

OPR

Function

Data Link Status (Register 0022 Hex)

1 to 2

5 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Data writing (1: Writing)

Not used.

Upper and lower limit error (1: Error): Outside set range

Verify error (1: Error): Same as OPE j .

Not used.

Fault Status 2 (Register 0029 Hex)

Bit No.

6 to 15

Not used.

Function

7-24

Communications

Warning Status (Register 002A Hex)

Bit No.

9 to 11

STP (Emergency stop)

SER

OL3

FAN

Not used.

OH3

FBL

STP (Emergency stop)

Not used.

Function

Input Terminal Status (Register 002B Hex)

7 to 15

Bit No.

Function

Multi-function input terminal 1 (S1) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 2 (S2) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 3 (S3) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 4 (S1) (4: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 5 (S5) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 6 (S6) (1: ON)

Multi-function input terminal 7 (S7) (1: ON)

Not used.

Chapter 7

7-25

Communications Chapter 7

Inverter Status 1 (Register 002C Hex)

Bit No.

Function

During RUN (1: During RUN)

Zero speed (1: Zero speed)

Frequency agree (1: Frequency agree)

Warning (Nonfatal error) (1: Warning)

Frequency detection 1 (1: Output frequency x

n095)

Frequency detection 2 (1: Output frequency y n095)

Inverter ready (1: Ready)

UV (1: UV)

Base block (1: Base block)

Frequency reference mode (1: Other than communications)

RUN command mode (1: Other than communications)

Overtorque detection (1: Overtorque detection)

Not used.

Fault retry (1: Fault retry)

Fault (1: Fault)

Communications time-over: No normal communications for 2 s or more

(1: Communications time-over detecting)

Output Terminal Status (Register 002D Hex)

Bit No.

3 to 15

Function

Multi-function contact output terminal MA (1: ON)

Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 1 (P1) (1: ON)

Multi-function photocoupler output terminal 2 (P2) (1: ON)

Not used.

Inverter Status 2 (Register 002E Hex)

Bit No.

1 to 15

Frequency reference loss

Not used.

Function

Communications Error (Register 003D Hex)

7 to 15

Bit No.

CRC error (1: Error)

Data length error (1: Error)

Not used.

Parity error (1: Error)

Overrun error (1: Error)

Framing error (1: Error)

Communications time-over (1: Error)

Not used.

Function

7-26

Communications

7-7 Communications Error Codes

Chapter 7

The Inverter will detect a communications error if normal communications fail or a message data error occurs.

The Inverter returns a response that consists of the Slave address, function code with the MSB set to 1, error code, and CRC-16 check block when the communications error is detected.

When the Master receives an error code, refer to the following table for troubleshooting and remedying the error.

Errors and Remedies

Name Error code

01 Hex

02 Hex

03 Hex

Probable cause

Function code error The function code is set to a code other than 03,

08, or 10 Hex.

The specified register number has not been registered.

Data number error

An attempt was made to read the register of the

Enter command.

The number of write or read registers is not within a range from 1 to 16 (0001 and 0010 Hex).

The number of registers of the DSR message multiplied by two does not coincide with the number of bytes of the attached data.

21 Hex

The data set is illegal and causes an OPE (OPE1 through OPE9) error.

Remedy

Check and correct the function code.

Check and correct

Check and correct the number of registers or the number of bytes.

and correct the data.

7-27

Communications

Error code

22 Hex

Name

Write mode error

Chapter 7

Probable cause Remedy

The Inverter in operation received a DSR message to write data to a parameter that prohibits any data to be written while the Inverter is running.

The Enter command was received while the

Inverter is running.

The Inverter detecting UV received a DSR message to write data.

The Inverter detecting UV received the Enter command.

The Inverter detecting F04 for an initialization memory fault received a DSR message other than that for parameter initialization (with n001 set to 8 or 9).

The Inverter processing data written received a

DSR message to write data.

A DSR message to a read-only register was received.

Write the data after stopping the

Inverter.

Write the data after restoring the UV undervoltage) status.

Turn the Inverter

OFF and ON after parameter initialization with n001 set to 8 or 9.

Wait for an elapse period equivalent to

24 bits plus a minimum of 10 ms to issue the message after a response is received from the

Inverter.

Check and correct the register number.

7-28

Communications

7-8 Self-diagnostic Test

Chapter 7

The Inverter incorporates a self-diagnostic test function that checks whether

RS-422/485 communications are functioning.

If the Inverter has a communications failure, take the steps provided below to check whether the communications function of the Inverter is normal.

Self-diagnostic Test Steps

Set the Parameter

Set n056 for multi-function input 7 (S7) to 35 through the Digital Operator.

Turn OFF the Inverter and Wire the Terminal

Turn OFF the Inverter and wire the following control terminals. At this time, make sure that all other circuit terminals are open.

Set SW1 to NPN.

Connect S7 and SC.

Connect R+ and S+.

Connect R– and S–.

Turn ON the Inverter and Check the Display

Turn ON the Inverter.

S Check the display on the Digital Operator.

Normal

The display is normal with no error code displayed.

Fault

The display shows “CE” (communications time-over) or “CAL” (communications standby). In either case, the communications circuit of the Inverter is broken. Replace the Inverter.

7-29

Communications

7-9 Communications with Programmable Controller

Chapter 7

The Communications Board can be mounted to OMRON’s SYSMAC CS/CJ-series or

C200HX/HG/HE CPU Unit. The Inverter can then be controlled by the Communications

Board through its RS-422/485 port.

The communications protocol can be set by using the protocol macro function. Therefore, there is no need to write a ladder program for the communications protocol when the function is used.

The following description provides information on how to control the Inverter through communications with the SYSMAC CS/CJ-series or C200HX/HG/HE Communications

Board by using the protocol macro function.

The RS-422/485 communications of the 3G3MV Inverter conform to the MODBUS

Communications Protocol and this protocol cannot be used together with DeviceNet communications protocol or any other communications protocol. Only 3G3MV-series

Units can be connected as Slaves.

(The MODBUS Communications Protocol is a trademark of AEG Schneider Automation.)

7-9-1 Available Programmable Controllers and Peripheral

Devices

OMRON’s SYSMAC CS/CJ-series or C200HX/HG/HE Programmable

Controller

•

The following Communications Boards are needed to use the RS-422/485 communications port.

Note The RS-232C port can be used if an RS-422/485 conversion adapter is installed. For ease of wiring, however, it is recommended that the RS-422/485 port be used. The following information is for the RS-422/485 port.

7-30

Communications Chapter 7

Series

SYSMAC CS

SYSMAC CJ

Communications

Board/Unit

CS1W-SCB41(-V1)

CJ1W-SCU41(-V1)

Mounting method

As an Inner Board of the

CPU Unit

CPU Bus Unit

Specifications

• One RS-232C port

•

One RS-422/485 port

•

Protocol macro function

•

One RS-232C port

• One RS-422/485 port

• Protocol macro function

• One RS-232C port

• One RS-422/485 port

•

Protocol macro function

SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE

SYSMAC

CQM1H

C200HW-COM06-V1

Note Make sure that the model number has the suffix “V1,” as the

CRC-16 check code is used.

CQM1H-SCB41

(Can be used with the

CQM1H-CPU61/51)

Mounted to an optional slot of the CPU Unit

As an Inner Board of the

CPU Unit

• One RS-232C port

•

One RS-422/485 port

•

Protocol macro function

Note Refer to the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Serial Communications Board/Unit Operation Manual (Cat.

No. W336) for information on RS-232C communications.

Peripheral Devices

•

The following peripheral devices are required to use the protocol macro function.

Name

CX-Protocol

Model

WS02-PSTC1-E

Specification

The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the SYSMAC CS/CJ Series.

Personal computer environment

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer Personal computer

CPU

Memory

Hard disk

Monitor

Drive

Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz

Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster

Microsoft Windows 95, 98, Me, 2000, or XP

Minimum: 16 MB

Recommended: 24 MB min.

Minimum: Available space of 24 MB

Recommended: Available space of 50 MB

SVGA or better

FDD: 1 or more

CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

7-31

Communications

Name

Protocol

Model

WS01-PSTF1-E

Chapter 7

Specification

The following peripheral devices support the protocol macro function of the SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE.

Personal computer environment

IBM PC/AT or compatible computer Personal computer

CPU

Minimum requirement: Pentium 90 MHz

Recommended: Pentium 166 MHz or faster

Microsoft Windows 95 or Windows 98

Memory

Hard disk

Monitor

Drive

Minimum: 16 MB

Recommended: 24 MB min.

Minimum: Available space of 24 MB

Recommended: Available space of 50 MB

SVGA or better

FDD: 1 or more

CD-ROM drive: 1 or more

Peripheral Devices and Support Software Manuals

•

Refer to the following manuals for more details on all peripheral devices and support software.

Cat. No.

W339

W393

W394

W340

W336

W344

W302

W303

W319

W363

W364

W365

Name

SYSMAC CS Series Programmable Controller Operation Manual

SYSMAC CJ Series Programmable Controller Operation Manual

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programmable Controller Programming Manual

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series Programmable Controller Instructions Reference Manual

SYSMAC CS/CJ Serial Communications Boards/Units Operation Manual

SYSMAC CX-Protocol Operation Manual

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controller Installation Guide

SYSMAC C200HX/HG/HE Programmable Controller Operation Manual

SYSMAC Protocol Support Tool Operation Manual

SYSMAC CQM1H Series Programmable Controllers/Inner Boards Operation Manual

SYSMAC CQM1H Series Programmable Controllers/Inner Boards Programming Manual

SYSMAC CQM1H Series Serial Communications Board Operation Manual

7-32

Communications

7-9-2 Wiring the Communications Line

Chapter 7

Connector Pin Arrangements of CS1W-SCB41(-V1) and

C200HW-COM06-EV1

Pin No.

Frame

Code

SDA

SDB

RDA

RDB

Signal name

Send data (–)

Send data (+)

---

Recv data (–)

---

Recv data (+)

---

Output

---

Input

---

Input

---

I/O

Standard Connection Diagram

RS-485 (2-wire)

Communications Board

Code Pin No.

RS-422

/485

Interface

Frame

9-pin, D-sub connector

(Cable side: Male)

Shielded line

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Note Be sure to set the terminal resistance of only the Inverter at each end to ON and that any other

Inverter to OFF. Refer to page 2-18, Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance for details.

7-33

Communications Chapter 7

RS-422 (4-wire)

Communications Board

Code Pin No.

Shielded line

RS-422/485

Interface

B500-AL001 Link Adapter

Pin No. Code Code Pin No.

Shielded line

RS-422

Interface

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Frame

9-pin, D-sub connector

(Cable side: Male)

Code

Pin No.

Shielded line

3G3MV

Code

Control circuit terminal block

(communications terminals)

Note Turn the terminal resistance of all the Inverters to ON for RS-422 communications. Refer to page

2-18, Selecting RS-422/485 Termination Resistance for details.

7-9-3 Outline of Protocol Macro Function

Protocol Macro Function

•

The protocol macro function makes it possible to customize a communications protocol in order to create a macro according to the specifications of the serial communications port of the general-purpose peripheral device.

•

The protocol macro function is mainly used for the following jobs.

Creation of message communications frame.

Creation of Send & Recv procedures for message communications frame.

Note This manual uses the terms “message, DSR message, and response” to express the communications data exchanged.

Message: A DSR message or response.

DSR Message: A message sent by the Master for instructions to the Inverter.

Response: A message that the Inverter returns in compliance with a DSR message from the Master.

7-34

Communications Chapter 7

Creating a Message

•

The message can be created according to the communications specifications of the general-purpose peripheral device (Inverter) as a counterpart.

•

A DSR message can include variables to set data in the I/O memory (such as data memory) of the

CPU Unit or write response data to the I/O memory.

• Each component of a message is in the memory of the Communications Board. Therefore, the CPU

Unit can just execute the PMCR instruction to send or receive the data. Therefore, there is no need to write ladder programs for the communications protocol.

CPU Unit

Communications

Board 3G3MV

DSR message

PMCR instruction

Send

Reception

Response

Step to Send and Receive Messages

•

Sending and receiving messages as a single step includes step-type commands, such as Send, Recv,

Send & Recv, and Wait commands.

•

The step can be finished or switched to another step according to the result of the step.

CPU Unit

Communications

Board

3G3MV

PMCR instruction

Step 0

Next process according to the result.

To step n according to the result.

Configuration of Protocol Macro Function

•

The protocol consists of one or more sequences.

A sequence is an independent set of actions to perform together with a general-purpose peripheral device, such as an Inverter. The RUN command and the frequency reference are given to the Inverter and the status of the Inverter is read in a single sequence, for example.

•

A sequence consists of one or more steps.

7-35

Communications Chapter 7

Sequence

•

When repeating actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions can be registered as one sequence, or more than one if necessary. In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example is shown with all actions registered as a single sequence.

•

A sequence may include the following parameters.

Parameter

Transmission control parameter

Link word

Monitor time

Response notify method

Description

Set the method of control, such as flow control.

Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.

Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and

Communications Board.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example is shown without such an area set.

Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs.

Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.

A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable

Controller.

Note Select “notify by scan” for communications with the 3G3MV.

Communications Board

CPU Unit 3G3MV

PMCR instruction

Step 00

DSR message

(Write the RUN command and frequency reference.)

Response

Step 01

DSR message

Inverter status read

Sequence 000

Response

(Inverter status)

Step

•

In a single step, a DSR message is sent and a response for the DSR message is received. A step may not include a response if it is a broadcast message.

•

In the case of repetitive actions to issue the RUN command and frequency reference to the Inverter and read the status of the Inverter, for example, the actions to give the RUN command and frequency reference is one step. The reason is that these register numbers are consecutive and can be sent with a single DSR message. The action to read the status of the Inverter is another step.

• A step includes a command and a maximum of two messages.

The above example uses the Send & Recv command. The DSR message and response are both messages.

•

A step may include the following parameters.

7-36

Communications Chapter 7

Command

Parameter Description

The Send, Send & Recv, Wait, Flush, Open (ER-ON), or Close

(ER-OFF) command is set.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example is shown with the

Send & Recv command used. The Send command is used for a broadcast message.

A DSR message is set for the Send command used.

Send message

Repeat counter

Number of retries

Recv message A response is set for the Recv command.

Send & Recv message A DSR message and response are set for the Send & Recv command.

Recv matrix If there are two or more responses for the Send or Send & Recv command, the next process is selected per response.

The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.

It is possible to change messages by making use of the number

(N).

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example is shown with this function used for enabling three Slaves to repeat the same process.

The number of times to retry the command can be set within a range from 0 to 9 only when the Send & Recv command is used.

Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger.

Send Wait Time

Response Write (with operand specified) Determines whether or not to write the reception data in the response.

Note In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example is shown with this function used for writing the Inverter status to the memory.

Next process

The waiting time until data is sent with the Send or Send & Recv command executed.

Error processing

Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the operation after the step is finished normally.

Determines which step is to be processed next or finishes the operation, if the step has an error.

7-37

Communications Chapter 7

Data Created by Protocol Support Tool

•

A project file is used by the Protocol Support Tool to create and control data.

A project file consists of the following data.

Single project file Protocol list Protocol name

Protocol name

A maximum of 20 protocols

(A maximum of 1,000 sequences per project)

Protocol name

Trace list

PLC

Protocol name

(Single protocol)

Sequence 000/Sequence name

Sequence 001/Sequence name

Sequence 999/Sequence name

Send message list

A maximum of 60 sequences/protocol

The first sequence number and last sequence number are specified by each protocol.

Message name

Recv message list

Message name

A maximum of

300 messages

Recv matrix

Message name

Matrix name

A maximum of

100 matrixes

Sequence # jjj Step 00

Step 01

A maximum of 16 steps

Step 15

Note The standard system protocol incorporated by the Communications Board cannot be edited or transferred. To make use of the standard system protocol, copy it to the project file and edit it.

In 7-9-4 Creating a Project File , an example to create a new project file is shown without making use of the standard system protocol.

7-9-4 Creating a Project File

•

The following description provides information about how to create a project file to issue the RUN command and frequency reference and read the Inverter status.

Design

•

Select from I/O items, monitor items, and parameters the data to be exchanged according to the application. Then consider what sequence is required by using the protocol macro function.

Example: Writes control input items (such as the RUN command and multi-function input) of the

Inverter and frequency reference, monitors the control output (such as error output and RUN out-

7-38

Communications Chapter 7 put) of the Inverter, and monitors the Inverter status.

Three Inverters with Slave addresses from 01 to 03 are installed for communications.

Checking the Register Numbers

•

In the above example, the following three registers are required.

Control Input:

Frequency Reference:

Control Output:

Memory Allocations

•

The PMCR instruction sends each Slave the data in consecutive words specified by the operand and beginning with the first word (S), and writes in the memory area beginning with the first word (D) the data received.

•

The following memory allocations are made in the above example.

SYSMAC CS/CJ-series or C200HX/HG/HE

Programmable Controllers

C: Control data (See note.)

Communications

Board 3G3MV

Note Control data on the SYSMAC

C200HX/HG/HE is indicated. The

SYSMAC CS/CJ Series uses different control data.

Communications port

1: Port A

2: Port B

Data

Sequence No.

000 to 999 (BCD)

No. of data items send in accordance with PMCR instruction (000B)

No. of Slaves (0003)

First Slave address (0001)

RUN command to Slave 1

Frequency reference to Slave 1

Second Slave address (0002)

RUN command to Slave 2

Frequency reference to Slave 2

Third Slave address (0003)

RUN command to Slave 3

Frequency reference to Slave 3

No. of data items received in accordance with

PMCR instruction (0004)

Slave 1 Inverter status

Slave 2 Inverter status

Slave 3 Inverter status

Creating a New Project and Protocol

1. Select New from the File in the Menu Bar or click on the New icon with the left button of the mouse to create a new project.

2. If CX-Protocol is used, set the PLC name, PLC model, and network type according to the actual conditions.

7-39

Communications Chapter 7

Note 1.

The network type refers to the type of the network connected to the Support Software and it does not refer to the communications configuration between the Programmable Controller and the 3G3MV Inverter.

Note 2.

The above settings will not be displayed if the Protocol Support Tool is used.

3. Double-click on New Project with the left button of the mouse to display Protocol List.

4. Click on Protocol List with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

5. Select Create Protocol .

Creating a Sequence

1. Click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse. Then click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

2. Select Create communication Sequence .

The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the sequence in the table.

* # Communicat ion sequence

000 Inverter I/O

Send & Recv

---

Link word Control

Set (Setting required)

Response Timer Tr Timer

Tfr

Scan 0.5

0.5

Timer

Tfs

0.5

#

Sequence number. The sequence number is automatically set.

Communication Sequence

The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Link Word

Set the area for sharing the data between the Programmable Controller and Communications Board.

Note In this example, the link word is specified by the operand of the PMCR instruction. Therefore, no link word is set here.

Control

Set the control method, such as flow control.

Note Select only model control for communications with the 3G3MV.

Response

A method to write reception data to the I/O memory of the Programmable Controller.

Note Select “notify by scan” for communications with the 3G3MV.

7-40

Communications Chapter 7

Timer Tr

Timer Tfr

Timer Tfs

Set the periods to monitor the transmission and reception steps with timers Tr, Tfr, and Tfs. The following timing chart shows the meaning of each monitor.

Be sure to set the periods according to the application.

The step will be retried if the step is not completed within the monitor periods. An error will occur if the step is not completed within the monitor time again.

Note Set a period of approximately 0.5 s each for communications with the 3G3MV.

Send & Recv

Monitored for Tr period.

Monitored for Tfs period.

Monitored for Tfr period.

Ts: Send wait time set per step. Nothing is sent during this period.

Tfs: Monitors the completion of the data sent. If the data transmission is not finished within this period, the data will be re-transmitted.

Tr: Monitors the response to be received. If the response is not returned within this period, the response will be re-transmitted.

Tfr: Monitors the reception completion of the response. If the response transmission is not finished within this period, the response will be re-transmitted.

Note If the Tr period is too long, the time required to detect a communications error will be longer, during which the Inverter cannot be controlled. Therefore, be sure to set an appropriate period.

Creating a Step

1. Double-click on New Protocol with the left button of the mouse.

2. Click on New Sequence with the left button of the mouse and click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

3. Select Create Step .

The following table will appear. Set the parameters related to the step in the table.

* Step Repeat Command j 00 j 01

Reset/R

(1)

Reset/R

(1)

Send &

Receive

Send &

Receive

Retry

---

Send wait

Send message

Input send

Status

Recv message

Response

Input response

Read response

Yes

Next

End

Error

Abort

Abort j

Step

Step number. The step number is automatically set.

7-41

Communications Chapter 7

Repeat

The number (N) of times to repeat the step is set within a range from 0 to 255.

It is possible to change messages by making use of the number (N).

Note In this example, the same message is sent to three Slaves with addresses different to each other.

Therefore, the number is set to 3 in word S + 1. The number of Slaves is specified by the operand.

Therefore, select Channel , use the Edit command to set Data Address to Operand , and set 0N +

1 in order to select word S + 1.

In the above table, “Reset” means that the repeat counter must be reset first in the step.

Command

Set the commands, such as Send, Recv, and Send & Recv.

Note Only the Send & Recv command is used for communications with the 3G3MV except for sending broadcast messages, in which case the Send & Receive command is used.

Retry

Set the number of times to retry the command within a range from 0 to 9.

Note It is recommended that the number be set to 3 or larger. If a transmission error occurs due to noise, the transmission of the command will be retried. If the number is set to 3, an error will be detected if the transmission fails three times.

Send Wait

The waiting time until the data is sent.

Note For communications with the 3G3MV, if data is repeatedly transmitted to the same Slave, set the waiting time to 20 ms or more.

In this example, the DSR message is sent to Slaves 1, 2, and 3 one by one. Therefore, no send wait time is set.

Send Message and Recv Message

Set the labels of the DSR message and response to be used.

Note Make these settings after deciding the labels in Send Message Detail Settings and Recv Message Detail Settings .

Response

Determine whether or not to write the reception data in the response.

Note Always set this parameter to Yes for communications with 3G3MV.

Determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation after the step finishes normally.

Note In this example, step 00 is set to Next and step 01 is set to END because the sequence completes by executing steps 00 and 01.

Error

If the step has an error, determine which step is to be processed next or finish the operation.

Note In this example, the parameter will be set to Abort to interrupt the sequence if an error occurs.

7-42

Communications Chapter 7

Send Message Detail Settings

1. Click on Send Message List with the left button of the mouse, and then click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

2. Select Create Send Message . The following table will appear. Set the send message in the table.

* Message

Name

→ j

Input send

→ j Status

Header

<h>

Terminator

<t>

Check code <c>

CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte

BIN)

~ CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte

BIN)

Length

<l>

(0) (1Byte

BIN)

Address <a> Data

(R (3N+2), 1) <a> + [10] + [00] +

[01] + [00] + [02] +

(R (3N + 3), 4) +

<c>

~ (R (3N+2), 1) <a> + [03] + [00] +

[2C] + [00] + [01] +

<c>

→ j

Message Name

The label (name) of the sequence. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Note Set the label in the send message box in the table shown under Creating a Step .

Header <h>

Terminator <t>

Set the header and terminator.

Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to

None.

Check Code <c>

Set the check code.

Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the CRC-16 check code and set the default value to 65535.

Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN for date type.

Length <l>

Set the length of the data.

Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN . Select

No for reading data because there is no data to be read.

Address <a>

Set the addresses of the Slaves.

Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those locations.

The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse , otherwise the data is read from the LSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse.

7-43

Communications Chapter 7

Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to repeat the step.

Set Edit Length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.

Data

Set the DSR message in details.

• DSR Message Requesting that the RUN Command and Frequency Reference be Written

The DSR message to write data to two registers from register 0001 Hex (the RUN command) consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Next register data

Set with variables

Start register data

Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)

Number of write data registers: 2

Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + + (R (3N + 3), 4) + <c>

<a>

The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.

[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]

Set the constants contained in the DSR message.

Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.

The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the succeeding data (R(3N + 3), 4). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

(R(3N+3), 4)

The Inverter’s actual data to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to 3N + 3 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from S + 3, S +

6, and S + 9.

Set Edit Length to 0N + 4 so that it will be set to four bytes.

<c>

The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the data including the address data before the check code is operated. Mark all the items if the Protocol

Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

7-44

Communications Chapter 7

•

DSR Message to Read the Inverter Status

The DSR message to read the Inverter status from register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of read data registers: 1

Read start register number (Inverter status: 002C)

Function code (Read 03)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [03] + [00] + [2C] + [00] + [01] + <c>

Set the address data, constant data, and check code data.

Recv Message Detail Settings

1. With the left button of the mouse, click on Receive Message List . Then click on a blank space with the right button of the mouse.

2. Select Create Receive Message.

The following table will appear. Set the Receive message in the table.

* Message Header

<h>

→ j

Input response

→ j

Read response

Terminator

<t>

Check code

<c>

CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte BIN)

CRC-16

(65535)

(2Byte BIN)

Length

<l>

(0) (1Byte

BIN)

Address

<a>

(R (3N+2),

Data

<a> + [10] + [00] +

[01] + [00] + [02] +

<c>

<a> + [03] + + (W

(1N + 1), 2) + <c>

→ j

Message

The label (name) of the response. Input an appropriate, easy-to-distinguish name.

Note Set the label in the Recv message box in the table shown under Creating a Step .

Header <h>

Terminator <t>

Set the header and terminator.

Note No header or terminator is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Therefore, set both to

None .

Check Code <c>

Set the check code.

Note The CRC-16 check code is used for communications with the 3G3MV. Select the CRC-16 check code and set the initial value to 65535.

Select Reverse for the conversion method. Then select BIN as the data type.

Length <l>

Set the length of the data.

Note All communications with the 3G3MV are performed in byte units. Select 1 Byte and BIN . Select

No for reading data because there is no data to be read.

7-45

Communications Chapter 7

Address <a>

Set the addresses of the Slaves.

Note In this example, the Slave addresses are set in S + 2, S + 5, and S + 8. Therefore, retrieve the data from those locations.

The address is set in the LSB of each word. To read the byte, select Variable Reverse , otherwise the data will be read from the LSB. Then click on Edit Variable with the left button of the mouse.

Select Read R () and set Data/Address to the operand (3N + 2) using the number (N) of times to repeat the step.

Set Edit Length to 1 byte as a default. If the default value has been changed, set it to 0N + 1.

Data

Set the expected response in details.

•

Response to the RUN Command and Frequency Reference

The response to the DSR message written consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Number of write data registers: 2

Write start register number (RUN command: 0001)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02] + <c>

<a>

The Slave address is set in the address box. Insert the address with the Insert icon.

[10] + [00] + [01] + [00] + [02]

Set the constants contained in the response.

Use Set Constant and set the constants in Hex.

<c>

The check code is set in the check code box. Insert the check code by using the Insert icon. All the data including the address data before the check code is used. Mark all the items if the Protocol

Support Tool is used. The check code is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

•

Response to the Inverter Status Read

The response to the DSR message to request the Inverter status in register 002C Hex consists of the following items.

CRC-16 check (Set with <c>)

Inverter status data (Set with variable)

Number of bytes of attached data (set with <l>)

Function code (Write 10)

Slave address (Set with <a>)

Set data: <a> + [03] + + (W (1N + 1), 2) + <c>

<a., [03], <c>

The address data, constant data, and check code data are the same as the above.

7-46

Communications Chapter 7

<l>

The length is set in the length box. Insert the length by using the Insert icon. The length is the number of bytes of the succeeding data (W(1N + 1), 2). The length is automatically set by the CX-Protocol.

(W(1N + 1), 2)

The Inverter’s actual data is to be sent. This example selects Variable and Read R() and sets the operand. Set Data to 1N + 1 because the RUN command data uses four bytes each from D + 3, D + 6, and D +

Set Edit Length to 0N + 2 so that it will be set to two bytes.

7-9-5 Ladder Program

•

Transfer the created protocol to the Communications Board.

•

The following example describes how to control the Inverter with this protocol.

•

Before using this program in your system, be sure to check the word and data memory allocations and change them if necessary so that there will be no word or data memory duplication.

•

This program will stop all communications if a communications error or fault occurs. Be sure to set n151 for communications time-over detection selection to 0 through 2 so that the system will stop with time-over detection.

Memory Allocations

Starting Communications and Status Signals

00000

00001

00002

Word Functions common to all Slaves

Inverter control communications (continued when set to ON)

Communications error output (on hold when a communications error or fault occurs)

Communications fault reset

Inverter Control Input (Register 0001 RUN Command)

Word Slave 1 function

00100 RUN command

00101 Forward/Reverse

00102 External fault

00103 Fault reset

00104 Multi-function input 1

00105 Multi-function input 2

00106 Multi-function input 3

00107 Multi-function input 4

00108 Multi-function input 5

00109 Multi-function input 6

00110 Multi-function input 7

00111 Always set to 0.

00112 Always set to 0.

00113 Always set to 0.

00114 Always set to 0.

00115 Always set to 0.

Word Slave 2 function

00200 RUN command

00201 Forward/Reverse

00202 External fault

00203 Fault reset

00204 Multi-function input 1

00205 Multi-function input 2

00206 Multi-function input 3

00207 Multi-function input 4

00208 Multi-function input 5

00209 Multi-function input 6

00210 Multi-function input 7

00211 Always set to 0.

00212 Always set to 0.

00213 Always set to 0.

00214 Always set to 0.

00215 Always set to 0.

Word Slave 3 function

00300 RUN command

00301 Forward/Reverse

00302 External fault

00303 Fault reset

00304 Multi-function input 1

00305 Multi-function input 2

00306 Multi-function input 3

00307 Multi-function input 4

00308 Multi-function input 5

00309 Multi-function input 6

00310 Multi-function input 7

00311 Always set to 0.

00312 Always set to 0.

00313 Always set to 0.

00314 Always set to 0.

00315 Always set to 0.

7-47

Communications

Frequency Reference of Inverter (Register 0002 Frequency Reference)

DM Function

D0001

D0002

D0003

Slave 1 frequency reference

Slave 2 frequency reference

Slave 3 frequency reference

Chapter 7

Inverter Control Output (Register 002C Inverter Status)

Word Slave 1 function

01100 During RUN

01101 Zero speed

Word Slave 2 function

01200 During RUN

01201 Zero speed

Word Slave 3 function

01300 During RUN

01301 Zero speed

01102 Frequency agree 01202 Frequency agree 01302 Frequency agree

01103 Warning (Nonfatal error) 01203 Warning (Nonfatal error) 01303 Warning (Nonfatal error)

01104 Frequency detection 1

01105 Frequency detection 2

01204

01205

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2

01304

01305

Frequency detection 1

Frequency detection 2

01106 Inverter ready

01107 UV

01108 Base block

01109 Frequency reference mode

01110 RUN command mode

01111 Overtorque detection

01112 0 (Not used.)

01113 Fault retry

01114 Fault

01115 Communications timeover

01206

01207

01208

01209 Frequency reference mode

01210 RUN command mode

01211

01212

01213

01214

01215

Inverter ready

Base block

Overtorque detection

0 (Not used.)

Fault retry

Fault

Communications timeover

01306

01307

01308

01312

01313

01314

01315

Inverter ready

Base block

01309 Frequency reference mode

01310 RUN command mode

01311 Overtorque detection

0 (Not used.)

Fault retry

Fault

Communications timeover

Area Used by Operand of PMCR Instruction

• Control Data: C1

Area

Communications port 7

Serial port 2

Communications port E1

•

Control Data: C2

Area

Set sequence number 000.

7-48

Communications Chapter 7

•

Send Data: S

D1000

D1001

D1002

D1003

D1004

D1005

D1006

D1007

D1008

D1009

D1010

•

Recv data: D

D2000

D2001

D2002

D2003

Area

000B (Number of send data items: 11) (See note 1.)

0003 (Number of Slaves)

0001 (Slave 1 address)

RUN command to Slave 1

Frequency reference to Slave 1

0002 (Slave 2 address)

RUN command to Slave 2

Frequency reference to Slave 2

0003 (Slave 3 address)

RUN command to Slave 3

Frequency reference to Slave 3

Area

0004 (Number of Recv data items: 4) (See note 2.)

Slave 1 Inverter status

Slave 2 Inverter status

Slave 3 Inverter status

Note 1.

Set the number of send data items in Hex to the number of words of D10001 through D1010

(11).

Note 2.

The number of words of D2001 through D2003 (4) is written in Hex for the number of Recv data items.

Status Flags

Network Communications Command Execution Enabled Flag

Communications port 7 enabled setting: A20207

Protocol Macro Execution Flag

The following table describes the Protocol Macro Execution Flag.

Model

CS-series Board

CS-series Unit

Port 1

190915

((n+9) words)15

Port 2

191915

((n+10) words)15 n = 1500 + 25 x unit number (words)

Forced Abort Issued Flag

The following table describes the Forced Abort Issued Flag.

Model

CS-series Board

CS-series Unit

Port 1

190913

((n+9) words)13

Port 2

191913

((n+10) words)13 n = 1500 + 25 x unit number (words)

7-49

Communications

Ladder Program

Communications

Port Abort Flag

Chapter 7

Protocol

Macro

Execution

Flag

Communications

Port Enabled

Flag

7-50

Communications Chapter 7

7-9-6 Communications Response Time

The communications response times for communications with an Inverter via the RS-422/485 port of an

OMRON-made Communications Board are detailed below. Use this information as a reference when deciding the number of Slaves to be connected to one network, and when considering the timing of input and output signals.

Communications Time for One Message

•

A wide variety of programs for RS-422/485 communications can be created using the protocol macro function. The communications times will vary according to the contents of the program.

•

In general, the communications time for one message can be calculated using the following formula.

Communications time = [Number of bytes in DSR message

10 (See note 1.)

(1/baud rate)

1,000 (ms)] + [Number of bytes in response

(1/baud rate)

1,000 (ms)] + [24

(1/baud rate)

1,000 (ms)] + send wait time setting n156 (ms) + protocol macro waiting time (See note 2.) (ms)

Note 1.

The reason that the number of bytes in the DSR message and response is multiplied by 10 is because both the start bit and the stop bit require one bit each.

(1 byte = 8 bits) + (start bit: 1 bit) + (stop bit: 1 bit) = 10 bits

Note 2.

With RS-422/485 communications, set at least 20 ms as the protocol macro waiting time.

Calculation Example

The communications time required for one Slave in the protocol macro created in 7-9-7 Creating a Project File , can be calculated according to the following formula. (Baud rate = 19,200 bps.)

Communications time = [(DSR message to write data (13 bytes) + DSR message to read (8 bytes))

(1/19,200)

1,000 (ms)] + [(write response (8 bytes) + read response (7 bytes))

(1/19,200)

1,000 (ms)] + [24

(1/19,200)

1,000 (ms)

2] + [10 (ms)

2] + [20 (ms)

2] =

81.2 (ms)

Note If there are N Slaves, the total communications time will be N

81.2 ms. Consequently, the more

Slaves that are used, the longer the communications time will be. If the number of Slaves is too high, it is possible that the detection time of 2 s for communications time-over will be exceeded. In this case, either disable the time-over detection function and use a different sequence to detect communications errors, or increase the number of Masters thereby decreasing the number of

Slaves per Master.

I/O Response Time

• The communications processing times for the Inverter are as follows.

Inverter communications input scan: 8 ms

Inverter communications output scan: 8 ms

Internal processing time for the Inverter: Approx. 20 ms

•

The I/O response times for the Inverter are illustrated in the following diagram.

Ladder program cycle time

Communications time × 2

Inverter I/O scan

Internal processing for the Inverter

Max. input response time

Max. output response time

7-51

Maintenance

Operations

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

8-2 Troubleshooting

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 8

Maintenance Operations

8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions

Chapter 8

8-1-1 Fault Detection (Fatal Errors)

The Inverter will detect the following faults if the Inverter or motor burns or the internal circuitry of the Inverter malfunctions. When the Inverter detects a fault, the fault code will be displayed on the Digital Operator, the fault contact output will operate, and the

Inverter output will be shut off causing the motor to coast to a stop. The stopping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected stopping method will be used with these faults. If a fault has occurred, refer to the following table to identify and correct the cause of the fault. Use one of the following methods to reset the fault after restarting the

Inverter. If the operation command is being input, however, the reset signal will be ignored. Therefore, be sure to reset the fault with the operation command turned OFF.

• Turn ON the fault reset signal. A multi-function input (n050 to n056) must be set to 5

(Fault Reset).

•

Press the STOP/RESET Key on the Digital Operator.

•

Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again.

Fault Displays and Processing

Fault name and meaning Fault display

%c Overcurrent (OC)

The Inverter output current is as high as or higher than

250% of the rated output current.

Probable cause and remedy

•

A short-circuit or ground fault has occurred and at the

Inverter output.

→

Check and correct the motor power cable.

•

The V/f setting is incorrect.

→

Reduce the V/f set voltage.

•

The motor capacity is too large for the Inverter.

→

Reduce the motor capacity to the maximum applicable motor capacity.

• The magnetic contactor on the output side of the Inverter has been opened and closed.

→ Rearrange the sequence so that the magnetic contactor will not open or close while the Inverter has current output.

•

The output circuit of the Inverter is damaged.

→ Replace the Inverter.

8-2

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

%U uU1 uU2

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Overvoltage (OV)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the overvoltage detection level (410 V DC for

200-V Inverters,

820 V DC for 400-V Inverters)

Main circuit undervoltage

(UV1)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level (200 V DC for the 3G3MV-A2 j

, 160 V DC for the 3G3MV-AB j

, and 400

V DC for the 3G3MV-A4 j ).

Control power supply undervoltage (UV2)

The control power supply voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level.

• There is excessive regenerative energy with no braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit connected.

→

Connect the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor.

→

Increase the deceleration time.

•

The regenerative energy has not been processed though a braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit.

→

Set n092 for stall prevention during deceleration to 1

(disable)

• The braking resistor or Braking Resistor Unit is not wired properly.

→ Check and correct the wiring.

• The power supply voltage is too high.

→ Decrease the voltage so it will be within specifications.

• There is excessive regenerative energy due to overshooting at the time of acceleration.

→

Suppress the overshooting as much as possible.

• The braking transistor is damaged.

→ Change the Inverter.

•

Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss, power input terminal screws are loose, or the power cable is disconnected.

→ Check the above and take necessary countermeasures.

• Incorrect power supply voltage

→ Make sure that the power supply voltage is within specifications.

•

Momentary power interruption has occurred.

→

Use the momentary power interruption compensation

(Set n081 so that the Inverter restarts after power is restored)

→ Improve the power supply.

• The internal circuitry of the Inverter is damaged.

→ Change the Inverter.

• Internal circuit fault.

→ Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

→ Change the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

8-3

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

%l1

%l2

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Radiation fin overheated

(OH)

The temperature of the radiation fins of the Inverter has reached 110 _ C ± 10 _ C.

Motor overload (OL1)

The electric thermal relay actuated the motor overload protective function.

Calculate the heat radiation of the motor from the output current of the Inverter based on the rated motor current

(n036), motor protection characteristics (n037), and motor protective time setting

(n038).

Inverter overload (OL2)

The electronic thermal relay has actuated the Inverter overload protective function.

• The ambient temperature is too high.

→ Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.

• The load is excessive.

→ Reduce the load.

→ Change the inverter to one with a higher capacity.

• The V/f setting is incorrect.

→ Reduce the V/f set voltage.

• The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

→ Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

• The ventilation is obstructed.

→ Change the location of the Inverter to meet the installation conditions.

•

The cooling fan of the Inverter does not work.

→

Replace the cooling fan.

• The load is excessive.

→ Reduce the load.

→ Increase the motor capacity.

• The V/f setting is incorrect.

→ Reduce the V/f set voltage.

• The value in n013 for maximum voltage frequency is low.

→ Check the motor nameplate and set n013 to the rated frequency.

•

The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

→

Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

•

The value in n036 for rated motor current is incorrect.

→

Check the motor nameplate and set n036 to the rated current.

•

The Inverter is driving more than one motor.

→

Disable the motor overload protective function and install an electronic thermal relay for each of the motors.

The motor overload protective function is disabled by setting n036 to 0.0 or n037 to 2.

•

The motor protective time setting in n038 is short.

→

Set n038 to 8 (the default value).

•

The load is excessive.

→

Reduce the load.

•

The V/f setting is incorrect.

→

Reduce the V/f set voltage.

•

The acceleration/deceleration time is too short.

→ Increase the acceleration/deceleration time.

• The Inverter capacity is insufficient.

→ Use an Inverter model with a higher capacity.

8-4

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

%l3 ef j f00 f01 f04 f05 f06

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Overtorque detection (OL3)

There has been a current or torque the same as or greater than the setting in n098 for overtorque detection level and that in n099 for overtorque detection time. A fault has been detected with n096 for overtorque detection function selection set to 2 or 4.

External fault j (EF j )

An external fault has been input from a multi-function input.

A multi-function input 1 to 7 set to 3 or 4 has operated.

The EF number indicates the number of the corresponding input (S1 to S7).

Digital Operator transmission fault 1 (F00)

No communications were possible with the Digital

Operator for 5 s or more after the Inverter had been turned

ON.

•

The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

→ Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of overtorque.

The parameter settings were incorrect.

→

Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters according to the mechanical system.

Increase the set values in n098 and n099.

An external fault was input from a multi-function input.

→

Remove the cause of the external fault.

•

The sequence is incorrect.

→

Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or NC contact.

Digital Operator transmission fault 2 (F01)

A transmission fault continued for 5 s or more after communications with the

Digital Operator had failed.

Initial memory fault (F04)

An error in the built-in

EEPROM of the Inverter has been detected.

Analog-to-digital converter fault (F05)

An analog-to-digital converter fault has been detected.

Option Unit fault (F06)

An Option Unit fault was detected. The Inverter will detect this error if the output or verify signal of the Unit has a fault.

•

The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

→

Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Digital

Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

•

The Digital Operator has a failure.

→

Change the Digital Operator.

•

The Inverter has a failure.

→

Change the Inverter.

•

The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

→ Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Digital

Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

• The Digital Operator has a failure.

→ Change the Digital Operator.

• The Inverter has a failure.

→ Change the Inverter.

•

The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.

→

Initialize the Inverter with n001 set to 8, 9, 10, or 11 and turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

→

Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

• The internal circuitry of the Inverter has a fault.

→ Turn the Inverter OFF and ON.

→ Replace the Inverter if the same fault occurs again.

• The Option Unit may not be connected properly.

→ Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Option

Unit or attachment, and turn ON the Inverter.

• The Option Unit has a failure.

→ Change the Option Unit.

• The attachment has a failure.

→ Change the attachment.

8-5

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display f07 f21 f22 f23

%pr

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Digital Operator fault (F07)

An error in the built-in control circuit of the Digital Operator has been detected.

The EEPROM of the Digital

Operator or the analog-to-digital converter has a failure.

Option Unit Self-diagnostic fault (F21)

The Option Unit fails to start initializing 2 seconds after power is turned ON.

Option Unit Model Code fault (F22)

The Option Unit stopped while trying to identify the Inverter during communications initialization.

Option Unit

Cross-diagnostic fault (F23)

Digital Operator connection error (OPR)

The Inverter will detect this error if n010 for Digital

Operator connection error processing selection is set to

• The internal circuitry of the Digital Operator has a fault.

→ Turn the Digital Operator OFF and ON.

→ Replace the Digital Operator if the same fault occurs again.

• The Option Unit power may not be ON.

→ Check to see if the connectors are properly connected.

• The Option Unit has malfunctioned.

→ Replace the Option Unit.

•

The Option Unit may not be compatible with the Inverter.

→

Replace with the correct Option Unit.

•

Connectors may not be properly connected.

→

Check to see if the connectors are properly connected.

•

The Option Unit has malfunctioned.

→

Replace the Option Unit.

•

Check to see if the connector is properly connected to the casing.

• Check to see if the frame ground wire for the Option Unit is properly connected.

• Take appropriate noise countermeasures.

→ Refer to the noise countermeasures in 2-2-5 Conforming to EC Directives .

• The Digital Operator may not be mounted properly.

→

Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount and mount the Digital

Operator, and turn ON the Inverter.

8-6

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8 ce

Fault display

FbL

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Communications time-over

(CE)

Normal RS-422/485 communications were not established within 2 s. The

Inverter will detect this error if n151 for RS-422/485 communications time over detection selection is set to 0,

1, or 2.

Emergency stop (STP)

An emergency stop alarm is input to a multi-function input.

(A multi-function input from 1 to 7 that was set to 19 or 21 has operated.)

Feedback loss fault (FbL)

A feedback input was interrupted during PID control execution. (This fault is detected when an input level below the feedback loss detection level set in n137 persists for longer than the feedback loss detection time set in n138.)

• A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

→

Check and correct the line.

•

The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

→

In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

•

Noise influence.

→

Do not wire the communications line along with power lines in the same conduit.

→

Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the communications line, and ground it at the Master.

• Master’s program error.

→ Check and correct the program so that communications will be performed more than once every 2-s period.

• Communications circuit damage.

→ If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

•

An emergency stop alarm is input.

→

Remove the cause of the fault.

• The sequence is incorrect.

→

Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or NC contact.

•

Feedback wiring error.

→

Check for and correct any cable disconnection or faulty wiring.

•

Feedback sensor error

→

Check sensor status and replace any defective sensors.

•

PID target value input error or feedback loss detection setting error

→ Correct the target value input so that it is outside of the feedback loss detection range. Correct the feedback loss detection parameter settings (n137, n138).

•

Feedback input circuit error

→

Replace the Inverter.

8-7

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

PF (See note.)

LF (See note.)

GF (See note.)

SC (See note.)

Fault name and meaning Probable cause and remedy

Main circuit voltage fault

(PF)

The main circuit DC voltage has oscillated erroneously when regeneration was not being performed.

This fault is detected when a voltage fluctuation greater than the input open-phase detection level set in n166 persists for longer than the input open-phase detection time set in n167.

Output open-phase fault

(LF)

An open phase has occurred at the Inverter’s output.

This fault is detected when a current in any of the Inverter output phases less than the output open-phase detection level set in n168 persists for longer than the output open-phase detection time set in n169.

Ground fault (GF)

The ground current at the

Inverter has exceeded approximately 50% of the

Inverter’s rated output current.

Load short circuit (SC)

The Inverter output or load is short-circuited.

• Momentary power failure.

→ Either apply countermeasures against momentary power failures or disable the input open-phase detection.

•

Input power supply open phase.

→

Check for and correct any main circuit power supply disconnections or faulty wiring.

•

Excessive input power supply voltage fluctuation or bad line voltage balance.

→ Check the power supply voltage. Apply measures to stabilize the power supply, or disable the input open-phase detection.

•

Main circuit capacitor failure.

→

If this fault is occurring frequently and there is no error at the power supply, replace the Inverter or disable the input open-phase detection. (Also check the usage time with the accumulated operating time function.)

•

Output cable is disconnected.

→

Check for and correct any output cable disconnections or faulty wiring.

• Motor winding disconnected.

→ Check the motor’s line resistance. If winding is broken, replace the motor.

• Output terminal screws are loose.

→ Check and tighten the output terminal screws.

• Inverter output transistor open breakdown.

→ Replace the Inverter.

• Motor burnout or insulation damage.

→ Check the motor’s insulation resistance. If conducting, replace the motor.

•

Cable is damaged.

→

Check the resistance between the cable and FG. If conducting, replace the cable.

•

Cable and FG floating capacity

→

If the cable is longer than 100 m, lower the carrier frequency.

→ Apply measures to reduce the floating capacity. Don’t use metal ducts, use a separate cable for each phase, include an AC reactor in the output side, etc.

•

Motor burnout or insulation damage.

→

Check the resistance between the motor phases. If abnormal, replace the Inverter.

•

Cable is damaged.

→

Check the resistance between the cables. If conducting, replace the cable.

8-8

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

BUS

OFF

Fault name and meaning

Communications error

(Option Unit)

A communications error occurred at the Option Unit.

Power supply error

Control power supply voltage is insufficient.

Probable cause and remedy

• Communications cable wired incorrectly, short-circuited, or disconnected.

→

Check and correct the communications cable wiring.

•

Data destroyed by noise.

→

Change to a dedicated communications cable or to shielded cable, and mask the shield or ground it at the power supply.

→ Use a dedicated communications power supply, and connect a noise filter to the power supply input side.

•

Option Unit is damaged.

→

If communications errors frequently occur and there is no problem with the wiring, replace the Option Unit.

•

No power supply is provided.

→

Check and correct the power supply wire and voltage.

•

Terminal screws are loose.

→

Check and tighten the terminal screws.

•

Operator connectors are faulty.

→

If only the Operator indicator is not lit, (i.e., if the RUN and ALARM indicators are lit), check and correct the

Operator’s connectors.

• The Inverter is damaged.

→ Replace the Inverter.

Note This fault is displayed for 200 and 400-V, 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters only.

8-9

Maintenance Operations

8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Errors)

Chapter 8

The warning detection is a type of Inverter protective function that does not operate the fault contact output and returns the Inverter to its original status once the cause of the error has been removed. The Digital Operator flashes and display the detail of the error.

If a warning occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according to the table below.

Note Some warnings or some cases stop the operation of the Inverter as described in the table.

Warning Displays and Processing

Fault display

(flashing)

cal

(flashing)

Warning name and meaning

Main circuit undervoltage (UV)

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the undervoltage detection level (200 V DC for the 3G3MV-A2 j ,

160 V DC for the 3G3MV-AB j , and

400 V DC for the 3G3MV-A4 j

Main circuit overvoltage

The main circuit DC voltage has reached the overvoltage detection level (410 V DC for 200-V Inverters,

820 V DC for 400-V Inverters).

Radiation fin overheated (OH)

The temperature of the radiation fins of the Inverter has reached 110

Communications standby (CAL)

No normal DSR message has been received during RS-422/4895 communications.

The Inverter detects this warning only when RUN command selection (n003) is set to 2 or frequency reference selection (n004) is set to 6. Until the warning is reset, no input other than communications input will be ignored.

Probable cause and remedy

•

Power supply to the Inverter has phase loss, power input terminal screws are loose, or the power line is disconnected.

→ Check the above and take necessary countermeasures.

•

Incorrect power supply voltage

→

Make sure that the power supply voltage is within specifications.

•

The power supply voltage is too high.

→ Decrease the voltage so it will be within specifications.

• The ambient temperature is too high.

→ Ventilate the Inverter or install a cooling unit.

•

A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

→ Check and correct the line.

• The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

→ In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of

SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

• Master’s program error.

→ Check the start of communications and correct the program.

•

Communications circuit damage.

→

If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

8-10

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

%p1

(flashing)

%p2

(flashing)

%p3

(flashing)

%p4

(flashing)

%p5

(flashing)

%p9

(flashing)

%l3

(flashing)

Warning name and meaning

Operation error (OP j

)

(Parameter setting error)

Probable cause and remedy

• The values in n050 through n056 for multi-function inputs 1 through 7 have been duplicated.

→

Check and correct the values.

•

The V/f pattern settings do not satisfy the following condition.

n016 x n014 < n013 x n011

→ Check and correct the set value.

•

The rated motor current set in n036 exceeds

150% of the rated output current of the Inverter.

→ Check and correct the set value.

• The frequency reference upper limit set in n036 and the frequency reference lower limit set in n034 do not satisfy the following condition.

n033 y

n034

→

Check and correct the set values.

• The jump frequencies set in n083 to n085 do not satisfy the following condition.

n083 y

n084 y

n085

→

Check and correct the set values.

• The carrier frequency set in n080 is incorrect. An attempt was made to set a value that is not within a permissible range.

→

Check and correct the set value.

Overtorque detection (OL3)

• The mechanical system is locked or has a failure.

→ Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of overtorque.

•

The parameter settings were incorrect.

→

Adjust the n098 and n099 parameters according to the mechanical system.

Increase the set values in n98 and n099.

ser

(flashing)

Sequence error (SER)

A sequence change has been input while the Inverter is in operation.

Local or remote selection or communications/remote selection are input while the Inverter is in operation.

Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.

•

A sequence error has occurred.

→

Check and correct the sequence.

(flashing)

External base block (bb)

The external base block command has been input.

Note The Inverter coasts to a stop.

•

The external base block command has been input.

→

Remove the cause of external base block input.

• The sequence is incorrect.

→ Check and change the external fault input sequence including the input timing and NO or NC contact.

8-11

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display

(flashing)

Warning name and meaning

Forward- and reverse-rotation input

(EF)

The forward and reverse commands are input to the control circuit terminals simultaneously for 0.5 s or more.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n005.

Probable cause and remedy

• A sequence error has occurred.

→ Check and adjust the local or remote selection sequence.

(flashing)

Emergency stop (STP)

The Digital Operator stops operating.

The STOP/RESET Key on the Digital

Operator is pressed while the Inverter is operating according to the forward or reverse command through the control circuit terminals.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n04.

The emergency stop alarm signal is input as multi-function input.

A multi-function input 1 to 7 set to 20 or 22 has been used.

Note The Inverter stops according to the method set in n005.

The Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2 with n005 set to 0.

•

The parameter setting was incorrect.

→

Check that the n007 parameter setting for

STOP/RESET Key function selection is correct.

• An emergency stop warning is input to a multifunction input.

→

Remove the cause of the fault or correct the input sequence.

FAn (flashing) Cooling fan fault (FAN)

The cooling fan has been locked.

FbL (flashing) Feedback loss fault (FbL)

•

The cooling fan wiring has a fault.

→

Turn OFF the Inverter, dismount the fan, and check and repair the wiring.

• The cooling fan in not in good condition.

→ Check and remove the foreign material or dust on the fan.

• The cooling fan is beyond repair.

→ Replace the fan.

•

Feedback wiring error.

→

Check for and correct any cable disconnection or faulty wiring.

• Feedback sensor error

→ Check sensor status and replace any defective sensors.

• PID target value input error or feedback loss detection setting error

→

Correct the target value input so that it is outside of the feedback loss detection range.

Correct the feedback loss detection parameter settings (n137, n138).

•

Feedback input circuit error

→

Replace the Inverter.

8-12

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Fault display oH3

Warning name and meaning

Inverter overheating warning (oH3)

An Inverter overheating warning signal was input from an external control terminal set to multi-function input.

Communications time over (CE)

RS-422 or RS-485 communications were not properly carried out within

2 s. (Detected when n151 is set to

“3.”)

Probable cause and remedy

• Clear the Inverter overheating warning signal.

• Eliminate the cause of the warning signal input.

• A short-circuit, ground fault, or disconnection has occurred on the communications line.

→

Check and correct the line.

•

The termination resistance setting is incorrect.

→

In the case of RS-422 communications, set pin 1 of SW2 of all Inverters to ON. In the case of RS-485 communications, set pin 1 of

SW2 of only the Inverter located at each end of the network to ON.

• Noise influence.

→

Do not wire the communications line along with power lines in the same conduit.

→ Use the twisted-pair shielded wire for the communications line , and ground it at the

Master.

•

Master’s program error.

→

Check and correct the program so that communications will be performed more than once every 2-s period.

•

Communications circuit damage.

→ If the same error is detected as a result of a self-diagnostic test, change the Inverter.

8-13

Maintenance Operations

8-2 Troubleshooting

Chapter 8

Due to parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Inverter and motor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures.

Refer to 8-1 Protective and Diagnostic Functions , if the contents of the fault are displayed,

8-2-1 Parameters Fail Set

The display does not change when the Increment or Decrement Key is pressed.

• Parameter write-prohibit is input.

This occurs when n001 for parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization is set to 0. Set n001 to an appropriate value according to the parameter to be set.

•

The Inverter is operating.

There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Refer to the list of parameters.

Turn the Inverter OFF and then make the settings.

“OP

” is displayed.

A parameter setting error has occurred. Refer to 8-1-2 Warning Detection (Nonfatal Error) and make the necessary corrections.

Nothing is displayed on the Digital Operator or “OPR” is displayed.

A connection error has occurred in the Digital Operator.

Turn OFF the Inverter and dismount the Digital Operator. After checking that the connector is free of any foreign material remount the Digital Operator.

8-2-2 Motor Fails to Operate

The motor does not operate with input through the control circuit terminals even though the frequency reference is correct.

•

The operation method setting is incorrect.

If parameter n003 for operation mode selection is not set to 1 to enable the control circuit terminals, the RUN command cannot be executed through the control circuit terminals.

Check and correct the setting in n003.

•

Input in 2-wire sequence while 3-wire sequence is in effect and vice-versa.

The Inverter will operate in 3-wire sequence according to the RUN, stop, and forward/stop commands if n052 for multi-function input 3 is set to 0. At that time, the Inverter will not operate if input in

2-wire sequence is ON. On the other hand, the Inverter in 2-wire sequence will only rotate in the reverse direction if input in 3-wire sequence is ON.

Check and correct the setting in n052 or change the input method of the RUN command.

8-14

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

•

The Inverter is not in RUN mode.

When the PRGM or LO/RE indicator (red indicator) of the Digital Operator is lit, the Inverter does not start.

Cancel the RUN command, and by pressing the Mode Key, turn ON the green indicator before restarting the Inverter.

•

The value of the frequency reference is too low.

The Inverter will have no output if the frequency reference is below the minimum output frequency in n016.

Set the frequency reference to exceed the minimum output frequency.

• The Inverter is in local mode.

The RUN command can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the RUN Key of the Digital

Operator. Check the LO/RE indicator. If “Lo” is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the

Increment Key so that “rE” will be displayed.

If the above operation is not possible, multi-function input will be set to local/remote selection. In that case, the mode can be switched only through the corresponding multi-function input terminal. Set the input terminal to OFF so that the Inverter will be in remote mode.

•

The input wiring of the control circuit terminals of the Inverter is incorrect.

The Inverter cannot check the input signal if the input line of the control circuit terminals is incorrectly wired. Use the Digital Operator and check the setting in multi-function monitor U-96 for the input terminal status.

The default setting for Inverter input is to NPN sequence input, which can be changed to PNP sequence input. Refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the SW1 settings conform with the actual wiring.

The motor does not turn with input through the control terminals. (The frequency reference is set to zero or different from the set value.)

•

The setting of the frequency reference is incorrect.

The frequency reference through analog input will be ignored if the Digital Operator has been selected for frequency reference settings. The frequency reference through digital input will be ignored if the Digital Operator has not been selected.

Check that the set value in n004 for frequency reference selection matches the actual method used.

When using analog input, refer to 2-2-1 Terminal Block and check that the SW2 settings conform with the actual input (voltage or current).

•

The Inverter is in local mode.

The frequency reference can be given to the Inverter in local mode only with the FREQUENCY adjuster or through a key sequence on the Digital Operator.

Check the LO/RE indicator. If “Lo” is displayed, the Inverter is in local mode. Press the Increment

Key so that “rE” will be displayed.

•

The gain and bias settings of the analog input are incorrect.

Check that the frequency reference gain in n060 and the frequency reference bias in n061 conform with the actual analog input characteristics.

8-15

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

•

The auxiliary frequency reference and frequency gain are not input by the multi-function analog inputs.

If frequency reference 2 is selected when an auxiliary frequency reference is set for a multi-function analog input, the analog value of the multi-function analog input will become the frequency reference. Also, if the frequency gain is set, the specified frequency will be multiplied by a factor proportional to the analog value of the multi-function input. In either case, if no analog voltage is input by the multi-function analog input, the Inverter will not operate. Check the multi-function analog input terminal parameters (n077, n078) and the wiring.

The motor stops during acceleration or when a load is connected.

•

The load may be too big.

The 3G3MV has a stall prevention function and automatic torque boost function, but the motor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is too rapid or if the load is too big.

Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

The motor only rotates in one direction.

•

Reverse rotation-prohibit is selected.

If n006 for reverse rotation-prohibit selection is set to 1 (reverse run prohibited), the Inverter will not accept reverse-rotation commands.

To use both forward and reverse rotation, set n05 to 0.

8-2-3 Motor Rotates in the Wrong Direction

•

The output wiring of the motor is faulty.

When the U, V, and W terminals of the Inverter are properly connected to the U, V and W terminals of the motor, the motor will operate in a forward direction when a forward rotation command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the motor type. Therefore, be sure to check the specifications.

Switching two wires among the U, V, and W will reverse the direction of rotation.

8-2-4 Motor Outputs No Torque or Acceleration is Slow

• The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.

If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.

If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.

•

The stall prevention level during operation is too low.

If the value in n094 for stall prevention level during operation is too low, the speed will drop before torque output is turned ON.

Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

•

The stall prevention level during acceleration is too low.

If the value in n093 for stall prevention level during acceleration is too slow, the acceleration time will be too long.

Check to be sure that the set value is suitable.

8-16

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

•

V/f Control Limit

Unlike vector control, the output torque of the Inverter in V/f control is low at low frequencies. Consider the use of vector control if higher output torque at low frequencies is required.

8-2-5 Speed Accuracy of the Inverter Rotating at High Speed in

Vector Control is Low

•

The rated motor voltage is high.

The maximum output voltage of the Inverter is determined by the voltage of input into the Inverter. If the input is at 200 V AC, for example, the maximum output voltage will be 200 V AC. The speed precision of the Inverter will drop if the output voltage designated by vector control has exceeded the maximum output voltage of the Inverter.

Use a motor with a lower rated voltage (e.g., a dedicated motor for vector control use).

8-2-6 Motor Deceleration Rate is Low

•

Stall prevention during deceleration is set.

When connecting the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor as a braking option, set n092 for

Stall prevention during deceleration to 1 so that stall prevention will be disabled. If n092 is set to 0

(default setting), the Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor connected will not be used. Therefore, there will be no reduction in the deceleration time.

•

The deceleration time setting is too long.

Check the deceleration time settings in n020 and n022.

•

Motor torque is insufficient.

If the parameter constants are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, the power of the motor will be limited.

Consider increasing the motor capacity.

•

The Inverter in vector control is restricted by the torque compensation limit.

If the torque compensation limit in n109 is set to a value that is too small, the motor torque will be limited to a low value and sufficient torque will not be available.

If no torque restriction is required, set the parameter to a range from 150% (default setting) to 200%.

8-2-7 Vertical-axis Load Drops when Brakes are Applied

•

The sequence is incorrect.

The Inverter goes into DC braking status for 0.5 s after deceleration is completed. This is the default setting.

Check the sequence to make sure that the brake is applied with DC braking status or adjust the value n090 for DC injection control time.

•

The DC injection braking is insufficient.

If the DC braking power is insufficient, adjust the value in n089 for DC injection control current.

•

An inappropriate brake is being used.

Use a brake intended for braking rather than holding.

8-17

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

8-2-8 Motor Burns

•

The load is too big.

If the load of the motor is too big and the motor is used with the effective torque exceeding the rated torque of the motor, the motor will burn out. For example, the rated torque of the motor and capacity may be limited to eight hours of use if the inscription on the motor states that the motor is rated for eight hours. If the 8-hour rated torque is used for normal operation, it may cause the motor to burn out.

Reduce the load amount by either reducing the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the motor capacity.

•

The ambient temperature is too high.

The rating of the motor is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The motor will burn out if it runs continuously at the rated torque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded.

Lower the ambient temperature of the motor to within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range.

•

The withstand voltage between the phases of the motor is insufficient.

When the motor is connected to the output of the Inverter, a surge will be generated between the switching of the Inverter and the coil of the motor.

Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the input power supply voltage of the Inverter (i.e., approximately 600 V for 200-V Inverters, 1,200 V for 400-V Inverters).

Therefore, the dielectric strength of the motor to be used must be higher than the maximum surge voltage.

In particular, use a dedicated motor for 400-V Inverters.

8-2-9 Controller or AM Radio Receives Noise when Inverter is

Started

•

Noise derives from Inverter switching.

Take the following actions to prevent noise.

Lower the carrier frequency of the Inverter in n080.

The number of internal switching times is reduced, so noise can be reduced to some extent.

Install an Input Noise Filter.

Install an Input Noise Filter on the power input area of the Inverter.

S Install an Output Noise Filter.

Install an Output Noise Filter on the output area of the Inverter.

Use metal tubing.

Electric waves can be shielded by metal. Therefore, enclose the Inverter with a metal tube.

8-2-10 Ground Fault Interrupter is Actuated when Inverter is

Started

•

Leakage current flows through the Inverter.

The Inverter performs internal switching. Therefore, a leakage current flows through the Inverter.

This leakage current may actuate the ground fault interrupter, shutting the power OFF.

8-18

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

Use a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage-current detection value (sensitivity amperage of

200 mA or more, operating time of 0.1 s or more) or one with high-frequency countermeasures for

Inverter use.

Reducing the carrier frequency value in n080 is also effective.

In addition, remember that a leakage current increases in proportion to the cable length. Normally, approximately 5 mA of leakage current is generated for each meter of cable.

8-2-11 Mechanical Vibration

Mechanical system makes unusual noise.

•

Resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the carrier frequency.

There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system and the carrier frequency. If the motor is running with no problems and the machinery system is vibrating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency value in n080.

•

Resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the

Inverter.

There may be resonance between the characteristic frequency of a machine and the output frequency of the Inverter. To prevent this from occurring, use the frequency jump function with the constants set in n083 through n086 to change the output frequency or install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base to prevent the resonance of the mechanical system.

Vibration and hunting are occurring.

• Influence by the torque compensation function or the slip compensation function.

The torque compensation function or the slip compensation function of the Inverter may influence the characteristic frequency of the mechanical system, causing vibration or hunting. In that case, increase the time constants in n104 for torque compensation and in n112 for slip compensation. The larger these time constants are, however, the slower the response speed of the torque compensation function and slip compensation function will be.

Motor vibrates excessively and does not rotate normally.

• Motor Phase Interruption

If one or two of the three phases of the motor are open, the motor will vibrate excessively and will not rotate. Check that the motor is wired correctly without any disconnection. The same phenomenon will occur if the output transistor of the Inverter is open and damaged. Check the balance of the

Inverter’s output voltage as well.

8-2-12 Stable PID Control is Not Possible or Control Fails

PID control is not possible with vibration or hunting.

•

PID control gain adjustment is insufficient.

Check the frequency of vibration and adjust the proportional (P) control, integral (I) control, and derivative (D) control of the Inverter. Refer to 6-3-7 PID Adjustments .

8-19

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

PID control diverges.

•

No feedback is input.

If the detected value is 0 with no feedback input, the PID control function will not operate. As a result, the output of the Inverter will diverge and the motor will increase its speed up to the maximum frequency.

Check that the set value in n164 for PID feedback input block selection conforms with the actual input and that the PID constants are set properly. Refer to 6-3-6 PID Control Settings .

•

Level adjustments of the target and detected values are imperfect.

The Inverter in PID control adjusts the deviation between the target and detected values so that the deviation will be zero. Therefore, the target and detected values must be adjusted so that they will have the same input level. Set the detected value gain in n129 after making the proper level adjustments.

•

The relationship between the output frequency and detected value of the Inverter is opposite.

PID control will result in diversion if the detected value decreases when the output frequency of the

Inverter increases. If that happens, set n128 for PID control selection to negative characteristics

(e.g., if 1 has been set, change it to 5).

8-2-13 Inverter Vibration in Energy-saving Control

•

The energy-saving settings are incorrect.

Check the frequency of vibration.

If the frequency coincides with the power averaging time in n143, the Inverter is not in smooth probe operation. Set the probe operation voltage limit to 0 in n144 to disable the probe operation of the

Inverter or reduce the set values of n145 (100% probe-control voltage step) and n146 (5% probecontrol voltage step) so that the voltage change range will be narrower.

8-2-14 Motor Rotates after Output of Inverter is Turned OFF

•

Insufficient DC Injection Braking Control

If the motor continues operating at low speed, without completely stopping, and after a deceleration stop has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough.

In such cases, adjust the DC control as described below.

Increase the parameter in n089 for DC injection braking current.

S Increase the parameter in n090 for DC injection braking-to-stop time.

8-2-15 Detects OV (Over voltage) and Stalls when Motor Starts

•

Insufficient DC Injection Braking Control at Startup

Generation of OV and stalling can occur if the motor is turning when it is started.

This can be prevented by slowing the rotation of the motor by DC injection braking before starting the motor.

Increase the parameter in n091 for startup DC injection braking time.

8-20

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

8-2-16 Output Frequency Does Not Reach Frequency Reference

•

The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range.

If the jump function is used, the output frequency stays within the jump frequency range.

Make sure that the jump width settings in n083 through n085 for jump frequencies 1 through 3 and jump width in n086 are appropriate.

•

The preset output frequency exceeds the upper-limit frequency.

The upper-limit frequency can be obtained from the following formula.

Maximum frequency in n011 × frequency reference upper limit in n033/100

Make sure that the parameters in n011 and n033 are correct.

8-2-17 Inverter Does Not Run Because EF (Simultaneous Inputs of Forward and Reverse Commands) is Detected, Or

Motor Rotates Momentarily When Control Device Power is Turned OFF

Sequence Error

An EF will be detected if a forward command and a reverse command are input simultaneously for 0.5

seconds or longer. Correct the sequence.

Malfunction Due to Unwanted Current Path

Inverter inputs may remain ON due to an unwanted current path for the controller outputs. With the wiring shown in the following table, if the controller output power supply is less than 24 V DC or if the power is OFF, the current indicated by the arrow will flow and the Inverter inputs will operate. If that occurs, insert a diode as shown in the diagram at point A.

Control device Inverter (control input)

S1 to 7

8-21

Maintenance Operations

8-3 Maintenance and Inspection

Chapter 8

WARNING

Do not touch the Inverter terminals while the power is being supplied.

WARNING

Maintenance, inspection, or parts replacement must be performed by authorized personnel. Not doing so may result in electrical shock or injury.

WARNING

Do not attempt to take the Unit apart or repair. Doing either of these may result in electrical shock or injury.

Caution

Carefully handle the Inverter because it uses semiconductor elements. Careless handling may result in malfunction.

Do not change wiring, disconnect connectors, the Operator, or optional items, or replace fans while power is being supplied. Doing so may result in injury, damage to the product, or malfunction.

Daily Inspection

Check the following items with the system in operation.

• The motor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises.

•

There should be no abnormal heat generation.

•

The output current value shown on the monitor display should not be higher than normal.

•

The cooling fan on the bottom of the Inverter should be operating normally, if the Inverter model has the cooling fan.

Periodic Inspection

Check the following items during periodic maintenance.

Before beginning inspection, be sure to turn OFF the power supply. Confirm that all the indicators on the front panel have turned OFF, and then wait until at least 1 minute has elapsed before beginning the inspection.

Be sure not to touch the terminals right after the power has been turned OFF. Otherwise, an electric shock may occur.

•

The terminal screws of the Inverter should not loose.

•

There should be no conductive dust or oil mist on the terminal block or inside the Inverter.

•

The mounting screws of the Inverter should not be loose.

8-22

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

•

No dirt or dust should be accumulating on the radiation fin.

•

No dust should be accumulating on the vents of the Inverter.

•

There should be no abnormalities in the outward appearance of the Inverter.

•

There should be no unusual noises or vibration and the accumulated operating time should not exceeded the specifications.

Periodic Maintenance Parts

The Inverter is configured of many parts, and these parts must operate properly in order to make full use of the Inverter’s functions. Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order to keep the Inverter operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary to perform periodic inspections and replace parts according to their service life.

Periodic inspection standards vary with the installation environment and usage conditions of the

Inverter.

The maintenance periods of the Inverter are described below. Keep them as reference.

Maintenance Periods (Reference)

Cooling fan: 2 to 3 years

Electrolytic capacitor: 5 years

Fuse: 10 years

The usage conditions are as follows:

S Ambient temperature: 40 _ C

Load factor: 80%

Operation:

Installation:

8 hours per day

According to instructions in manual

It is recommended that the ambient temperature and power-on time be reduced as much as possible to extend of the life of the Inverter.

Note For details regarding maintenance, consult your OMRON representative.

Replacement of Cooling Fan

If the FAN fault is displayed or the cooling fan needs replacement, take the following steps to replace it.

8-23

Maintenance Operations

Cooling Fan Models

Inverter

3G3MV-A2007

3G3MV-A2015

3G3MV-A2022

3G3MV-A2037

3G3MV-A2055

3G3MV-A2075

3G3MV-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB037

3G3MV-A4015/-A4022

3G3MV-A4037

3G3MV-A4055

3G3MV-A4075

Chapter 8

Cooling Fan

3G3IV-PFAN2007

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2022

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

Replacing Cooling Fan (68-, 140-, 170-, and 180-mm-wide Inverters)

1. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow

1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the Fan as shown in the following illustration.

Radiation fin (Heat sink)

Wind direction

2. Hold the fan wire and pull the protective tube of the cover in the arrow 3 direction.

Protective tube

There is a connector inside.

Fan wind direction

3. Slide the protective tube and remove the internal connector.

4. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.

5. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the Fan will be in the direction of the heat radiation fin.

6. Attach the connector, cover the connector with the protective tube, and insert the connector into the cover.

8-24

Maintenance Operations Chapter 8

7. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.

Replacing Cooling Fan of 108-mm-wide Inverter Model

1. Dismount the front cover, bottom cover, and fan connector CN4.

Cooling fan connector

(CN10 built in)

Heat radiation fin (Heat sink)

Fan wind direction

2. Press the left and right sides of the fan cover located on the lower part of the radiation fin in the arrow

1 directions. Then lift the bottom of the Fan in the arrow 2 direction to remove the fan as shown in the following illustration.

Disconnect the wire from the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing.

3. Remove the Fan from the fan cover.

4. Mount the new Fan on the fan cover. At this time, make sure that the wind direction of the fan will be in the direction of the heat radiation fin.

5. Mount the fan cover with the new Fan to the lower part of the heat radiation fin. Make sure that the fan cover snaps on securely with the heat radiation fin.

6. Wire the power line through the electrical inlet on the bottom of the plastic casing and the wiring groove into the internal circuitry of the Inverter.

7. Attach the wire to connector CN10 and attach the bottom cover and front cover.

8-25

Specifications

9-1 Inverter Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

Chapter 9

Specifications

9-1 Inverter Specifications

Chapter 9

200-V-class Inverters

Model 3G3MV-

AC models

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

[kVA] (See note 1.)

Heat radiation (W)

(See note 2.)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

A2001 A2002 A2004 A2007 A2015 A2022 A2037 A2055 A2075

3-phase 200 to 230 V AC at 50/60 Hz

–15% to 10%

0.4

0.9

2.7

4.3

1.1

1.4

Cooling fan

5.9

9.3

13.3

17.6

13.0

18.0

28.1

45.1

72.8

94.8

149.1

249.8

318.1

0.6

Natural cooling

1.6

0.9

1.5

2.1

4.6

4.8

200-V

AC mod-

Model 3G3MV-

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

[kVA] (See note 1.)

Heat radiation (W)

(See note 2.)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

AB001 AB002 AB004 AB007 AB015 AB022 AB037 AB055 AB075

Single-phase 200 to 240 V AC at 50/60 Hz

–15% to 10%

0.5

0.9

1.6

2.7

4.3

5.9

9.3

14.1

20.0

31.9

51.4

82.8

113.6

176.4

---

0.6

0.7

Natural cooling

1.0

1.5

2.2

Cooling fan

2.9

---

9-2

Specifications Chapter 9

Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

Output cations

Rated output capacity (kVA)

Rated output current (A)

Rated output voltage (V)

Max. output frequency

0.3

0.8

0.6

1.6

1.1

3.0

400 Hz parameter setting

1.9

5.0

3.0

8.0

4.2

11.0

6.7

17.5

3-phase 200 to 240 V AC (according to the input voltage)

9.5

25.0

13.0

33.0

Control characteristics

Harmonic-current countermeasures

Control method

DC reactor (option) connection possible

Sine wave PWM (V/f control or vector control)

Carrier frequency

Frequency control range

Frequency precision

(temperature characteristics)

2.5 to 10.0 kHz (step switching)

0.1 to 400 Hz

Digital commands:

Analog commands:

0.01% (–10 to 50

0.5% (25 ± 10 °

Frequency setting resolution

Output frequency resolution

Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)

Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)

0.01 Hz

Overload capacity 150% of rated output current for 1 min

External frequency set signal

Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 V DC (20 k

Ω

), 4 to 20 mA (250

Ω

), and 0 to 20 mA (250

Ω

)

Acceleration/deceleration time

0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time settings: 2 types)

Braking torque

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Approx. 20% (125% to 150% possible with braking resistor)

Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern

Protecfunctions

Motor protection Protection by electronic thermal

Instantaneous overcurrent protection

Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current

Overload protection Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 410 V Overvoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

Momentary power interruption compensation

(selection)

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 200 V (160 V for single-phase 200-V AC model)

Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within approximately 0.5 s.

Detects at 110

C Cooling fan overheating

Grounding protection

Charge indicator

(RUN indicator)

Protection at overcurrent detection level

Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approximately 50 V or less.

9-3

Specifications Chapter 9

EnvironLocation ment

Ambient storage temperature

Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)

–20 to 60 ° C

Ambient humidity

Ambient operating temperature

Operating: 95% max. (with no condensation)

Panel-mounting: –10 to 50 ° C

Panelmounting:

–10 to 50 ° C

Altitude

Insulation resistance

1,000 m max.

5 M

Ω

min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand voltage tests)

Vibration resistance 9.8 m/s 2 max. between 10 to 20 Hz

2.0 m/s 2 max. between 20 and 50 Hz

Degree of protection Panel-mounting models: Conforms to IP20

Closed wall-mounting:

–10 to 40

Closed wall-mounting

(NEMA1)/

Panelmounting

(IP00)

(See note 3.)

Note 1.

The power supply capacity is the capacity for the Inverter’s rated output. It will vary depending on the impedance at the input power supply. (This is due to fluctuations in the power factor.

The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the

Inverter.

Note 2.

The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverter’s rated output.

Note 3.

The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom covers.

9-4

Specifications Chapter 9

400-V-class Inverters

Model 3G3MV-

AC models

3-phase

AC mod-

Power supply

Rated voltage and frequency

Allowable voltage fluctuation

Allowable frequency fluctuation

Input power supply capacity

[kVA] (See note 1.)

Heat radiation (W)

(See note 2.)

Weight (kg)

Cooling method

A4002 A4004 A4007 A4015 A4022 A4037 A4055 A4075

3-phase 380 to 460 V AC at 50/60 Hz

–15% to 10%

1.3

23.1

1.9

30.1

1.0

1.1

Natural cooling

3.6

54.9

1.5

5.1

75.7

5.9

83.0

1.5

Cooling fan

9.1

117.9

256.5

308.9

2.1

15.8

4.8

19.2

4.8

Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

Output cations

Rated output capacity (kVA)

Rated output current (A)

Control characteristics

Rated output voltage (V)

Max. output frequency

Harmonic-current countermeasures

Control method

Carrier frequency

Frequency control range

Frequency precision

(temperature characteristics)

0.2

0.9

1.2

0.4

1.4

1.8

400 Hz parameter setting

DC reactor (option) connection possible

Sine wave PWM (V/f control or vector control)

2.5 to 10.0 kHz (step switching)

0.1 to 400 Hz

Digital commands:

0.75

2.6

3.4

Analog commands:

1.5

3.7

4.8

0.01% (–10 to 50

0.5% (25

2.2

4.2

5.5

3.7

6.6

8.6

5.5

11.0

14.8

3-phase 380 to 460 V AC (according to the input voltage)

7.5

14.0

18.0

Frequency setting resolution

Output frequency resolution

Digital commands: 0.1 Hz (less than 100 Hz) and 1 Hz (100 Hz or over)

Analog commands: 0.06 Hz/60 Hz (equivalent to 1/1000)

0.01 Hz

Overload capacity 150% of rated output current for 1 min

External frequency set signal

Selectable with FREQ adjuster: 0 to 10 V DC (20 k Ω ), 4 to 20 mA (250

Ω

), and 0 to 20 mA (250

Ω

)

Acceleration/deceleration time

0.01 to 6,000 s (Independent acceleration and deceleration time settings)

Braking torque Approx. 20% (125 to 150% possible with braking resistor: 2 types)

Voltage/frequency characteristics

Set voltage vector control/user V/f pattern

9-5

Specifications Chapter 9

Protecfunctions

Motor protection

Instantaneous overcurrent protection

Protection by electronic thermal

Stops at approx. 250% of rated output current

Overload protection Stops in 1 min at approximately 150% of rated output current

Overvoltage protection

Undervoltage protection

Momentary power interruption compensation

(selection)

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 820 V

Stops when main-circuit DC voltage is approximately 400 V

Stops for 15 ms or more. By setting the Inverter to momentary power interruption mode, operation can be continued if power is restored within approximately 0.5 s.

Cooling fin overheating

Grounding protection

Charge indicator

EnvironLocation ment

Ambient operating temperature

Detects at 110

Protection at overcurrent detection level

Charge indicator until main circuit DC voltage reaches 50 V max.

Indoors (with no corrosive gas, oil spray, or metallic dust)

–10 to 50

C Closed wall-mounting:

–10 to 40 ° C

Panelmounting:

–10 to 50

Operating: 95% max. (with no condensation)

–20 to 60 ° C

Ambient humidity

Ambient storage temperature

Altitude

Insulation resistance

1,000 m max.

5 M Ω min. (Do not carry out any insulation resistance or withstand voltage tests)

Vibration resistance 9.8 m/s

2.0 m/s

max. between 10 to 20 Hz

max. between 20 and 50 Hz

Degree of protection Panel-mounting models: Conforms to IP20 Closed wall-mounting

(NEMA1)/

Panel- mounting

(IP00)

(See note 3.)

Note 1.

The power supply capacity is the capacity for the Inverter’s rated output. It will vary depending on the impedance at the input power supply. (This is due to fluctuations in the power factor.

The power factor can be improved by inserting an AC reactor.) There will also be variations in the ratio between the rated current of the motor that is used and the rated output current of the

Inverter.

Note 2.

The heat radiation is the electric power consumed in the Inverter at the Inverter’s rated output.

Note 3.

The 5.5- and 7.5-kW Inverters are closed wall-mounting models (NEMA1/IP20) as a standard, but they can be converted to panel-mounting (IP00) by removing the top and bottom covers.

9-6

Specifications

9-2 Option Specifications

Chapter 9

9-2-1 List of Options

Mounted Options

Name

DeviceNet

Communications Unit

Model

3G3MV-PDRT2

Fan Unit 3G3IV-PFAN j

Description

Required when controlling the Inverter from

DeviceNet.

Remote I/O functions and message functions can be used to suit the application.

Replacement for the existing cooling fan of the

Inverter.

Replace the cooling fan if it has reached the end of its service life or a warning of cooling fan failure (FAN) is indicated.

Separately Mounted Option

Name

Scaling Meter K3MA-J

Model Description

Connected to the multi-function analog output of the

Inverter.

The Scaling Meter displays the rpm or speed of the machine or line in actual units.

Dedicated Options

Name

Braking Resistor

Model

3G3IV-PERF j

Braking Resistor Unit 3G3IV-PLKEB j

DC Reactor

DIN Track Mounting

Bracket

Digital Operator

3G3HV-PUZDAB j

3G3IV-PEZZ08122 j

3G3IV-PJVOP146

3G3IV-PJVOP140

Casing 3G3IV-PEZZ08386A

Digital Operator Cable 3G3IV-PCN j

Description

Uses a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.

(Usage rate: 3% ED.)

Uses a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.

(Usage rate: 10% ED.)

Suppresses harmonic current generated from the

Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter.

An adapter making it possible to easily mount the

Inverter to DIN tracks.

A Digital Operator with a casing, but no FREQUENCY adjuster. It can be used for remote control or when the inverter panel needs to be located on the front of the control panel.

A Digital Operator with a FREQUENCY adjuster, but no casing. It can be used for remote control or when the inverter panel needs to be located on the front of the control panel.

Casing for a Digital Operator (for the

3G3IV-PJVOP140 only).

The cable to connect an Inverter to the Digital

Operator casing for remote control.

9-7

Specifications

Recommended Options

Name

AC Reactor (Yaskawa

Electric)

Model

3G3IV-PUZBAB j

EMC-conforming

Input Noise Filter

(Rasmi)

3G3IV-PRS j

Simple Input Noise

Filter (Yaskawa

Electric)

Input Noise Filter

(Soshin Electric)

Output Noise Filter

(Tokin)

3G3EV-PLNFD j

3G3IV-PFN j

3G3IV-PLF j

Chapter 9

Description

Suppresses harmonic current generated from the

Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter.

Connect the AC Reactor to the Inverter if the capacity of the power supply is much larger than that of the

Inverter.

A Noise Filter on the input side meeting the EC

Directive’s EMC requirements.

The top of the Noise Filter has mounting screw holes with which the Inverter mounted to the Noise Filter can be secured.

Each of these Filters connected to the power input side eliminates noise in the power line connected to

Inverter to the power line.

Connect this Filter to the output side of the Inverter to suppress the noise generated by the Inverter from being transmitted to the output line.

9-8

Specifications

9-2-2 DeviceNet Communications Unit

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PDRT2

This Communications Unit is required for Inverter control by DeviceNet. The following smart slave functions can be used when a DeviceNet Unit is mounted to the Inverter. These functions reduce wiring requirements, enable advanced diagnosis and prevention of equipment failure, and allow monitoring with a PT or Configurator.

Refer to the User’s Manual for the DeviceNet Communications Unit for details.

• Warning torque detection

• Current tracing

• Average power monitoring

• Accumulated operating time monitoring

•

Contact operation count monitoring

•

Communication time monitoring

External Dimensions (mm)

3 38

10.3

9-9

Specifications

Connection Example

CS/CJ DeviceNet Unit

3G3MV-PDRT2 DeviceNet

Communications Unit

3G3MV-series

Inverter

Chapter 9

Switch

RU FW RE

N D V

STO

Power

Supply

Motor

9-2-3 Fan Unit

3G3IV-PFAN

The Fan Unit is a replacement for the presently installed cooling fan of the Inverter. Replace the cooling fan if it has reached the end of its service life or a warning of cooling fan failure (FAN) is indicated.

Inverter

3G3MV-A2007

3G3MV-A2015

3G3MV-A2022

3G3MV-A2037

3G3MV-A2055

3G3MV-A2075

3G3MV-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB037

3G3MV-A4015/-A4022

3G3MV-A4037

3G3MV-A4055

3G3MV-A4075

Fan Unit

3G3IV-PFAN2007

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2022

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

3G3IV-PFAN2015M

3G3IV-PFAN2037

3G3IV-PFAN2037 (2 parts)

Replacement Method

Refer to 8-3 Maintenance and Inspection .

9-10

Specifications

9-2-4 Scaling Meter

K3MA-J

Chapter 9

The Scaling Meter is connected to the multi-function analog output of the Inverter so that the Scaling Meter will display the rpm and speed values of the machines and lines in actual units.

Applicable Models

DC voltage/ current inputs None

Relay: 2SPST-NO

Power supply voltage

100 to 240 V AC (50/60 Hz) 24 V AC (50/60 Hz), 24 V

K3MA-J: 24 V AC/DC K3MA-J:

100 to 240 V AC

K3MA-J-A2, 100 to 240 V AC K3MA-J-A2: 24 V AC/DC

Standard Specifications

Input signals

A/D conversion

Input impedance

Sampling period

DC voltage/current (0 to 20 mA, 4 to 20 mA, 0 to 5 V, 1 to 5 V,

10 V)

Double integral method

Current input: 45

Ω

max; voltage input: 1 M

Ω

min.

250 ms

Display refresh period

Max. displayed digits

Display type

Sampling period (with average value processing:

Sample period x No. of averages)

5 (–19,999 to 99,999)

7-segment digital display

Sign display

Zero suppression

(leftmost digits)

Scaling

Minus sign (–) displayed automatically for negative input signals.

Supported

Hold functions

Comparative output hysteresis

Other functions

Programmed (The displayed range corresponds to the maximum number of displayed digits.)

The decimal point position can be set as required.

Maximum value hold, minimum value hold

Programmed with front-panel keys (0001 to 9999)

Forced–zero by front-panel keys, zero reset, scaling teaching, display color switching (green [red], green, red [green], red), comparative output switching (upper limit, lower limit, upper/lower limits), average value processing (simple averaging: OFF, 2, 4, or 8 times)

Relay: DPST-NO Output form

Comparative output response time

Enclosure ratings

750 ms max.

Front panel: NEMA4X for indoor use (equivalent to IP66), Rear case: IP20

Terminals: IP00 + finger protection (VDE0106/100)

Memory protection Nonvolatile memory (100,000 overwrites)

9-11

Specifications

Wiring Example

Three-phase power supply

Circuit breaker for wiring

Inverter’s internal circuitry

Analog monitor

Analog output

–10 to +10 V DC

External Dimensions (mm)

Terminal cover

(included)

Recommended panel cutout

Terminals: M3, Terminal cover included.

Main display LED size

9-2-5 Braking Resistor

3G3IV-PERF

Uses a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.

(Usage rate: 3% ED.)

Note “Usage rate: 3% ED” indicates that the deceleration time can be reduced by

3% of the operating time of one cycle.

Refer to 2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit for precautions when selecting the Braking

Resistor.

Chapter 9

9-12

Specifications

Applicable Models

Inverter

Voltage class

200 V

400 V

3.7

5.5

7.5

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

Max.

applicable motor capacity

(kW)

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

5.5

7.5

PERF150WJ401

PERF150WJ201

PERF150WJ101

PERF150WJ700

PERF150WJ620

---

PERF150WJ751

PERF150WJ401

PERF150WJ301

PERF150WJ401

---

Model

3G3IV-

Braking Resistor

Resistor specifications

150 W, 400 Ω

150 W, 200

Ω

150 W, 100 Ω

150 W, 70

Ω

150 W, 62

Ω

---

150 W, 750

Ω

150 W, 400 Ω

150 W, 300

Ω

150 W, 400 Ω

---

Note The usage rate for the 3G3IV-PERF150WJ401 is 2% ED.

External Dimensions (mm)

---

Chapter 9

Number of parts b ki

(3% ED)

(%)

220

125

120

100

---

230

130

125

115

(See note.)

---

9-13

Specifications

9-2-6 Braking Resistor Unit

3G3IV-PLKEB

Chapter 9

Use a resistor to absorb regenerative energy of the motor to reduce deceleration time.

(Usage rate: 10% ED.)

Note “Usage rate: 10% ED” indicates that the deceleration time can be reduced by

10% of the operating time of one cycle.

Refer to 2-2-3 Wiring around the Main Circuit for precautions when selecting the Braking

Resistor.

Applicable Models

Inverter

Voltage Max.

Model

200 V

400 V

3.7

5.5

7.5

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

motor capacity

(kW)

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

---

PLKEB20P7

PLKEB21P5

PLKEB22P2

PLKEB23P7

PLKEB25P5

PLKEB27P5

PLKEB40P7

PLKEB41P5

PLKEB42P2

PLKEB43P7

PLKEB45P5

PLKEB47P5

Braking Resistor Unit

Resistor Unit (See note.)

Number of parts

---

70 W, 200

Ω

260 W, 100

260 W, 70 Ω

390 W, 40

Ω

520 W, 30 Ω

780 W, 20

Ω

70 W, 750

780 W, 75

Ω

260 W, 400

260 W, 250

390 W, 150

520 W, 100

Ω

---

Max.

number per

Inverter b

125

115

125

230

130

125

135

---

220

125

120

135

130 ki

(%)

9-14

Specifications

External Dimensions (mm)

Mounting screw

30 min.

A 30 min.

150

Chapter 9

Voltage

200 V

400 V

Braking

27P5

40P7

41P5

42P2

43P7

45P5

47P5 model

3G3IV-PLKEB j

20P7

21P5

22P2

23P7

25P5

Dimensions (mm)

A B C D Mounting screw

105 275 50 260 M5

130 350 75 335 M5

130 350 75 335 M5 × 4

130 350 75 335 M5

250 350 200 335 M6

105 275 50 260 M5

130 350 75 335 M5

130 350 75 335 M5 × 4

250 350 200 335 M6

Weight

8.5

3.0

4.5

5.0

7.5

8.5

3.0

4.5

5.0

7.5

9-2-7 DC Reactor

3G3HV-PUZDAB

The DC Reactor suppresses harmonic current generated from the Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter. The DC Reactor suppresses harmonic current more effectively than the AC Reactor. Furthermore, the DC Reactor can be used in combination with the AC

Reactor.

Applicable Models

Voltage class

200 V

400 V

Inverter

Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

0.1 to 0.75

1.5 to 3.7

5.5 to 7.5

0.2 to 0.75

1.5 to 2.2

3.7

5.5 to 7.5

Model

3G3HV-

DC Reactor

Rated voltage (V)

Rated current (A)

PUZDAB5.4A8MH

800 V DC 5.4

PUZDAB18A3MH

PUZDAB36A1MH

PUZDAB3.2A28MH

800 V DC 3.2

PUZDAB5.7A11MH

5.7

PUZDAB12A6.3MH

PUZDAB23A3.6MH

Inductance

(mH)

6.3

3.6

Loss (W)

9-15

Specifications

External Dimensions (mm)

External Dimension 1

Chapter 9

External Dimension 2

Two, d2 mounting holes

Two, d1 mounting holes

Four, d1 mounting holes

Model

3G3HV-

PUZDAB j

5.4A8MH

External sion

18A3MH

36A1MH

3.2A28MH

5.7A11MH

12A6.3MH

23A3.6MH

H W

105

Dimension (mm)

D D1 D2

---

0.8

1.2

1.6

0.8

1.2

1.6

Weight d1

M6 d2

---

0.8

2.0

3.2

0.8

1.0

2.0

3.2

9-2-8 DIN Track Mounting Bracket

3G3IV-PEZZ08122

An adapter making it possible to easily mount the Inverter to DIN tracks.

Applicable Models

Inverter

3G3MV-A2001/-A2002/-A2004/-A2007

3G3MV-A2015/-A2022

3G3MV-A2037

3G3MV-AB001/-AB002/-AB004

3G3MV-AB007/-AB015

3G3MV-AB022

3G3MV-AB037

DIN Track Mounting

Bracket

3G3IV-PEZZ08122A

3G3IV-PEZZ08122B

3G3IV-PEZZ08122C

3G3IV-PEZZ08122A

3G3IV-PEZZ08122B

3G3IV-PEZZ08122C

3G3IV-PEZZ08122D

3G3MV-A4002/-A4004/-A4007/-A4015/-A4022 3G3IV-PEZZ08122B

3G3MV-A4037 3G3IV-PEZZ08122C

9-16

Specifications

External Dimensions (mm)

3G3IV-PEZZ08122A 3G3IV-PEZZ08122B

Chapter 9

Four, M4 tap

3G3IV-PEZZ08122C

Side View

(Common to all the Units)

3G3IV-PEZZ08122D

Four, M4 tap

Four, M4 tap Four, M4 tap

9-2-9 Digital Operators

3G3IV-PJVOP140 (with FREQUENCY adjuster)

3G3IV-PJVOP146 (without FREQUENCY adjuster)

•

The 3G3IV-PJVOP140 and 3G3IV-PJVOP146 are dedicated 3G3JV- and 3G3MV-series Digital Operators. They can be used for remote control or when the Inverter panel needs to be located on the front of the control panel.

• The 3G3IV-PJVOP140 and 3G3IV-PJVOP146 Digital Operators can store parameter settings, copy stored settings to another Inverter, and compare stored settings to Inverter settings.

•

Be sure to mount the 3G3IV-PJVOP140 in a 3G3IV-PEZZ08386A casing prior to use because the Digital Operator itself cannot be mounted on or connected by cable to a control panel.

Note The enclosure rating of the 3G3IV-PJVOP146 and that of the 3G3IV-PJVOP140 mounted in a

3G3IV-PEZZ08386A casing both conform to IP20. If the packing provided with the 3G3IV-

9-17

Specifications Chapter 9

PJVOP146 is used to mount the Digital Operator in a control panel, then its enclosure rating conforms to IP54.

3G3MV-series

Inverter

3G3IV-PJVOP146 Digital Operator

(without FREQUENCY adjuster)

3G3MV-series

Inverter

3G3IV-PJVOP146 Digital Operator

(with FREQUENCY adjuster)

3G3IV-PCNo26

Digital Operator cable

3G3IV-PEZZ08386A

Digital Operator casing

Dimensions (mm)

3G3IV-PJVOP140

8 max.

3G3IV-PJVOP146

3.6 dia.

Four 4.4 dia. mm mounting holes

Four M4 nut countersinks 3.5 mm deep

9-18

Specifications

Dimensions (mm)

3G3IV-PEZZ08386A

Four 4.4 dia. mm mounting holes

Chapter 9

Four M4 nut countersinks 3.5 mm deep

Control Panel Mounting Procedures

The 3G3IV-PJVOP146 Digital Operator and the 3G3IV-PJVOP140 Digital Operator in a 3G3IV-

PEZZ08386A casing can be mounted to the front or back of a control panel.

Panel cutout dimensions for front mounting

Front mounting procedure

Panel cutout

Four 3.5 mm radius max.

(Rubber washer)

Fastening screws

Mounting panel

(Packing A)

Digital Operator attachment

Rear mounting procedure

M4 nuts

(Rubber washer)

Cut off the area marked by diagonal lines to make room for the CN2 connector.

Tap, four M4 holes

Panel cutout dimensions for rear mounting

Digital Operator attachment

(Packing B)

Mounting panel

Fastening screws

Panel cutout

Six 3 mm radius max.

Four 4.3 dia. mounting holes

9-19

Specifications

9-2-10 AC Reactor

Chapter 9

3G3IV-PUZBAB

(Yaskawa Electric)

The AC Reactor suppresses harmonic current generated from the Inverter and improves the power factor of the Inverter. Connect the AC Reactor to the Inverter if the capacity of the power supply is much larger than that of the Inverter. Select the AC Reactor model from the following table according to the motor capacity.

Connection Example

MCCB AC Reactor

Motor

Applicable Range

Power supply capacity (kVA)

AC Reactor required for smooth operation under present power supply conditions

AC Reactor not required

Inverter capacity (kVA)

9-20

Specifications Chapter 9

Applicable Models and Dimensions

200-V Class

Current (A)

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

0.1 to 0.2

0.4

0.75

Model

3G3IV-PUZBAB j

2A7.0MH

2.5A4.2MH

5A2.1MH

10A1.1MH

15A0.71MH

20A0.53MH

30A0.35MH

40A0.265MH

2.5

Inductance

(mH)

7.0

4.2

2.1

1.1

0.71

0.53

0.35

0.265

Loss (W) Weight (kg)

2.5

Model

3G3IV-PUZBAB j

2A7.0MH

2.5A4.2MH

5A2.1MH

10A1.1MH

15A0.71MH

20A0.53MH

30A0.35MH

40A0.265MH

120 71

130 88

130 98

---

115 40

120 40

---

130 50

114 105 50

119 105 50

139 105 50

Dimension (mm)

E F

105 20

105

130

400-V Class

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

Max. applicable motor capacity (kW)

0.2 to 0.4

0.75

1.5

Model

3G3IV-PUZBAB j

1.3A18.0MH

2.5A8.4MH

5A4.2MH

7.5A3.6MH

10A2.2MH

15A1.42MH

20A1.06MH

Current (A)

1.3

2.5

7.5

Inductance

(mH)

18.0

8.4

4.2

3.6

2.2

1.42

1.06

J K

M6 10.5

M6 11.5

M6 9 7

M6 11.5

Loss (W)

2.5

Weight (kg)

9-21

Specifications Chapter 9

Model

3G3IV-PUZBAB j

1.3A18.0MH

2.5A8.4MH

5A4.2MH

7.5A3.6MH

10A2.2MH

15A1.42MH

20A1.06MH

Dimensions

120 71

130 88

130 98

160 90

---

115

120

130

All models except the four models shown on the right

Dimension (mm)

E F

105 20

105

130

160

M Terminal

M6 10.5

10.5

M6 9

M6 10

M6 11.5

3G3IV-PUZBAB20A0.53MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB30A0.53MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB40A0.265MH

3G3IV-PUZBAB20A1.06MH

M Terminal

Nameplate

Mounting Dimensions

4-J mounting bolt 4-J mounting bolt

Mounting Dimensions

9-2-11 EMC-compatible Noise Filter

3G3MV-PRS

(Rasmi)

•

Be sure to select an optimum Noise Filter from the following so that the Inverter will satisfy EMC directive requirements of the EC Directives.

•

Connect the Noise Filter between the power supply and the input terminals (R/L1, S/L2, and T/L3) of the Inverter.

•

The Inverter can be mounted to the upper side of the Noise Filter because the upper side of the Noise

Filter incorporates mounting holes for the Inverter.

9-22

Specifications Chapter 9

Applicable Models

Voltage

Inverter

Model

3G3MV-

Model

EMC-compatible Noise Filter

3G3MV

A2001/A2002/A2004/A2007 PRS2010V

Rated current

(A)

Weight (kg)

0.8

A2015/A2022

A2037

A2055/A2075

Single-phase 200 V AC AB001/AB002/AB004

AB007/AB015

AB022

AB037

A4002/A4004

PRS2020V

PRS2030V

PRS2050V

PRS1010V

PRS1020V

PRS1030V

PRS1040V

PRS3005V

1.0

1.1

2.3

0.6

1.0

1.1

1.2

1.0

A4007/A4015/A4022

A4037

A4055/A4075

PRS3010V

PRS3020V

PRS3030V

1.0

1.1

2.3

Connection Example

MCCB Noise Filter

SYSDRIVE 3G3MV

Clamp core

3-phase 200 V AC, single-phase 200 V AC or

3-phase 400 V AC

9-23

Specifications

External Dimensions

Noise Filters for 3-phase 200/400-V AC Inverter Models

3G3MV-PRS2010V

Three, 5-dia. holes

Two, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PRS2020V/-PRS3005V/PRS3010V

Three, 5-dia. holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Model Dimension (mm)

A B

3-phase 200 V PRS2020V 50

3-phase 400 V PRS3005V 45

PRS3010V 45

9-24

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS2030V/-PRS3020V

Three, 5-dia. holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-25

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS2050V

Three, 6-dia. holes

Four, M5 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-26

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS3030V

Three, 6-dia. holes

Four, M5 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

Noise Filters for Single-phase 200-V AC Models

3G3MV-PRS1010V

Three, 5-dia. holes

Two, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

9-27

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS1020V

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

3G3MV-PRS1030V

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

9-28

Specifications

3G3MV-PRS1040V

Three, 5-dia holes

Four, M4 holes

(for Inverter mounting use)

Chapter 9

9-29

Specifications

9-2-12 Simple Input Noise Filter and Input Noise Filter

Chapter 9

3G3EV-PLNFD

(Yaskawa Electric)/3G3IV-PFN

(Schaffner)

The Simple Input Noise Filter is connected to the power input side to eliminate the noise in the power line connected to the Inverter and suppress noise leaking from the

Inverter to the power line.

Simple Input Noise Filter Input Noise Filter

Applicable Models

Voltage

Inverter

Model

3G3MV-

Model

3G3EV-

Simple Input Noise Filter

Rated current

A2001/A2002/A2004/A2007 PLNFD2103DY 10

(A)

Weight (kg)

0.2

A2015

A2022

A2037

PLNFD2153DY 15

PLNFD2203DY 20

PLNFD2303DY 30

0.2

0.4

0.5

A2055

A2075

Single-phase 200 V AC AB001/AB002

AB004

AB007

AB015

AB022

AB037

A4002/A4004/A4007

A4015/A4022

A4037

A4055

A4075

PFN258L4207

PFN258L5507

PLNFB2102DY

PLNFB2152DY 15

PLNFB2202DY 20

PLNFB2302DY 30

PLNFB2202DY 20 × 2P

PLNFB2302DY 30 × 2P

PLNFD4053DY 5

PLNFD4103DY 10

PLNFD4153DY 15

PLNFD4203DY 20

PLNFD4303DY 30

2.8

3.1

0.1

0.2

0.3

0.2

0.3

0.4

0.5

0.6

Note The “2P” in the rated current column indicates parallel connection.

9-30

Specifications

Connection Example

3-phase input

Noise filter

Dimensions

Dimensions 1 (Single-phase Input)

Chapter 9

Single-phase input

Noise filter

Note The dotted lines indicate wiring for parallel connection.

Dimensions 2 (Three-phase Input)

Dimensions 3 (Three-phase Input)

Model

PLNFD2103DY 2

PLNFD2153DY

PLNFD2203DY

PLNFD2303DY 3

PLNFB2102DY 1

PLNFB2152DY

PLNFB2202DY

( b )

120

170

120

110

D H max.

Dimension (mm)

A A’

108

158

---

108

---

B Mounting screw

4, 20 mm

M4 × 4, 20 mm

4, 20 mm

M4 × 6, 20 mm

M4 × 4, 20 mm

4, 20 mm

9-31

Specifications

PLNFB2302DY

PLNFD4053DY 3

PLNFD4103DY

PLNFD4153DY

PLNFD4203DY

PLNFD4303DY

Chapter 9

130

170

200

130

145

D H max.

Dimension (mm)

A A’

100

118

---

118

133

B Mounting screw

M4 × 4, 20 mm

6, 30 mm

M4 × 6, 30 mm

6, 30 mm

M4 × 6, 30 mm

Dimensions 4 (Three-phase Input)

J (mounting screw)

Model

PFN258L4207 4

PFN258L5507

( b )

329

300

325

353

185

Dimension (mm)

G H

314

M5 × 4

9-2-13 Output Noise Filter

3G3IV-PLF

(Tokin)

The Output Noise Filter suppresses the generated noise of the Inverter from being transmitted to the output line. Connect the Output Noise Filter to the output side of the Inverter.

9-32

Specifications

Connection Example

Chapter 9

Noise filter

Application Models

Voltage class

200-V class

400-V class

3.7

5.5

7.5

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

Inverter

Max. applicable motor capacity

(kW)

0.1

0.2

0.4

0.75

1.5

2.2

3.7

5.5

7.5

Inverter capacity

(kVA)

6.7

9.5

13.0

0.9

1.4

2.6

3.7

4.2

0.3

0.6

1.1

1.9

3.0

4.2

6.6

11.0

14.0

Output Noise Filter

Model

3G3IV-PLF310KA

3G3IV-PLF320KA

3G3IV-PLF350KA

3G3IV-PLF310KB

3G3IV-PLF320KB

Rated current (A)

Dimensions

External Dimensions

9-33

Specifications Chapter 9

Model

Terminal board

PLF310KA TE-K5.5

PLF320KA

PLF350KA TE-K22

PLF310KB TE-K5.5

PLF320KB

140

260

140

100

180

100

Dimension (mm)

D E

100 90 70 45

180

100

160

120

G H

7 × 4.5 dia. 4.5 dia.

0.5

0.6

7 × 4.5 dia.

2.0

7 × 4.5 dia.

0.5

0.6

9-34

Chapter 10 List of Parameters

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Function Group 1 (n001 through n049)

Name Description Parameter

No.

n001

Register No.

(Hex)

0101 Parameter write-prohibit selection/parameter initialization

Used to prohibit parameters to be written, sets parameters, or change the monitor range of parameters.

Used to initialize parameters to default settings.

0: Parameter n001 is set or displayed. Parameters from n002 to n179 can be displayed only.

1: Parameters from n001 to n049

(function group 1) are set or displayed.

2: Parameters from n001 to n079

(function groups 1 and 2) are set or displayed.

3: Parameters from n001 to n119

(function groups 1 through 3) are set or displayed.

4: Parameters from n001 to n179

(function groups 1 through 4) are set or displayed.

6: Clears the error log.

8: Initializes parameters to default settings in 2-wire sequence.

9: Initializes parameters to default settings in 3-wire sequence.

10: For the USA, initializes parameter in 2-wire sequence.

11: For the USA, initializes parameter in 3-wire sequence.

Setting range

0 to 9 1

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

3-12

5-2

10-2

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n002 n003

0102

0103

Name

Control mode selection

RUN command selection

Description Setting range

Used to select the control mode of the

Inverter.

0: V/f control mode

1: Vector control mode (open loop)

* The set value in n002 is not initialized with n001 set to 8, 9, 10, or 11.

* Each of the following parameters is initialized according to the preset control mode. The default setting varies with the control mode.

n014: Middle output frequency n015: Middle output frequency voltage n016: Minimum output frequency n017: Minimum output frequency voltage n104: Torque compensation primary delay time constant n111: Slip compensation gain n112: Slip compensation primary delay time constant

See the reference pages for details.

Used to select the input method for the RUN and STOP commands in remote mode.

0: The STOP/RESET Key on the digital Operator is enabled.

1: Multi-function input is enabled through the control circuit terminals in 2- or 3-wire sequence.

2: RS-422/485 communications are enabled.

3: Input is enabled from the optional

DeviceNet Communications Unit.

* The RUN command only through key sequences on the Digital Operator is acceptable in local mode.

0, 1

0 to 3 1

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-3

0 No 5-10

10-3

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n004 n005 n006 n007 n008 n009

0104

0105

0106

0107

0108

0109

Name

Frequency reference selection

Stopping method selection

Reverse rotation-prohibit selection

STOP Key function selection

Frequency reference selection in local mode

Operator frequency setting method selection

Description

Used to set the input method for the frequency reference in remote mode.

0: Digital Operator

1: Frequency reference 1 (n024)

2: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 10 V)

3: Frequency reference control terminal (4 to 20 mA)

4: Frequency reference control terminal (0 to 20 mA)

5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

6: Frequency reference through

RS-422/RS-485 is enabled.

7: Multi-function analog voltage input

(0 to 10 V) is enabled.

8: Multi-function analog current input

(4 to 20 mA) is enabled.

9: Frequency reference input through

DeviceNet communications is enabled.

Used to set the stopping method for use when the STOP command is input.

0: Decelerates to stop in preset time.

1: Coasts to stop (with output turned

OFF by the STOP command)

Used to select the operation with the reverse command input.

0: Reverse enabled (accept).

1: Reverse disabled (not accept).

Used to enable/disable the STOP Key in remote mode with n003 for operation mode selection not set to 0.

0: STOP Key of the Digital Operator enabled.

1: STOP Key of the Digital Operator disabled.

Used to set the input method for the frequency reference in local mode.

0: The FREQ adjuster of the Digital

Operator enabled.

1: Key sequences on the Digital

Operator enabled. (Set in n024.)

Used to enable the Enter Key for setting the frequency reference with the

Increment and Decrement Keys.

0: The value is entered with the Enter

Key pressed.

1: The value is enabled when the value is input.

Setting range

0 to 9 1

Unit of setting

0, 1

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-11

5-29

5-28

5-10

5-12

5-22

10-4

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

n010 n011 n012 n013 n014 n015 n016 n017 n018

Register No.

(Hex)

010A

010B

010C

010D

010E

010F

0110

0111

0112

Name Description Setting range

Operation selection at

Digital Operator interruption

Maximum frequency

(FMAX)

Maximum voltage

(VMAX)

Maximum voltage frequency (FA)

Middle output frequency

(FB)

Middle output frequency voltage (VC)

Minimum output frequency

(FMIN)

Minimum output frequency voltage

(VMIN)

Acceleration/

Deceleration time setting

Unit (n018)

Select whether or not to detect the

OPR error (Digital Operator connection error).

0: No (The Inverter continues operating.)

1: Yes

(Error output turns ON and the

Inverter coasts to a stop)

Used to set the V/f pattern as the basic characteristic of the Inverter.

V/f control mode: set output voltage per frequency

Vector control mode: set for torque adjustment

Output voltage n012

(V)

0, 1

50.0 to

400.0

n015

0.1 to

255.0

(0.1 to

510.0)

0.2 to

400.0

n017 n016 n014 n013 n011 quency

(Hz)

0.1 to

399.9

* Set the parameters so that the following condition will be satisfied.

n016 x n014 < n013 x n011

* The value set in n015 will be ignored if parameters n016 and

0.1 to

255.0

(0.1 to

510.0)

0.1 to

10.0

Select the unit of acceleration or deceleration time of the Inverter.

0: 0.1 s Unit

(Less than 1,000 s: 0.1-s increments; 1,000 s or over: 1-s increments)

1: 0.01 s Unit

(Less than 100 s: 0.01-s increments; 100 s or over: 0.1-s increments)

0.1 to

50.0

(0.1 to

100.0)

0, 1

Unit of setting

0.1

Default setting

60.0

0.1 V 200.0

(400.0)

(See note 1.)

60.0

1.5

0.1 V 12.0

(24.0)

0.1

(See note 2.)

1.5

0.1 V 12.0

(24.0)

(See note 2)

1 0

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-39

5-7

5-25

Note 1.

The values in brackets are those for 400-V-class Inverters.

Note 2.

For 200 and 400-V-class 5.5-/7.7-kW Inverters, this value is 10.0 V (20.0 V).

10-5

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n019 n020 n021 n022 n023 n024 n025 n026 n027 n028 n029 n030 n031 n032

0113

0114

0115

0116

0117

0118

0119

011A

011B

011C

011D

011E

011F

0120

Frequency reference 1

Frequency reference 2

Frequency reference 3

Frequency reference 4

Frequency reference 5

Frequency reference 6

Frequency reference 7

Frequency reference 8

Inching frequency command

Name

Acceleration time 1

Deceleration time 1

Acceleration time 2

Deceleration time 2

S-shape acceleration/ deceleration characteristic

Description

Acceleration time: The time required to go from 0% to 100% of the maximum frequency.

Deceleration time: The time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.

* The actual acceleration or deceleration time is obtained from the following formula.

Setting range

0.0 to

6,000

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(chan ge in

Default setting

10.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-25

10.0

Yes 5-25

10.0

(Acceleration/Deceleration time set value) × (Frequency reference value) ÷ (Max. frequency)

Used to set S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristics.

0: No S-shape acceleration/deceleration (trapezoidal acceleration/deceleration)

1: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 0.2 s

2: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 0.5 s

3: S-shape acceleration/deceleration characteristic time 1.0 s

* When the S-shape acceleration/ deceleration characteristic time is set, the acceleration and deceleration times will be lengthened according to the S-shape at the beginning and end of acceleration/ deceleration.

Used to set internal frequency refer-

0 to 3 1

0.0 to max.

* Frequency reference 1 is enabled quency reference selection set to

* These frequency references are quency

10.0

0.01

( (chan ge in

6.00

0.00

Yes

5-25

5-27

5-19

( l i f i i ) S the reference pages for the relareferences and frequency refer-

Used to set the inching frequency command.

* The inching frequency command is selected with the inching command

(multi-function input). The inching frequency command takes precedence over the multi-step speed reference.

0.00

6.00

Yes

5-19

5-21

10-6

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n033 0121

Name

Upper frequency reference limit

Description

Used to set the upper and lower frequency reference limits in percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Setting range

0 to

110

Unit of setting

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-12 n034 0122 5-12 n035 n036

0123

0124

Lower frequency reference limit

Frequency reference setting/display unit selection the minimum output frequency

(n016), the Inverter will have no output when a frequency reference less than the minimum output frequency input is input.

Set the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through the Digital

Operator.

0: 0.01 Hz

1: 0.1%

2 to 39: rpm (number of motor poles)

40 to 3,999: The value to be set or monitored at max. frequency.

Set the value as shown below.

0 to

110

0 to

3,999

Rated motor current jjjj

Three digits

Decimal place (See note below)

* To display 50.0, for example, set the value to 1500. The setting unit of each parameter or monitor item below varies with the decimal place.

• Parameters: n024 through n032 and n120 through n127

•

Monitor Items: U-01 and U-02

Used to set the rated motor current for motor overload detection (OL1) based on the rated motor current.

* In vector control mode, this parameter is used as a constant for vector control operation.

* Motor overload detection (OL1) is disabled by setting the parameter to 0.0.

* The rated motor current is default to the standard rated current of the maximum applicable motor.

0.0 to

150% of rated output current of the

Inverter

0.1 A Varies with the capacity

5-18

5-5

5-7

10-7

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n037 0125

Name

Motor protection characteristics

Description

Used to set the motor overload detection (OL1) for the electronic thermal characteristics of the motor.

0: Protection characteristics for general-purpose induction motors

1: Protection characteristics for inverter-dedicated motors

2: No protection

* If a single Inverter is connected to more than one motor, set the parameter to 2 for no protection.

The parameter is also disabled by setting n036 for rated motor to 0.0.

Setting range

0 to 2 1

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-39 n038 0126 Motor protective time

Used to set the electric thermal characteristics of the motor to be connected in 1-minute increments.

* The default setting does not require any changes in normal operation.

* To set the parameter according to the characteristics of the motor, check with the motor manufacturer the thermal time constant and set the parameter with some margin.

In other words, set the value slightly shorter than the thermal time constant.

* To detect motor overloading quicker, reduce the set value, provided that it does not cause any application problems.

1 to 60 1 min 8 No 6-39 n039 1 0 No 6-40 n040

0127

0128

Cooling fan operation

Used to operate the Cooling Fan of the Inverter while the Inverter is turned ON or only while the Inverter is in operation.

0: Rotates only while RUN command is input and for 1 minute after

Inverter stops operating

1: Rotates while Inverter is turned ON

* This parameter is available only if the Inverter incorporates a Cooling

Fan.

* If the operation frequency of the

Inverter is low, the life of the fan can be prolonged by setting the parameter to 0.

0, 1

Motor rotation direction

0: A forward command rotates the motor counterclockwise when viewed from the load.

1: A forward command rotates the motor clockwise when viewed from the load.

0, 1 1 0 No ---

10-8

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n041 n042 n043 n044

0129

012A

012B

012C

Name

Acceleration time 3

Deceleration time 3

Acceleration time 4

Deceleration time 4

Description

Acceleration time: The time it takes maximum frequency to go from 0% to

Deceleration time: The time it takes maximum frequency to go from 100%

Setting range

0.0 to

6,000

Unit of setting

0.1 s

(May be

Default setting

10.0

ed at n018.)

10.0

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page p5-25

Yes p5-25

10.0

Yes p5-25

* Actual acceleration/deceleration i f l A l i /d l tion time setting x frequency reference/maximum frequency

10.0

Yes p5-25

10-9

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Function Group 2 (n050 through n079)

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description n050 0132 Multi-function input 1

Used to select the functions of multi-function input terminals S1 through S7.

minal S1)

Set value

Function Description n051 0133 Multi-function input 2

(Input terminal S2)

0 Forward/

Reverse rotation command

3-wire sequence (to be set in n052 only)

By setting to 0, the set values in n050 and n051 are ignored and the following settings n052 n053 n054 n055 n056

0134

0135

0136

0137

0138

Multi-function input 3

(Input terminal S3)

Multi-function input 4

(Input terminal S4)

Multi-function input 5

(Input terminal S5)

Multi-function input 6 i l S6)

Multi-function input 7

(Input terminal S7)

Forward/

Stop

Reverse/

Stop

S1 RUN i t (RUN when ON)

S2: STOP input

(STOP when OFF)

S3: Forward/Reverse rotation command

(OFF: Forward; ON:

Reverse)

Forward rotation command in 2-wire sequence. (Forward rotation with the signal turned ON)

Reverse rotation command in 2-wire sequence (Reversed with the terminal turned ON)

External fault (NO)

External fault (NC)

ON: External fault

(EF j detection: j is a terminal number)

OFF: External fault

(EF j

detection: j

is a terminal number)

Fault reset ON: Fault reset (disabled while RUN command is input)

0 to

(26

See note.)

1 to

(26

See note.)

1 to

(26

See note.)

1 to

( (26

1 note.)

1 to

35,

(26

See note.)

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

1 No

Reference page

5-30 1 to

See note.)

1 to

(26

See note.)

1 2 No 5-30

5-30

Note Inverter overheating warning (setting value: 26) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-10

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description

Multi-step speed reference 1

Multi-step speed reference 2

Multi-step speed reference 3

Multi-step speed reference 4

Inching frequency command

Signals to select frequency references 1

Refer to 5-6-4 Setting

Frequency References

Sequences for the relationship between multi-step speed referreferences.

Acceleration/deceleration time selection 1

External base block command

(NO)

External base block command

(NC)

Search command

(Searching starts from maximum frequency)

Search command

(Searching starts from preset frequency)

Acceleration/Deceleration-prohibit command

Local or remote selection

Communications/ remote selection

ON: Inching frequency command (taking precedence over the multi-step speed reference)

See set value 27.

ON: Output turned

OFF

OFF: Output turned

OFF

ON: Speed search

(Searching starts from n011)

ON: Speed search

ON: Acceleration/Deceleration is on hold

(running at parameter frequency)

ON: Local mode

(operated with the Digital Operator)

ON: Communications input is enabled.

Chapter 10

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

10-11

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

Emergency stop fault

(NO)

The Inverter stops according to the setting in n005 for interruption mode selection with the emergency

Emergency stop warning (NO)

NO: Emergency stop with the contact closed.

NC: Emergency stop

Emergency stop fault

(NC) opened.

Fault: Fault output is

ON and reset with

RESET input. Warning

(See note)

Emergency stop warning (NC)

PID control cancel

PID control integral reset

PID control integral hold

Inverter overheating warning required).

“STP” is displayed (lit with fault input ON and flashes with alarm input ON)

ON: PID control disabled.

ON: Integral value reset.

ON: Keeps integral value on hold.

ON: Displays inverter overheating warning

(oH3).

Note Inverter overheating warning (setting value: 26) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-12

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name

Chapter 10

Description

27 Acceleration/deceleration time selection 2

A pair of inputs is needed to select acceleration and deceleration times.

I f acceleration/deceleration time selection 2 (setting: 27) is not set at any multi-function input from n050 to n056, the Inverter will determine that the acceleration/deceleration selection 2 is set to

OFF, and select the acceleration/deceleration time.

Selection

OFF OFF

Acceleration/ deceleration time

Acceleration time 1 (n019)

Deceleration time 1 (n020)

OFF ON

Acceleration time 2 (n021)

Deceleration time 2 (n022)

OFF

Acceleration time 3 (n041)

Deceleration time 3 (n042)

Acceleration time 4 (n043)

Deceleration time 4 (n044)

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

10-13

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name

Chapter 10

Description

General purpose input 1

General purpose input 2

General purpose input 3

General purpose input 4

General purpose input 5

General purpose input 6

Up or down command

Self-diagnostic test

The Inverter will not operate with S1 to S7 f ti t Th are used when you want sensors to proformation via the

Inverter for RS422/485 nications (DeviceNet).

The status of S1 to S7 at register 002B regardless of the n050

Multi-function input monitoring is a useful function for DeviceNet.

Up or down command

(set in n056 only)

By setting n056 to 34, the set value in n055 is ignored and the following setting are forcibly made.

S6: Up command

S7: Down command

ON: RS-422/485 communications self-diagnostic test (set in n056 only)

Setting range

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

10-14

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description n057 0139 Multi-func-

( and MC minals) n058 013A Multi-func-

C output terminals) n059 013B Multi-function output t

/ t t minals)

Used to select the functions of multi-function output terminals.

Set value

Function Description

0 Fault output ON: Fault output (with protective function working)

During

RUN

Frequency agree

ON: During RUN

Zero speed ON: Zero speed (at less than min. output frequency)

Frequency detection 1

ON: Output frequency y frequency detection level (n095)

Frequency detection 2

ON: Output frequency agree with frequency reference

Overtorque being monitored (NOcontact output)

ON: Output frequency x frequency detection level (n095)

Output if any of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

n096: Overtorque detection function selection 1

7 Overtorque being monitored (NCcontact output) n097: Overtorque detection function selection 2

098 O t detection level n099: Overtorque detection time

NO contact: ON with overtorque being detected

NC contact: OFF with overtorque being detected

Setting range

Unit of setting

0 to 7,

(21 note.)

0 to 7,

(21

See

0 to 7,

10 to

See note.)

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-36

Note Frequency reference loss (setting value: 20) and inverter overheating warning (setting value: 21) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-15

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name

Chapter 10

Description

Undertorque being monitored

(NO contact output)

Output if either of the following parameter conditions is satisfied.

n117: Undertorque detection function selection n097: Overtorque detection function selection 2

Undertorque being monitored

(NC contact output) detection level n119: Undertorque detection time

Warning output

* NO contact: ON with undertorque being detected

NC contact: OFF with undertorque being detected

ON: Warning being detected (Nonfatal error being detected)

Base block in progress

ON: Base block in progress (in operation with output turned

OFF)

RUN mode ON: Local mode (with the Digital Operator)

Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

10-16

List of Parameters

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description

Chapter 10

Setting range

Unit of setting

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

(See note.)

Inverter ready

ON: Inverter ready to operate (with no fault detected)

Fault retry ON: Fault retry

UV in progress

ON: Undervoltage being monitored

ON: Rotating in reverse direction

Rotating in reverse direction

Speed search in progress

ON: Speed search in progress

Communications output

PID feedback loss

Frequency reference loss

ON: Turns communications output 1 ON.

Inverter overheating warning oH3

ON: PID feedback loss enabled.

ON: Frequency reference lost (when frequency reference loss detection in n064 is enabled, and either analog input or pulse train input is set for frequency reference selection in n004)

ON: Inverter overheating warning (ON when the multi-function input

Inverter overheating warning signal is being input, i.e., when 0H3 is flashing.)

Note Frequency reference loss (setting value: 20) and inverter overheating warning (setting value: 21) can be set for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-17

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting n060 013C Frequency reference gain

Used to set the input characteristics of analog frequency references.

Gain: The frequency of maximum analog input

0 to

255

1% n061 n062 013E Analog frequency reference filter time constant n063 --Not used n064 0140 Frequency reference loss detection (See note.) n065

013D

0141

Frequency reference bias

Multi-function analog output type selection maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: The frequency of minimum analog input

(0 V or 0 or 4 mA) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Used to set the digital filter with a first-order lag for analog frequency references to be input.

---

Selects the frequency loss detection function for when the frequency reference from the control circuit terminal suddenly drops.

0: Disable (Operate according to frequency reference.)

1: Enable (Continue operation at 80% of frequency reference prior to loss.)

* Frequency reference loss: Frequency reference voltage drop of 90% within 400 ms.

Selects the multi-function analog output type.

0: Analog voltage output (functions set in n066)

1: Pulse train output (functions set in n150)

–100 to 100

0.00

2.00

---

0, 1

0.01 s

---

0.10

---

Defaul t setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-13

Yes

---

5-13

5-14

---

5-17

5-38

10-18

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting n066 0142 Multi-function analog output n067 0143 Multi-function analog output gain n068 0144 Multi-function analog voltage input gain n069 0145 Multi-function analog voltage input bias n070 0146 Multi-function analog voltage input filter time constant n071 0147 Multi-function analog current input gain n072 0148 Multi-function analog current input bias n073 0149 Multi-function analog current input filter time constant

Selects the monitor item with n065 set to 0.

0: Output frequency (with 10-V output at max.

frequency)

1: Output current (with 10-V output with

Inverter rated output current)

2: Main circuit DC voltage (with 10-V output at

400 [800] V DC)

3: Vector operation torque monitor (with 10-V output at rated motor torque)

4: Output power (with 10-V output at power equivalent to max. applicable motor capacity) Cannot be monitored in vector control mode.

5: Output voltage (with 10-V output at

200 [400] V AC)

* Values in ( ) apply with n067 set to 1.00.

* Values in [ ] are for 400-V models.

Used to set the output characteristics of multifunction analog output.

Sets the input characteristics of multi-function analog voltage input.

Gain:Sets the frequency of maximum analog maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: Sets the frequency of minimum analog input (0 V) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Sets a primary lag digital filter for multi-function analog voltage input.

Sets the input characteristics of multi-function analog current input.

Gain:Sets the frequency of maximum analog maximum frequency as 100%.

Bias: Sets the frequency of minimum analog input (4 mA) in percentage based on the maximum frequency as 100%.

Sets a primary delay digital filter for multi-function analog current input.

0 to 5 1

0.00

2.00

–255 to 255

0.01

1.00

1% 100

–100 to 100

0.00

2.00

0.00

2.00

0.01 s

–255 to 255

–100 to 100

0.01 s

0.10

100

0.10

Defaul t setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-38

Yes

5-38

5-16

5-17

5-16

5-17

10-19

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting n074 014A Pulse train frequency reference gain

Sets the input characteristics of pulse train input.

Gain:Sets the gain in percentage based on the maximum frequency of the pulse train n075 014B Pulse train frequency reference bias n076 014C Pulse train frequency reference input filter constant n077 014D Multi-function analog input terminal function selection n078 n079

014E

014F

Multi-function analog input terminal selection

Multi-function input frequency bias

Bias: Sets the bias in percentage for frequency reference input at 0-Hz pulse train input based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Sets the pulse train input’s primary-delay digital filter for frequency reference.

Selects the function allocated to the multi-function analog input terminal.

0: Disable multi-function analog input function.

1: Auxiliary frequency reference

2: Frequency gain

3: Frequency bias

4: Output voltage bias

* When setting “3,” also set the standard value for the bias in n079.

Selects whether voltage input or current input is to be used.

0: Enable multi-function analog voltage input

(and disable current input).

1: Enable multi-function analog current input

(and disable voltage input).

When “3” is set for n077, set the standard value for the bias as a percentage, taking the maximum frequency as 100%.

0 to

255

0.00

2.00

0, 1

0 to

–100 to 100

0.01 s

0 to 4 1

1 %

0.10

Defaul t setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

5-23

Yes

5-23

5-24

5-14

10-20

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Function Group 3 (n080 through n0119)

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description n080 0150 Carrier frequency selection n081 0151 Momentary power interruption compensation n082 n083

0152

0153

Number of fault retries

Jump frequency 1

Used to set the carrier frequency.

* The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

* Refer to 6-4 Setting the Carrier Frequency for details.

Used to specify the processing that is performed when a momentary power interruption occurs.

0: Inverter stops operating

1: Inverter continues operating if power interruption is 0.5 s or less.

2: Inverter restarts when power is restored.

5 to 100: Power interruption recovery timer

(Operation will continue after set time times 0.1 s.)

Used set the number of times that reset and restart are automatically attempted for the

Inverter when the Inverter has an overvoltage fault or overcurrent fault.

Used to set the frequency jump function.

Output frequency n084 0154 Jump frequency 2

Setting range

Unit of setting

1 to 4,

7 to 9

0 to

0.00

400.0

0.00

400.0

0, 1,

2, 5 to

100

0.01

Defa ult setting

Varies with the capacity.

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-23

0.00

6-40

6-41

6-42

6-42 n085 0155 Jump frequency 3

Frequency reference

0.00

400.0

0.01

0.00

No n086 0156 Jump width n087 0157 Accumulated operating time function selection

(See note.) n088 0158 Accumulated operating time

(See note.)

* Set n083 to n085 to satisfy the following condition.

n083 y n084 y n085

Selects the operating status to be accumulated.

0: Accumulate the time that the Inverter power is ON (i.e., the time from when the power is turned ON until it is shut OFF).

1: Accumulate Inverter execution time (i.e., the time that forward or reverse signals are being input).

Sets the initial value for the accumulated operating time, with 10 h as 1.

The accumulation begins from the set time.

The accumulated operating time’s monitor value (U-13) can be cleared to 0 by setting “0” here.

0.00

25.50

0, 1

0 to

6,550

0.01

1=10

0.00

6-42

6-43

Note Accumulated operating time can be selected with 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-21

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defa ult setting n089 0159 DC injection braking current n090 015A DC injection braking-to-stop time n091 015B Startup DC injection braking time n092 015C Stall prevention during deceleration

Used to impose DC on the induction motor for braking control.

based on the rated current of the Inverter as

100%.

Output

Minimum output frequency

(n016) n091

Time n090

Used to select a function to change the deceleration time of the motor automatically so that there will be no overvoltage imposed on the motor during deceleration.

0: Stall prevention during deceleration enabled

1: Stall prevention during deceleration disabled

* Be sure to set the parameter to 1 when the

Braking Resistor Unit or a braking resistor is used as an option.

n093 015D Stall prevention level during acceleration n094 015E Stall prevention level during operation

Used to select a function to stop the acceleration of the motor automatically for stall prevention during acceleration.

Sets the level as a percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

Used to select a function to reduce the output frequency of the Inverter automatically for stall prevention during operation.

Sets the level as a percentage based on the rated current of the Inverter as 100%.

n095 015F Frequency detection level

Used to set the frequency to be detected.

* The parameter n059 for multi-function output must be set for the output of frequency detection levels 1 and 2.

n096 0160 Overtorque detection function selection 1

Used to enable or disable overtorque detection and select the processing method after overtorque detection.

0: Overtorque detection disabled

1: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and operation continues (issues alarm)

2: Overtorque detection only when speed coincides and output turned OFF (for protection)

3: Overtorque always detected and operation continues (issues alarm)

4: Overtorque always detected and output turned OFF (for protection) n097 0161 Overtorque detection function selection 2

Select the item to detect overtorque.

0: Detected from output torque.

1: Detected from output current.

0 to

100

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

25.5

0, 1

30 to

200

30 to

200

0.00

400.0

0, 1

0.1 s

0.01

0 to 4 1

0.5

0.0

170

160

0.00

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-26

6-27

6-28

6-29

6-44

6-31

6-32

10-22

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defa ult setting n098 0162 Overtorque detection level n099 0163 Overtorque detection time n100 0164 UP/DOWN frequency memory

Used to set overtorque detection level.

Detection from output torque: Set as a percentage based on the rated motor torque as 100%.

Detection from output current: Set as a percentage based on the rated Inverter output current as 100%.

Used to set the detection time for overtorque.

n101 n102 n103 n104 n105 0169 Torque compensation core loss n106

0165

0166

0167

0168

016A

Speed search deceleration time (See note.)

Speed search operating level (See note.)

Torque compensation gain

Torque compensation primary delay time constant

Rated motor slip

Used to store the adjusted frequency reference with the UP/DOWN function.

0: Frequency not stored

1: Frequency stored

The frequency must be on hold for 5 s or more.

Sets the speed search deceleration time as the time required to go from 100% to 0% of the maximum frequency.

This is a constant for adjusting the speed search function. If “0.0” is set, the Inverter will operate at the default time of 2.0 seconds.

Sets the speed search operating level as a percentage, taking the Inverter’s rated output current as 100%.

This is a constant for adjusting the speed search function. If the Inverter output current falls below the set value, the speed search will be judged as completed and acceleration will begin again.

Used to set the gain of the torque compensation function.

* The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

Sets the response speed of the torque compensation function.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Sets the core loss of the motor in use.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

* This parameter is enabled in V/f control mode only.

Used to set the rated slip value of the motor in use.

* Used as the constant of the slip compensation function or vector control.

30 to

200

0.1 to

10.0

0, 1

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

200

0.0 to

2.5

0.0 to

25.5

0.0 to

6,550

0.0 to

20.0

1 %

0.1

160

0.1 s 0.1

0.1 s 2.0

150

1.0

0.1 s 0.3

0.1 W Varies with the capacity.

Varies with the capacity.

Yes

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-32

6-45

5-35

6-35

6-37

Note Speed search deceleration time and speed search operating level can be set for 5.5-kW and

7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-23

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting n107 n108 016C Motor leakage inductance n109 016D Torque compensation limit n110

016B

016E

Motor phase-toneutral resistance

Motor noload current

Set this parameter to the phase-to-neutral resistance or 1/2 of the phase-to-phase resistance of the motor.

* This parameter is used as a vector control constant.

Sets the leakage inductance of the motor in use.

* This parameter is used as a vector control constant.

* The Inverter with the default setting in this parameter fully functions in vector control.

Sets a limit on the torque compensation function in vector control mode.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

* The Inverter in torque compensation control limits the torque at a current 1.5 times larger than the set value.

Used to set the no-load current of the motor in use based on the rated motor current as 100%.

* Used as the constant of vector control and the slip compensation function.

0.000

65.50

0.00

655.0

0 to

250

0 to

99 n111 n112 n113 n114

016F

0170

0171

Slip compensation gain

Slip compensation primary delay time

Slip compensation during regeneration

Not used

0.001

Ω

0.01

1% 150 No

Used to set the gain of the slip compensation function.

* The default is set to 1.0 in vector control mode.

* The slip compensation function is disabled with n111 set to 0.0.

Used for the response speed of the slip compensation function.

* The default is set to 0.2 in vector control mode.

* The default setting does not need any changes in normal operation.

Selects the slip compensation function in regenerative operation.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

* This parameter is valid only in vector control mode.

---

0.0 to

2.5

0.0 to

25.5

0, 1

---

0.1

0.1 s

---

2.0

---

Varies with the capacity

0.0

Yes

---

Defa ult setting

Varies with the capacity

Changes during operation

Reference page

5-5

6-2

Varies with the capacity.

No 6-2

6-3

5-6

6-37

6-38

---

10-24

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Para meter

No.

Register

No.

(Hex)

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Defa ult setting n115 0173 Stall prevention level automatic suppression selection n116 0174 Stall prevention acceleration/ deceleration time setting n117 n118 n119

0175

0176

0177

Undertorque detection function selection

Undertorque detection level

Undertorque detection time

Selects whether or not to automatically decrease the level for stall prevention during operation if the frequency lies in a constant output range exceeding the frequency set in n013 for max. voltage frequency (a range greater than the rated motor frequency).

0: Automatic suppression function disabled

(the value of n094 is valid for any frequency)

1: Automatic suppression function enabled.

* The operation level is decreased by n094 ×

(max. voltage frequency/output frequency).

* The stall prevention function during operation operates according to the acceleration/ deceleration time set in n116.

Sets the acceleration/deceleration time for the stall prevention function during operation.

0: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 1 or 2, whichever is selected.

1: Accelerates or decelerates according to acceleration/deceleration time 2 (n021/n022).

* When a faster (or slower) acceleration/deceleration time is desired, set this parameter to “1” and set the desired acceleration/deceleration time for stall prevention operation in acceleration/deceleration time 2.

0: Undertorque detection disabled

1: Undertorque detection only when speed coincides and operation continues (UL3

Warning)

2: Undertorque detection only when speed coincides and output turned OFF (UL3

Fault)

3: Undertorque always detected and operation continues (UL3 Warning)

4: Undertorque always detected and output turned OFF (UL3 Fault)

Used to set undertorque detection level.

Detection from output torque: Set as a percentage based on the rated motor torque as

100%.

Detection from output current: Set as a percentage based on the rated Inverter output current as 100%.

Used to set the detection time for undertorque.

Undertorque will be detected if a torque that is equal to or less than the undertorque detection level continues for the time set here.

0, 1

0 to 4 1

0 to

200

0.1 to

10.0

0.1 s

(See note.)

10%

(See note.)

0.1 s

(See note.)

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-29

6-30

6-32

6-33

6-34

Note These parameters are available on 200-V/400-V, 4.0-kW (or less) Inverters (software version

VSP010024 or higher) or 5.5-kW/7.5-kW Inverters (VSP010104 or higher).

10-25

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Function Group 4 (n120 through n179)

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n120 n121 n122 n123 n124 n125 n126 n127 n128 n129 n130 n131 n132 n133

0178

0179

017A

017B

017C

017D

017E

017F

0180

0181

0182

0183

0184

0185

Name

Frequency reference 9

Frequency reference 10

Frequency reference 11

Frequency reference 12

Frequency reference 13

Frequency reference 14

Frequency reference 15

Frequency reference 16

PID control selection

Description

Sets the internal frequency refer-

* These frequency references are erences (multi-function inputs).

quency references and frequency

Setting range

0.00

Unit of setting

0.01

Hz max.

ngewith set-

Default setting

Changes during operation

0.00

Yes

Reference page

5-19

0.00

Feedback value adjustment gain

Proportional

(P) gain

Integral (I) time

Selects the PID control method.

0: PID control disabled.

1 to 8: PID control enabled.

* The derivative control method (i.e., the derivative control of the deviation or detected value), the addition of the frequency reference, and the positive or negative characteristics of PID control are selectable.

Sets the value by which the feedback value is multiplied.

* This parameter is used for adjusting the target and detected values so that they will have the same input level.

0 to 8

0.00 to

10.00

Sets the proportional (P) gain for PID control.

* PID control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

Sets the integral (I) time for PID control.

* Integral control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

0.0 to

25.0

0.0 to

360.0

0.01

0.1

0.1 s

Derivative (D) time

Sets the derivative (D) time for PID control.

* Derivative control is disabled with this parameter set to 0.0.

PID offset adjustment

This parameter is for the offset adjustment of all PID control.

Sets the parameter as a percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

0.00 to

2.50

–100 to 100

0.01

1.00

1.0

0.00

Yes

5-19

6-16

6-17

10-26

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n134 n135 n136 n137 n138 n139 n140 n141

0186

0187

0188

0189

018A

018B

018C

018D

Name

Integral (I) upper limit

PID primary delay time

Feedback loss detection selection

Feedback loss detection level

Feedback loss detection time

Energy-saving control selection

Energy-saving control coefficient K2

Energy-saving voltage lower limit at

60-Hz output

Description

Sets the upper limit value of integral control output.

Sets the parameter as a percentage based on the maximum frequency as

100%.

Set this parameter to the primary delay time constant for the frequency reference after PID control.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Sets the detection method of feedback loss in PID control.

0: Feedback loss detection disabled.

1: Feedback loss detection enabled

(Nonfatal error: FbL warning)

2: Feedback loss detection enabled

(Fatal error: FbL fault)

Sets the detection level of feedback loss.

Sets the parameter as a percentage based on the feedback value equivalent to the maximum frequency as

100%.

Sets the detection time of feedback loss.

* If the detection level set in n137 or lower is detected for the set time in n138, the result will be determined as feedback loss.

Select the energy-saving control function.

0: Disabled

1: Enabled

* This parameter is enabled in V/f control mode only.

Sets the coefficient for the primary level of energy-saving control.

* The constant automatically changes according to the motor code in n158. Make fine adjustments of the contact if necessary after setting the motor code in n158.

These parameters prevent the output voltage of the Inverter from dropping excessively so that the motor will not stall or come to a stop at the primary level of energy-saving control.

Setting range

0 to

100

0.0 to

10.0

0 to

100

0.0 to

25.5

0, 1

0.0 to

6,550

0 to

120

Unit of setting

0.1 s

0 to 2 1

0.1 s

0.1

Default setting

100

Changes during operation

Yes

Reference page

6-17

0.0

1.0

Varies with the capacity

Yes

6-17

6-18

6-6

6-7

6-8 n142 018E 0 to 25 1% 12 No 6-8 Energy-saving voltage lower limit at

6-Hz output as a percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as

100%.

* Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

10-27

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n143 n144 n145 n146

018F

0190

0191

0192

---

Probe operation voltage limit

Name

Power averaging time

Probe operation control voltage step at 100%

Probe operation control voltage step at 5%

Not used ---

Description Setting range

Unit of setting

1 (24 ms)

Sets the time required to calculate the average of power used in energy-saving control.

Power averaging time (ms) = Set value x 24 (ms)

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

Sets the range of voltage control for the secondary level of energy-saving control.

Sets the parameter as a percentage based on the rated motor voltage as

100%.

* No probe operation is available with the parameter set to 0.

Sets the range of probe operation voltage as a percentage based on the rated motor voltage as 100%.

1 to

200

0 to

100

0.1 to

10.0

0.1%

0.5

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-7

6-9

6-9 not need to be changed.

0.1 to

10.0

---

0.1%

---

0.2

---

6-9

--n147 n148 n149 0195 2,500 No 5-23 n150 0196

Pulse train input scale

Multi-function analog output, pulse train frequency selection.

Set this parameter to the pulse train input scale so that frequency references can be executed by pulse train input.

Set the maximum pulse train frequency in 10-Hz increments based on

10 Hz as 1.

* This parameter is enabled with n004 for frequency reference selection set to 5.

Select the relationship between the pulse train output frequency and output frequency.

0: 1,440 Hz at max. frequency (A proportional relationship is applied to frequencies less than the maximum frequency)

1: 1x output frequency

6: 6x output frequency

12: 12x output frequency

24: 24x output frequency

36: 36x output frequency

* This parameter is enabled with n065 set to 1.

100 to

3,300

0, 1, 6,

12, 24,

1 (10

Hz)

0 No 5-39

10-28

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n151 0197

Name

RS-422/485 communications timeover detection selection

Description

The set value in the parameter determines whether communications timeover detection will be performed with

“CE” displayed if there is an interval of more than 2 s between normal communications and how the detected communications time-over will be processed.

0: Detects time-over, fatal error, and the Inverter coasts to a stop.

1: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 1.

2: Detects time-over, detects fatal error, and the Inverter decelerates to a stop in deceleration time 2.

3: Detects time-over, detects nonfatal error warning, and the Inverter continues operating.

4: No time-over is detected.

Setting range

0 to 4 1

Unit of setting

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

7-2 n152 0198 0 No 7-3 n153 n154

0199

019A

RS-422/485 communications frequency reference/display unit selection

Sets the unit of frequency reference and frequency-related values to be set or monitored through communications.

0: 0.1 Hz

1: 0.01 Hz

2: Converted value based on 30,000 as max. frequency

3: 0.1% (Max. frequency: 100%)

0 to 3 1

RS-422/485 communications Slave address

RS-422/485 baud rate selection

Set this parameter to the Slave address (Slave unit number) for communications.

00: Broadcast message (with the communications function disabled)

01 to 32: Slave address

00 to

Select the communications baud rate.

0: 2,400 bps

1: 4,800 bps

2: 9,600 bps

3: 19,200 bps

0 to 3 1

7-3

7-4 n155 n156

019B

019C

RS-422/485 parity selection

RS-422/485 send wait time

Select the parity check function for communications data.

0: Even

1: Odd

2: No parity

0 to 2

Sets the time to wait for a response after the DSR (data-send-request) message is received from the Master.

10 to

1 ms

7-4

10-29

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n157 n158 n159 n160 n161 n162 n163

019D

019E

019F

01A0

01A1

01A2

01A3

Name

RS-422/485

RTS control selection

Motor code

Description Setting range

0, 1 1

Unit of setting

Select whether or not to enable the

RTS (request-to-send) communications control function.

0: RTS control enabled

1: RTS control disabled (available to

1-to-1 RS-422 communications only)

Sets the code to automatically set the constants for energy-saving control.

0 to 10: 200-V AC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW motor

20 to 30: 400-V AC, 0.1- to 4.0-kW motor

These parameters prevent the motor from over excitation due to voltage changes during energy-saving control.

0 to 70 1

0 to

120

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

7-5

Varies with the capacity.

120 No

6-6

6-8 Energy-saving voltage upper limit at

60-Hz output

Energy-saving upper limit voltage at 6-Hz output

Power detection width for probe operation switching

Power detection filter constant

PID output gain as a percentage at each frequency based on the rated motor voltage as

100%.

* Normally, the default settings do not need to be changed.

Sets the detection width of power that sets the Inverter into probe operation.

Sets the width as a percentage based on the power to be detected as 100%.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

* The Inverter will operate with a power detection width of 10% if the value is set to 0.

Sets the filter time constant of the power detection block of the Inverter operating in probe operation.

Filter time constant (ms) = Set value in n162 x 4 (ms)

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

* The Inverter will operate with a time constant of 20 ms if the value is set to 0.

Sets the rate by which PID control value is multiplied for PID control.

* Normally, the default setting does not need to be changed.

0 to 25 1%

0 to

100

0 to

255

0.0 to

25.0

1 (4 ms)

0.1

1.0

6-8

6-10

6-18

10-30

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n164 n165 n166 n167

01A4

---

01A6

Name Description

PID feedback input block selection

Not used

Input openphase detection level

(See note.)

Input openphase detection time (See note.)

Sets the feedback input block for PID control detection.

0: Frequency reference control terminal for voltage input (0 to 10 V) is enabled.

1: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (4 to 20 mA) is enabled.

2: Frequency reference control terminal for current input (0 to 20 mA) is enabled.

3: Multi-function analog voltage input

(0 to 10 V) is enabled.

4: Multi-function analog current input

(4 to 20 mA) is enabled.

5: Pulse train reference control terminal is enabled.

* Make sure that the target value input and feedback value input do not overlap with each other.

---

Sets the main circuit DC voltage fluctuation level, as a percentage, for detecting an input open phase.

200-V-class Inverters: Set 400 V as

100%.

400-V-class Inverters: Set 800 V as

100%.

If “0” is set, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 7 (%)

Sets the input open-phase detection time in units of seconds.

If “0” is set, the input open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 10 (s)

Setting range

0 to 5 1

Unit of setting

---

0 to

100

0 to

255

---

1 %

1 s

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-18

---

6-47

Note Available for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

10-31

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n168 n169 n170

Name Description Setting range

0 to

100

Unit of setting

1 % 01A6

01A6

---

Output openphase detection level

(See note 1.)

Output openphase detection time (See note 1.)

01AA Enter Command Operation Selection

Not used

Sets as a percentage the current for detecting an output open phase, taking the Inverter’s rated output current as 100%.

If “0” is set, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 5 (%)

Sets the output open-phase detection time in units of seconds.

If “0” is set, the output open-phase detection function will be disabled.

Recommended setting: 0.2 (s)

Select the treatment of the Enter command for momentay power interruptions.

0: Accept Enter command only when operation is stopped.

1: Accept Enter command at any time.

* Changed parameters are enabled even if the Enter command is not sent, but the changes will be lost if power is reset if the Enter command has not been sent.

---

0.0 to

2.0

0.1 s 0.0

0 to 1 1

-----

---

Default setting

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-47

---

6-47

7-18

--n171 n172 n173 n174

01AD Proportional

Gain for DC

Control

01AE Integral Time

Constant for

DC Control

Normally use this parameter at the default setting.

1 to

999

1 to

250

(0.001)

(4 ms)

(0.083)

10 (See note 2.)

(100 ms)

10 (See note 2.)

---

Note 1.

Available for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters only.

Note 2.

These parameters are available on 200-V/400-V, 4.0-kW (or less) Inverters (software version

VSP010024 or higher) or 5.5-kW/7.5-kW Inverters (VSP010104 or higher).

10-32

List of Parameters Chapter 10

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n175 n176 n177

01AF

01B0

01B1

Name Description Setting range

Unit of setting

Low-speed carrier frequency reduction selection

Parameter copy and verify function selection

Parameter read prohibit selection

This function automatically reduces the carrier frequency to 2.5 kHz if the output frequency is 5 kHz or less, and the output current is 110% or greater than the rated Inverter current. Normally this setting is not necessary.

This function improves the overload capacity at low frequencies.

0: Disables low-speed carrier frequency reduction.

1: Enables low-speed carrier frequency reduction.

* Normally, it is not necessary to change the default setting.

* This function is enabled if n080

(carrier frequency) is set to 2, 3, or

Selects the function to read, copy, and verify the parameter between the memory of the Inverter and that of the

Digital Operator.

rdy: Ready to accept the next command.

rEd: Reads the Inverter parameter.

Cpy: Copies the parameter to the

Inverter.

vFy: Verifies the Inverter parameter.

vA: Checks the Inverter capacity display.

Sno: Checks the software number.

Select the copy-prohibit function.

Set this parameter to store the data in the EEPROM of the Digital Operator.

0: Read prohibited for Inverter parameters (data cannot be stored in

EEPROM).

1: Read possible for Inverter parameters (data can be stored in

EEPROM).

0, 1 rdy to

Sno

0, 1

---

Default setting

0 (See note.)

Changes during operation

Reference page

6-24 rdy

3-10

3-17

Note The default setting for 5.5-kW and 7.5-kW Inverters is “1.”

10-33

List of Parameters

Parameter

No.

Register No.

(Hex) n178 01B2

Name

Fault log

Chapter 10

Description

Used to display the four most recent fault recorded.

Setting range

---

Unit of setting

---

Default setting

---

Changes during operation

---

Reference page

6-48 n179 01B3 Software number

Fault generation item

Display

* The most recent fault is indicated by “1.”

* This parameter is monitored only.

Used to display the software number of the Inverter for OMRON’s control reference use.

* This parameter is monitored only.

-----------

10-34

Chapter 11 Using the Inverter for a Motor

Using the Inverter for a Motor Chapter 11

Using Inverter for Existing Standard Motor

When a standard motor is operated with the Inverter, a power loss is lightly higher than when operated with a commercial power supply.

In addition, cooling effects also decline the low-speed range, resulting in an increase in the motor temperature. Therefore, motor torque should be reduced in the low speed range.

The following figure shows allowable load characteristics of a standard motor.

If 100% torque is continuously required in the low-speed range, use a special motor for use with Inverters.

Allowable Load Characteristics of Standard Motor

25% ED (or 15 min)

40% ED (or 20 min)

60% ED (or 40 min)

Torque (%)

Continuous

High-speed Operation

When using the motor at high-speed (60 Hz or more), problems may arise in dynamic balance and bearing durability.

Torque Characteristics

The motor may require more acceleration torque when the motor is operated with the Inverter than when operated with a commercial power supply. Check the load torque characteristics of the machine to be used with the motor to set a proper V/f pattern.

Vibration

The 3G3MV Series employs high carrier PWM control to reduce motor vibration. When the motor is operated with the Inverter, motor vibration is almost the same as when operated with a commercial power supply.

Motor vibration may, however, become greater in the following cases.

•

Resonance with the natural frequency of the mechanical system

Take special care when a machine that has been operated at a constant speed is to be operated in variable speed mode.

If resonance occurs, install vibration-proof rubber on the motor base.

•

Imbalance rotor

Take special care when the motor is operated at a high speed (60 Hz or more).

11-2

Frequency (Hz)

Using the Inverter for a Motor Chapter 11

Noise

Noise is almost the same as when the motor is operated with a commercial power supply. Motor noise, however, becomes louder when the motor is operated at a speed higher than the rated speed (60 Hz).

Using Inverter for Special Motors

Pole-changing Motor

The rated input current of pole-changing motors differs from that of standard motors. Select, therefore, an appropriate Inverter according to the maximum input current of the motor to be used.

Before changing the number of poles, always make sure that the motor has stopped.

Otherwise, the overvoltage protective or overcurrent protective mechanism will be actuated, resulting in an error.

Submersible Motor

The rated input current of submersible motors is higher than that of standard motors. Therefore, always select an Inverter by checking its rated output current.

When the distance between the motor and Inverter is long, use a cable thick enough to connect the motor and Inverter to prevent motor torque reduction.

Explosion-proof Motor

When an explosion-proof motor or increased safety-type motor is to be used, it must be subject to an explosion-proof test in conjunction with the Inverter. This is also applicable when an existing explosionproof motor is to be operated with the Inverter.

Gear Motor

The speed range for continuous operation differs according to the lubrication method and motor manufacturer. In particular, the continuous operation of an oil-lubricated motor in the low speed range may result in burning. If the motor is to be operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz, consult with the manufacturer.

Synchronous Motor

A synchronous motor is not suitable for Inverter control.

If a group of synchronous motors is individually turned on and off, synchronism may be lost.

Single-phase Motor

Do not use the Inverter for a single-phase motor.

The motor should be replaced with a 3-phase motor.

Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains)

If an oil-lubricated gear box or speed reducer is used in the power transmission mechanism, oil lubrication will be affected when the motor operates only in the low speed range. The power transmission mechanism will make noise and experience problems with service life and durability if the motor is operated at a speed higher than 60 Hz.

11-3

Using the Inverter for a Motor Chapter 11

Motor Burnout Caused by Insufficient Dielectric Strength of Each

Phase of Motor

Surge occurs among the phases of the motor when the output voltage is switched.

If the dielectric strength of each phase of the motor is insufficient, the motor may burn out.

The dielectric strength of each phase of the motor must be higher than the maximum surge voltage.

Normally, the maximum surge voltage is approximately three times the power voltage imposed on the

Inverter.

Be sure to connect Inverter-dedicated motors if the Inverter is a 400-V-class model. Standard motors do not have sufficient dielectric strength and may burn out.

11-4

Revision History

A manual revision code appears as a suffix to the catalog number on the front cover of the manual.

Cat. No. I527-E1-04

Revision code

The following table outlines the changes made to the manual during each revision. Page numbers refer to the previous version.

Revision code

Date Revised content

May 1999 Original production

December 1999 New Inverters with different capacities added: 3G3MV-A2055/A2075/A4055/A4075.

New functions added for with 5.5-/7.5-kW Inverters, new 3G3IV–PFN j Input-side Noise Filter added, and general revisions and corrections made. Specific changes are as follows:

Preliminary: Information added on installation types.

Page 1-2: Information added on enclosure ratings and motor capacity.

Page 1-7, 3-3: Information added on Reset Key. Note added after table.

Pages 1-8: Summary of new features added.

Page 2-4: Information added on dimensions and weight of new models.

Page 2-5: “Caution” notices changed to “Warning” notices.

Page 2-6: Information added on ambient operating temperatures, Inverter weights, and installing

Inverters in control panels.

Page 2-8: Description changed.

Page 2-9: Information added on removing the terminal cover and bottom cover.

Page 2-12, 2-19, 2-20: Information added for new models.

Page 2-14, 2-34, 3-7, 5-4, 5-8, 5-30, 5-35, 5-32, 7-25, 9-2, 9-4, 10-4, 6-27 to 6-28, 10-12, 10-14,

10-16, 10-17, 10-19, 10-26: Information added to tables. Notes added after tables.

Page 2-22: Information added on circuit breaker installation.

Page 2-23: Information added on magnetic contactors.

Page 2-24: Information added on noise filters.

Page 2-27: Information added on cable length.

Page 2-32: Information added on Braking Resistor and Braking Resistor Unit.

Page 2-33: Information added to wiring diagram and table. Note added after table.

Page 2-39, 2-41, 6-8, 8-5, 8-8, 7-28, 8-9 to 8-13, 8-26, 9-10, 9-12, 9-14, 9-18, 9-19, 9-28:

Information added to table.

Page 3-8, 3-9, 5-29: Notes added after table.

Page 3-11: Information added on motor capacities.

Page 3-12, 3-16, 7-12, 7-15: Notes added.

Page 5-10: Information added on remote/local selection methods.

Page 5-14: Information added on frequency referencing by analog inputs.

Page 5-15: Information added on multi-function analog inputs.

Page 5-16: Information added on multi-function analog inputs and frequency reference loss detection.

Page 5-24: Information added on pulse train frequency reference input filter time constant.

Page 5-34: Information added on external base block command and speed search. Information added to table. Note added after table.

Page 6-4, 6-5, 6-20, 7-27: Changes made in table.

Page 6-6: Information added on energy-saving control.

Page 6-45: Information added on accumulated operating time.

Page 6-49: Information added on input and output open-phase detection.

Page 7-5: Correction made to section heading. Information added on baud rate, parity, and RTS control selection.

Page 7-9: Information added on message intervals.

Page 7-10: Information added on message data configuration.

Page 7-11: Information added on error checks.

Page 7-22: Bit status changed.

Page 7-26, 7-27, 9-27, 8-26: Correction made to heading.

Page 8-16: Information added on multi-function inputs.

Page 8-23: Information added on sequence errors and unwanted current paths. Diagram added.

Page 9-7, 9-15: Model number changed.

Page 9-21, 9-24: Diagram added

Page 9-25: Information added to table. Diagram added.

Page 9-26: Information on input noise filters deleted.

R-1

Revision History

Revision code

Date Revised content

July 2003 CompoBus/D changed to DeviceNet throughout the manual.

Parameters added for the DeviceNet Communications Unit.

Description of the Digital Panel Operator added.

General revisions and corrections made.

February 2005 “PC” was globally changed to “PLC” in the sense of Programmable Controller.

Inner cover: Information added above notice.

Wiring precautions: Caution added.

Before About this Manual : Warranty, application consideration, and disclaimer information added.

Page 1-9: New features added.

Page 2-11: Caution added.

Pages 4-3, 4-5, and 5-33: Information added on setting n052.

Page 5-14: Information added under 0 setting for n077.

Pages 6-16, 6-26, 6–40, 7-30, 10-12, 10-15, : Notes added.

Page 6-40: Settings added for n081.

Page 7-2: Name of I539 corrected.

Pages 7-9, 7-49: “CS1” changed to “CS.”

Pages 7-18, 10-14, 10-18, 10-25, 10-31, and 10-32: Notes removed

Page 7-18: n170 added.

Page 7-30: Board/Unit versions corrected.

Page 7-32: Manual table modified.

Pages 9-12 and 9-14: Reference information added to graphic.

Page 10-9: Names of parameters n041 to n044 corrected.

Page 10-10: Setting range for n056 corrected.

Page 10-21: Setting added to n081 and setting range changed accordingly.

Page 10-25: n117 to n119 added.

Page 10-32: n170 to n174 added.

R-2

OMRON Corporation

FA Systems Division H.Q.

66 Matsumoto

Mishima-city, Shizuoka 411-8511

Japan

Tel: (81)55-977-9181/Fax: (81)55-977-9045

Authorized Distributor:

Cat. No. I527-E1-04 Note: Specifications subject to change without notice.

This manual is printed on 100% recycled paper.

Printed in Japan

¡Hola! Soy un chatbot de IA específicamente entrenado para ayudarte con el Omron 3G3MV El manual del propietario. He revisado a fondo el documento y puedo ayudarte a localizar la información exacta que necesitas o explicar el contenido de forma clara y sencilla. Ya sea que busques orientación sobre funciones específicas, pasos para solucionar problemas o uso general, no dudes en hacer tus preguntas. Cuantos más detalles proporciones sobre tus inquietudes o necesidades, más preciso y eficaz será mi apoyo.

Asistente escribiendo

El asistente está fuera del teclado. Por favor, inténtalo de nuevo más tarde.

Anuncio